Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
IBM Unica Distributed MarketingVersion 8.5.0 Publication Date: June 7, 2011
Corporate Marketer's Guide
Copyright
© Copyright IBM 2011IBM CorporationReservoir Place North170 Tracer LaneWaltham, MA 02451-1379
All software and related documentation is subject to restrictions on use and disclosure as set forth inthe IBM International Program License Agreement, with restricted rights for U.S. government usersand applicable export regulations.
Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.
IBM, the IBM logo, Unica and the Unica logo, NetInsight, Affinium and MarketingCentral aretrademarks or registered trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries orboth. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies. © CopyrightIBM Corporation 2011. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Preface Contacting IBM Unica technical support ...................................................................................16
1 Introduction to IBM Unica Distributed Marketing Corporate Marketing ..............18About IBM Unica Distributed Marketing..............................................................................................18
Distributed Marketing use cases.........................................................................................................18
About corporate marketers .................................................................................................................19
About field marketers .......................................................................................................................... 20
To log in to IBM Unica Marketing .......................................................................................................21
2 Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing ......................................................22About customizing Distributed Marketing ..........................................................................................22
To set your basic options.................................................................................................................... 22
To set your instance options...............................................................................................................23
Setting your start page........................................................................................................................ 23
The Calendar ...................................................................................................................................... 23
About the calendar.......................................................................................................................... 24
About calendar features..................................................................................................................24
To access the calendar................................................................................................................... 27
Navigating the calendar .................................................................................................................. 27
To set per-session calendar views .................................................................................................28
To access calendar objects by date ...............................................................................................28
To access an object from the calendar...........................................................................................29
To export the calendar ....................................................................................................................29
To publish the calendar................................................................................................................... 29
Viewing the timeline ........................................................................................................................ 30
About timeline view of the calendar ............................................................................................30
Navigating the timeline view .......................................................................................................31
Viewing the text or graphical calendar............................................................................................31
About the monthly calendar ........................................................................................................31
Navigating the text/graphical calendar........................................................................................32
About calendar color coding .......................................................................................................32
Version 8.5.0 3
About horizontal bars on the calendar ........................................................................................32
To color-code calendar items......................................................................................................33
To zoom in or out of a timeline view ...........................................................................................33
3 Overview of Corporate Campaigns .........................................................................34About Corporate Campaigns ..............................................................................................................34
Why field marketers participate in Corporate Campaigns ..................................................................34
How Corporate Campaigns link to campaigns in Campaign ..............................................................35
About the Corporate Campaign workflow...........................................................................................36
Example flow for creating a Corporate Campaign target list ..............................................................36
4 Running Corporate Campaigns ...............................................................................39Corporate Campaign tasks ................................................................................................................. 39
About creating Corporate Campaigns ................................................................................................39
To create a Corporate Campaign ...................................................................................................40
About assigning and inviting people to a Corporate Campaign .........................................................40
About the People tab ...................................................................................................................... 41
To manage Corporate Campaign members ...................................................................................42
To select team members for a Corporate Campaign .....................................................................42
To edit Corporate Campaign member access levels......................................................................43
To assign work by role....................................................................................................................44
About linking a Corporate Campaign to Campaign ............................................................................44
To create a campaign linked to a Corporate Campaign .................................................................45
To access a Corporate Campaign from Campaign .......................................................................45
About generating the target list from the flowchart .............................................................................45
To open a linked campaign in Campaign .......................................................................................45
To create and run the flowchart for the linked campaign ...............................................................45
About submitting the target list to field marketers...............................................................................46
To notify field marketers to review a proposed target list using notifications .................................46
About checking the validation status for target lists............................................................................47
To check the validation status for Corporate Campaign lists .........................................................47
About fulfilling the Corporate Campaign .............................................................................................47
To select the finalized list for the new flowchart .............................................................................47
To fulfill a Corporate Campaign ......................................................................................................48
5 Corporate Campaigns and field marketers.............................................................49Corporate Campaigns and field marketers .........................................................................................49
4 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Field marketer access to Corporate Campaigns ................................................................................49
About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists ..............................................................................50
About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists...........................................................................50
About reviewing the Corporate Campaign proposed target lists ....................................................50
About adding customers to Corporate Campaign...........................................................................51
About making permanent additions and deletions to a list .............................................................51
To review proposed target customers for a Corporate Campaign..................................................52
To view or accept previously declined targets ............................................................................53
To view or decline previously accepted targets ..........................................................................54
To view or remove added targets ...............................................................................................54
To finalize your portion of a Corporate Campaign target list ......................................................54
6 Subscriptions ............................................................................................................56About subscriptions............................................................................................................................. 56
The Subscription task in a Corporate Campaign workflow.................................................................57
The Subscription task and territories ..................................................................................................57
About Selection Levels ....................................................................................................................... 58
About the List of Territories.................................................................................................................58
About Subscription Levels ..................................................................................................................58
Subscription example.......................................................................................................................... 59
How territories, hierarchies, and user associations are defined.........................................................59
7 Workflows for Corporate Marketers ........................................................................61About workflows.................................................................................................................................. 61
Workflow concepts.............................................................................................................................. 62
About System tasks ............................................................................................................................ 63
Subscription system task ................................................................................................................64
Flowchart Run system task............................................................................................................. 64
Notify Field Marketers system task.................................................................................................65
List Review system task..................................................................................................................65
To create a flowchart run task ........................................................................................................66
To create a Notify Field Marketers system task .............................................................................66
To create a List Review system task ..............................................................................................67
To enable permanent updates to a list ...........................................................................................67
To create a Subscription task .........................................................................................................68
To configure the Subscription task .................................................................................................68
Version 8.5.0 5
Example of a Corporate Campaign workflow with system tasks ....................................................69
About User tasks ................................................................................................................................ 70
About task status ................................................................................................................................ 70
To edit the the default workflow..........................................................................................................70
To add roles to tasks ......................................................................................................................72
To fill data into a range of cells.......................................................................................................72
To print the Workflow tab................................................................................................................73
To add an attachment to a task ......................................................................................................73
About milestones ................................................................................................................................ 74
To define a milestone for a task .....................................................................................................75
About date rippling.............................................................................................................................. 76
To automatically calculate workflow dates......................................................................................76
To ripple dates above a locked task ...............................................................................................77
About schedules ................................................................................................................................. 77
To use a baseline schedule ............................................................................................................78
To keep an up-to-date schedule .....................................................................................................78
About designing for multiple drops, lots, waves, and offers ...............................................................79
About multi-drop design ..................................................................................................................79
About multi-lot design ..................................................................................................................... 80
About multi-wave design................................................................................................................. 80
About multi-offer design ..................................................................................................................81
Flowchart design in Campaign for multi-offer campaigns and Lists ...........................................81
To create a multi-offer Corporate Campaign ..............................................................................83
To create a multi-offer On-demand Campaign or List ................................................................84
Updating and finishing tasks...............................................................................................................85
To complete multiple tasks .............................................................................................................85
To skip multiple tasks......................................................................................................................86
About copying and pasting tasks ....................................................................................................86
To copy tasks in Internet Explorer ..............................................................................................86
Post task update dialog box............................................................................................................87
Managing task dependencies .............................................................................................................89
About adding a stage or task..............................................................................................................91
About editing a stage or task ..............................................................................................................92
To add a stage or task........................................................................................................................ 93
6 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To add a stage or task below a locked task .......................................................................................93
About the workflow spreadsheet view ................................................................................................94
About the workflow process flowchart view ....................................................................................94
About the workflow timeline view....................................................................................................94
Workflow tab layout page................................................................................................................94
Workflow tab fields.......................................................................................................................... 96
Workflow toolbar ............................................................................................................................. 98
Workflow links ............................................................................................................................... 100
To change the layout of the workflow ...........................................................................................101
To set first column width on workflow spreadsheet ......................................................................102
8 IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing............103About flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns......................................................................................103
About flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns...................................................................................103
About flowcharts for Lists..................................................................................................................104
About list selection flowcharts...........................................................................................................104
About List selection flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns............................................................104
How Corporate Campaign selections are stored .....................................................................105
About list selection flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns and Lists...........................................107
About user variables for list selection flowcharts ......................................................................107
Guidelines for list selection flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns and Lists..........................108
How On-demand Campaign or List selections are stored .......................................................108
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts ..............................................................................................110
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns.................................................110
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns..............................................111
On-demand Campaign fulfillment..............................................................................................112
About viewing campaign and list attributes in Distributed Marketing ...............................................112
To make flowchart attributes visible in Distributed Marketing ......................................................113
Process display settings and field marketer actions.....................................................................114
About running flowcharts .................................................................................................................. 115
About attaching flowchart output files to On-demand Campaigns ...............................................116
9 Working with Corporate Campaigns .....................................................................117Working with Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns ........................................117
To view and edit the Summary page ................................................................................................118
To modify the default contents of the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaignspages ................................................................................................................................................ 118
Version 8.5.0 7
To modify how Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns are displayed...............119
To view specific Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns ......................................120
To open and edit a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.......................................120
List, On-demand Campaign, and Corporate Campaign status.........................................................121
To change the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaign status............................121
To print a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign......................................................122
To export a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign...................................................122
To copy a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign .....................................................122
About people and teams................................................................................................................... 123
About people................................................................................................................................. 123
About the People tab .................................................................................................................... 123
To manage Corporate Campaign members .................................................................................124
To select team members for a Corporate Campaign ...................................................................124
To edit Corporate Campaign member access levels....................................................................125
To assign work by role..................................................................................................................126
About attachments ............................................................................................................................ 127
To add an attachment to a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.......................127
To remove an attachment from a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.............128
To post a message ........................................................................................................................... 128
To read messages ........................................................................................................................ 129
To delete Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns.................................................129
To delete a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign...............................................130
10 Alerts ......................................................................................................................131Alerts................................................................................................................................................. 131
To subscribe to alerts for an object ..................................................................................................131
Viewing alerts.................................................................................................................................... 132
11 Templates...............................................................................................................134About templates ................................................................................................................................ 134
About template components .............................................................................................................135
About creating templates ..................................................................................................................135
12 Working with Templates.......................................................................................137Template Configuration page ...........................................................................................................137
Templates Definition page ................................................................................................................139
To build a template ........................................................................................................................... 139
8 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Effects of template changes..........................................................................................................140
About template folders .................................................................................................................. 140
To edit a template ............................................................................................................................. 140
Template Properties tab ................................................................................................................... 141
Template People tab.........................................................................................................................142
Template Recurrence tab ................................................................................................................. 142
Template Workflow tab ..................................................................................................................... 144
To create workflow templates .......................................................................................................144
To use workflow templates ...........................................................................................................144
To configure workflow for a template............................................................................................145
Template Campaign tab ................................................................................................................... 145
Template Tabs tab............................................................................................................................ 146
To add a tab to a template............................................................................................................147
To move a tab or form on a template ...........................................................................................147
To delete a form or custom tab from a template ..........................................................................148
Template Attachments tab................................................................................................................ 148
Template Custom Links tab ..............................................................................................................149
Workflow templates page..................................................................................................................149
To export a workflow template......................................................................................................150
Data Mapping Definitions page.........................................................................................................151
To add a data mapping.................................................................................................................151
To edit a data mapping ................................................................................................................. 152
Icons page ........................................................................................................................................ 152
To add or edit an icon ................................................................................................................... 153
About importing and exporting templates .........................................................................................154
To import templates ......................................................................................................................154
About exporting templates ............................................................................................................155
To export a group of templates.................................................................................................156
To export a single template.......................................................................................................156
About template validation .................................................................................................................157
About database validation.............................................................................................................157
About attribute validation ..............................................................................................................157
13 Form Editor ............................................................................................................158About the Form Editor....................................................................................................................... 158
Version 8.5.0 9
How forms and Campaign flowcharts relate.....................................................................................158
Adding a form generated from Campaign .......................................................................................159
About invalid forms ........................................................................................................................... 160
Form Definitions page....................................................................................................................... 160
To edit a form................................................................................................................................ 161
To revert a form ............................................................................................................................ 162
To delete a form............................................................................................................................ 162
About Run History series ..................................................................................................................163
About merging forms ........................................................................................................................ 163
To republish a form....................................................................................................................... 163
To change values displayed in forms ...............................................................................................164
Form status ....................................................................................................................................... 164
Form Editor page .............................................................................................................................. 165
Add an Element tab ...................................................................................................................... 166
To create an attribute................................................................................................................168
To create a dependent attribute................................................................................................168
To delete a custom attribute .....................................................................................................169
Element Properties tab .................................................................................................................169
Form Properties tab ......................................................................................................................169
To remove a custom attribute from a form ...................................................................................170
A IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts..........................................................................171About flowcharts ............................................................................................................................... 171
Creating flowcharts ........................................................................................................................... 171
Flowchart design considerations...................................................................................................172
To create a new flowchart.............................................................................................................172
Copying flowcharts............................................................................................................................ 173
To copy a flowchart....................................................................................................................... 173
Viewing flowcharts ............................................................................................................................ 174
To view a flowchart ....................................................................................................................... 174
Reviewing flowcharts ........................................................................................................................ 174
To review the processes in a flowchart.........................................................................................175
Editing flowcharts.............................................................................................................................. 175
To open a flowchart for editing .....................................................................................................175
To edit a flowchart's properties .....................................................................................................176
10 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Validating flowcharts ......................................................................................................................... 176
To validate a flowchart ..................................................................................................................177
Testing flowcharts ............................................................................................................................. 177
To test run a flowchart ..................................................................................................................177
To test run a flowchart branch ......................................................................................................178
Running flowcharts ........................................................................................................................... 178
To run a flowchart ......................................................................................................................... 178
To run a flowchart branch .............................................................................................................179
To run a flowchart process ...........................................................................................................179
To pause a flowchart run ..............................................................................................................179
To continue a paused flowchart run..............................................................................................180
To stop a flowchart run ................................................................................................................. 180
To continue a stopped flowchart run.............................................................................................180
Troubleshooting runtime errors.....................................................................................................180
Deleting flowcharts............................................................................................................................ 181
To delete a flowchart..................................................................................................................... 181
To print a flowchart ........................................................................................................................... 181
Packaging flowchart files for troubleshooting ...................................................................................182
To package flowchart files for troubleshooting .............................................................................182
Transmitting the flowchart data package to IBM Unica Technical Support ..................................183
Options for packaging flowchart data ...........................................................................................183
Flowchart reference .......................................................................................................................... 186
Flowchart tab icons (View mode)..................................................................................................186
Flowchart page icons (Edit mode) ................................................................................................187
B IBM Unica Campaign Processes...........................................................................188List of processes............................................................................................................................... 188
Data manipulation processes............................................................................................................188
Audience ....................................................................................................................................... 189
Audience levels ......................................................................................................................... 189
Householding ............................................................................................................................ 190
Switching levels......................................................................................................................... 190
Configuring the audience process ............................................................................................191
To configure an Audience process ...........................................................................................191
Example: Audience process......................................................................................................192
Version 8.5.0 11
Example: Filtering records ........................................................................................................193
Using the same input and output audience levels ....................................................................194
To select One <Input/Output Audience> Entry per <Different Audience>................................195
To select Some <Audience> Records per <Different Audience> .............................................196
To select entries for each entry at that audience level .............................................................197
Using different input and output audience levels ......................................................................198
To select All <Output Audience Level> Entries ........................................................................199
To select Some <Different Output Audience Level> Entries ....................................................199
To select One <Output Audience> per <Different Input Audience> .........................................200
Extract ........................................................................................................................................... 201
Example: Extracting transaction data .......................................................................................202
Prerequisites for extracting data from eMessage landing pages..............................................202
Configuring an Extract process.................................................................................................202
To extract data from a cell, single table, or strategic segment .................................................202
To extract data from an eMessage landing page .....................................................................204
Extract tab reference................................................................................................................. 205
Merge............................................................................................................................................ 206
To configure a Merge process ..................................................................................................206
Sample .......................................................................................................................................... 207
To configure a Sample process ................................................................................................207
About the sample size calculator ..............................................................................................210
To use the sample size calculator ............................................................................................210
Segment........................................................................................................................................ 211
Segmenting by field................................................................................................................... 211
Segmenting by query ................................................................................................................211
Using segments as input to another Segment process ............................................................212
Segmenting considerations.......................................................................................................212
Choosing a segmenting method ...............................................................................................212
Making segments mutually exclusive........................................................................................212
Restricting segment size ...........................................................................................................213
Selecting source cells ...............................................................................................................213
To configure a Segment process by field .................................................................................213
To configure a Segment process by query ...............................................................................214
Segment Process Configuration: Segment tab.........................................................................214
12 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Segment Process Configuration: Extract tab ............................................................................216
Segment Process Configuration: General tab ..........................................................................217
New Segment and Edit Segment dialogs .................................................................................218
Select ............................................................................................................................................ 219
To configure a Select process ..................................................................................................219
Run processes .................................................................................................................................. 220
Call List ......................................................................................................................................... 220
To configure a contact process (Mail List or Call List)..............................................................221
Create Seg.................................................................................................................................... 225
To configure a Create Seg process ..........................................................................................226
Cube.............................................................................................................................................. 227
To configure a Cube process....................................................................................................227
Mail List......................................................................................................................................... 228
To configure a contact process (Mail List or Call List)..............................................................228
Schedule ....................................................................................................................................... 233
To configure a Schedule process .............................................................................................234
To use the Calendar tool in the Schedule process...................................................................236
Scheduling based on triggers ...................................................................................................237
To configure a Schedule process to run on a trigger................................................................237
Running on triggers................................................................................................................... 237
Example: Run on Trigger ..........................................................................................................237
Sending triggers after each run.................................................................................................238
Using triggers with other scheduling options ............................................................................238
Snapshot ....................................................................................................................................... 238
To configure a Snapshot process .............................................................................................238
Optimization processes..................................................................................................................... 241
Model ............................................................................................................................................ 241
To configure a Model process...................................................................................................241
Response...................................................................................................................................... 243
To configure a Response process ............................................................................................243
Score............................................................................................................................................. 245
To configure a Score process ...................................................................................................246
Track ............................................................................................................................................. 247
To configure a Track process ...................................................................................................247
Version 8.5.0 13
C Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes ...................................................250About processes ............................................................................................................................... 250
Types of processes........................................................................................................................... 251
Contact processes ........................................................................................................................ 251
Data manipulation processes........................................................................................................251
Run processes .............................................................................................................................. 252
Optimization processes.................................................................................................................252
Working with processes.................................................................................................................... 253
To add a new process to a flowchart............................................................................................253
To copy and paste a process........................................................................................................254
To cut a process ........................................................................................................................... 254
To paste processes from the template library...............................................................................254
To move a process ....................................................................................................................... 255
To delete a process ...................................................................................................................... 255
To connect two processes ............................................................................................................256
To delete a connection between two processes...........................................................................256
Example: Process Connections ....................................................................................................257
Configuring and editing processes................................................................................................257
To access a process configuration window ..............................................................................258
To run a process........................................................................................................................... 258
About run history options ..........................................................................................................259
Run history options scenario.....................................................................................................259
Run History Options window reference.....................................................................................259
Choosing data sources for processes ..............................................................................................260
To select an incoming cell, segment, or table as the input to a process......................................260
To select multiple tables as the input to a process.......................................................................260
To map a new table for selecting as a source..............................................................................261
Choosing in-database processing for processes..............................................................................261
Turning in-database processing on or off .....................................................................................262
To turn in-database processing on or off for a flowchart ..............................................................262
To turn in-database processing on or off globally.........................................................................263
Creating queries in processes ..........................................................................................................263
How queries are evaluated in Campaign processes ....................................................................263
To create a query with Point & Click.............................................................................................264
14 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To create a query with Text Builder ..............................................................................................265
To create a query using Query Helper..........................................................................................266
Creating queries using SQL..........................................................................................................267
Building raw SQL statements in Campaign ..............................................................................267
Using the TempTable and OutputTempTable tokens in raw SQL queries ...............................268
Example: Using the TempTable and OutputTempTable tokens...............................................269
Referencing Extract tables in raw SQL queries ........................................................................269
To create a raw SQL query in the SQL Text Entry Area ..........................................................269
To pass multiple commands in a raw SQL statement ..............................................................270
To specify pre- or post-processing SQL statements.................................................................271
Profiling fields.................................................................................................................................... 271
To profile a field ............................................................................................................................ 272
Restricting input for profiling .........................................................................................................272
Disallowing profiling ...................................................................................................................... 274
Setting profiling options................................................................................................................. 274
To access the Profiling Options window ...................................................................................274
Specifying the maximum number of profile segments ..............................................................275
To set the maximum number of segments for profiling ............................................................275
Profiling by meta type ...............................................................................................................275
Refreshing a profile count .............................................................................................................276
To insert a profile category into a query .......................................................................................276
To print the results of a profile ......................................................................................................276
To export profile data.................................................................................................................... 276
Specifying an output file or table for contact logging........................................................................277
To specify an output file for contact logging .................................................................................277
To specify a database table for contact logging ...........................................................................278
Changing the seed for random selection..........................................................................................279
To change the random seed for selecting records .......................................................................279
Skipping duplicate IDs in process output..........................................................................................279
To use the Calendar tool .................................................................................................................. 280
D User variables .........................................................................................................281About user variables ......................................................................................................................... 281
To create a user variable .................................................................................................................. 282
Version 8.5.0 15
N10014
Preface
■ Contacting IBM Unica technical supportN40001
Contacting IBM Unica technical supportIf you encounter a problem that you cannot resolve by consulting the documentation,your company’s designated support contact can log a call with IBM Unica technicalsupport. Use the information in this section to ensure that your problem is resolvedefficiently and successfully.
If you are not a designated support contact at your company, contact your IBM Unicaadministrator for information.
Information you should gatherBefore you contact IBM Unica technical support, you should gather the followinginformation:
• A brief description of the nature of your issue.
• Detailed error messages you see when the issue occurs.
• Detailed steps to reproduce the issue.
• Related log files, session files, configuration files, and data files.
• Information about your product and system environment, which you can obtain asdescribed in "System Information" below.
System informationWhen you call IBM Unica technical support, you might be asked to provide informationabout your environment.
If your problem does not prevent you from logging in, much of this information isavailable on the About page, which provides information about your installed IBM Unicaapplications.
You can access the About page by selecting Help > About. If the About page is notaccessible, you can obtain the version number of any IBM Unica application by viewingthe version.txt file located under each application’s installation directory.
16 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Contacting IBM Unica technical support
Contact information for IBM Unica technicalsupportFor ways to contact IBM Unica technical support, see the IBM Unica Product TechnicalSupport website: (http://www.unica.com/about/product-technical-support.htm).
Version 8.5.0 17
N1001B
1 Introduction to IBMUnica DistributedMarketing CorporateMarketing
■ About IBM Unica Distributed Marketing■ Distributed Marketing use cases■ About corporate marketers■ About field marketers■ To log in to IBM Unica Marketing
N50001
About IBM Unica Distributed MarketingIBM Unica Distributed Marketing provides marketing organizations with the ability todistribute the execution of centrally managed marketing campaigns throughout theenterprise. It allows centralized marketers to maintain control over corporate standardsand business rules, while allowing remote users to tailor or provide input to thecampaign for greater local customization and relevancy - ultimately increasing responserates and revenue.
Distributed Marketing supports campaign customization by remote users; but the remoteusers can change only those parameters specified by the campaign designer.
For example, a retail company might want to centrally control certain selection criteria,but allow individual store owners to control selections related to their stores or locations.
N60001
Distributed Marketing use casesDistributed Marketing enables organizations to accomplish their goals by supportingmultiple distributed marketing use cases. Specifically, Distributed Marketing enables youto:
• Centralize marketing efforts while ensuring that corporate business rules, logic, andbest practices are enforced, allowing execution and controlled customizationthroughout the organization.
18 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About corporate marketers
• Promote field compliance by having corporate marketers centralize campaign designwith corporate business rules (such as opt-outs) and customer preferences.
• More efficiently design, conduct, manage, and measure both global and localizedcross-channel marketing initiatives.
• Increase the number of users who are able to contribute to and execute campaigns,providing more flexibility within an organization and enabling measurement andmanagement of marketing efforts.
• Provide "self-serve" customer interaction management within an enterprise, for lesstechnically-oriented marketers and individuals closest to the customer, withoutcompromising corporate rules, goals, or objectives.
• Manage customer interactions in real-time through email and the web.
• Allow marketing decision-making and campaign management to be handled by fieldmarketers, while corporate marketers manage corporate marketing communicationand policies.
N70001
About corporate marketersIn Distributed Marketing, corporate marketers develop templates for reusable campaignlogic and lists of customer contacts. Corporate marketers manage corporate campaignsand oversee marketing activities of field marketers.
Corporate marketers specialize in designing and generating campaigns from which thefield marketer can choose.
Primary corporate marketer tasksIn Distributed Marketing, corporate marketers perform the following tasks:
• Design campaign flowcharts.
• Create corporate campaigns.
• Manage campaign workflow.
• Create reports used to assess campaign success.
• Design templates for Corporate Campaigns, On-demand Campaigns, and Lists, foruse by field marketers and other corporate marketers.
Corporate marketer tasks in CampaignCorporate marketers also frequently use Campaign, through which they design andbuild flowcharts that are associated with Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and CorporateCampaigns.
Corporate marketer rolesCorporate marketers must be assigned the Corporate Marketer role in the Globalsecurity policy, or its equivalent, in order to perform their tasks.
Version 8.5.0 19
1 - Introduction to IBM Unica Distributed Marketing Corporate Marketing
To work in Campaign, corporate marketers must be assigned the following roles:
• Global Policy Execute
• Global Policy Design
• Global Partition Design or Execute
Corporate marketers require this privilege to work with user variables inCampaign.
N80001
About field marketersField marketers create and run local or regional marketing activities for a territory or lineof products. Field marketers work directly with customers, understand their needs, andcan make good decisions on how best to reach their customers with on-demand orcorporate marketing campaigns.
Field marketers may be line-of-business users, partners, branch office managers, retailstore managers, or members of local sales forces. Field marketers create on-demand(local) campaigns that they can run at any time to target a local customer base.
Field marketers tasksIn Distributed Marketing, field marketers work with:
• Lists
Field marketers typically create Lists in Distributed Marketing and define criteria toselect contacts for the Lists. These Lists can then be used by one or more On-demand Campaigns as needed.
• On-demand Campaigns
Field marketers can create and run On-demand Campaigns to target their set ofcustomers.
• Corporate Campaigns
Field marketers subscribe to the Corporate Campaigns they want to participate in.For those Corporate Campaigns, field marketers review and choose which of theircustomers are targeted by the Corporate Campaign.
Field marketer rolesField marketers must be assigned the Field Marketer role in the Global security policy,or its equivalent, in order to perform their tasks.
Related Topics• About Corporate Campaigns
N90001
20 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To log in to IBM Unica Marketing
To log in to IBM Unica MarketingBefore you begin working with IBM Unica Marketing, you need the following.
• An intranet (network) connection to access your IBM Unica Marketing server.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer installed on your computer.
• User name and password to sign in to IBM Unica Marketing.
• The URL to access IBM Unica Marketing on your network. If you are uncertain ofthe correct URL or need a user name or password, contact your IBM UnicaMarketing administrator.
1. Launch the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser.
2. Enter the IBM Unica Marketing URL in the browser's address field.
If IBM Unica Marketing is integrated with Windows Active Directory or with a webaccess control platform, and you are logged in to that system, IBM Unica Marketingdisplays the dashboard or the default start page configured by the IBM UnicaMarketing administrator. Your login is complete. Otherwise, a login page appears.
If your version of IBM Unica Marketing uses SSL, you may be prompted to accept adigital security certificate the first time you sign in. Click Yes to accept the certificate.
3. Enter your user name and password, then click Sign In.
A Change Password page may display, depending on how IBM Unica Marketingpassword rules are configured. Enter a new password, confirm by entering it again,and click Change Password.
If your login is successful, IBM Unica Marketing displays the dashboard or the defaultstart page configured by the IBM Unica Marketing administrator.
Version 8.5.0 21
N1003E
2 Customizing IBM UnicaDistributedMarketing
■ About customizing Distributed Marketing■ To set your basic options■ To set your instance options■ Setting your start page■ The Calendar
ND0001
About customizing Distributed MarketingUsers can customize the Distributed Marketing interface to meet their needs. Thesesettings are available in the Distributed Marketing Settings. The following tabledescribes what you can customize.
Option Description
Basic Settings Use these options to set your default security policy.
Instances Options Use these options to customize your default view of Lists, On-demand Cam-paigns, and Corporate Campaigns.
Calendar/ Timeline Use these options to customize how you view the system calendar.Settings
Related Topics• To set your basic options
NE0001
To set your basic optionsYour basic options allow you to choose the security policy used by default when youcreate new items.
1. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings page opens.
2. Click Basic Settings.
22 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To set your instance options
The Basic Settings page opens.
3. Select the security policy you want to use by default when you create new items inDistributed Marketing in the Default Security Policy field.
You can leave Global selected, which is the default, to use the global security policyset up by your administrator, or you can select a security policy that youradministrator instructed you to select. As a best practice, do not change the securitypolicy without the guidance of your administrator.
4. Click Save Changes to save your changes.NF0001
To set your instance optionsInstance options allow you to customize your default views of Lists, On-demandCampaigns, and Corporate Campaigns. For example, you may want to specify that theOn-demand Campaigns list that opens by default shows only On-demand Campaignsset to run in the current week.
1. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings page opens.
2. Click Instances Options.
The Instances Options page opens.
3. In each of the List, On-demand Campaign, and Corporate Campaign sections,select the default view.
4. Click Save Changes to save your changes.
When you open the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns page, yourdefault list is shown.
N100001
Setting your start pageIf you do not want to have a dashboard page appear when you first log in to IBM UnicaMarketing, you can select a page from one of the installed IBM products as your startpage.
To set a page you are viewing as your start page, select Settings > Start on currentpage. Pages available for selection as a start page are determined by each IBM UnicaMarketing product and by your permissions in IBM Unica Marketing.
On any page you are viewing, if the Start on current page option is enabled, you canset the page as your start page.
N110001
The Calendar■ About the calendar
Version 8.5.0 23
2 - Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
■ About calendar features■ To access the calendar■ Navigating the calendar■ To set per-session calendar views■ To access calendar objects by date■ To access an object from the calendar■ To export the calendar■ To publish the calendar■ Viewing the timeline■ Viewing the text or graphical calendar
N110008
About the calendarField marketers and corporate marketers can use the Distributed Marketing calendar toview the time horizon for marketing campaigns.
Historically, organizations have produced paper-based calendars and have updatedthem with the latest calendar-driven data. The calendar functionality provides marketinggroups with an electronic means of viewing and updating this data.
You can use the calendar as an aid for planning marketing campaigns as follows.
• You can view and update the time lines for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns.
• You can get an up-to-date view of planned or executed marketing efforts over time.
You can customize the appearance of the calendar in the following ways.
• You can set your default view of the calendar by using the Calendar/TimelineSettings screen.
• You can choose the look of the calendar by using the Set View Options dialog box.
Related Topics• To set your basic options
N160001
About calendar featuresThe Distributed Marketing calendar has the following features:
• You can display a calendar for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns.
• The calendar includes start and end dates for the displayed items.
• You can display Corporate Campaigns and On-demand Campaigns on the samecalendar in different colors for easy differentiation.
• You can open a Corporate Campaign, List, or On-demand Campaign directly fromthe calendar.
24 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Calendar
Default and per session calendar viewsYou can use one of two types of settings when you view the calendar:
• The default calendar settings, which are in effect every time you log in.
• The per session calendar settings. The per session calendar is the calendar thatresults from making temporary changes to the calendar view, without changing thedefault settings.
Objects displayed in a calendarYou can display any of the following objects in a calendar:
• Corporate Campaigns
• On-demand Campaigns
• Lists
• Corporate Campaigns and On-demand Campaigns
Calendar item datesEach List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign displayed in a calendar hasa start and end date. These are the target start and end dates you set when you createthe object.
About display options for the calendarYou can modify the calendar display in the following ways:
• You can modify the default calendar settings.
• You can set the calendar view for the current session.
• You can toggle between calendar views:
• Timeline view
• Calendar grid view
• Text view
• You can use the advanced search feature to filter the Lists, On-demand Campaigns,or Corporate Campaigns displayed in the calendar.
Timeline viewThis view displays a time-based view of the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns you select to display. You can select the time range for the calendar itemsyou select to display in a timeline view.
In a timeline view, each calendar item is displayed as a horizontal bar across its daterange. If you enable color coding, each calendar item is colored according to attributesyou select.
You can select the date range for the timeline from the following options:
Version 8.5.0 25
2 - Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
• Week displays one week. Each day is listed as a column. The starting day is eitherSunday or Monday, depending on the default calendar settings.
• Month displays a single calendar month. Each day is listed as a column, and daysare grouped into weeks.
• Quarter displays three calendar months. Each week is listed as a column, andweeks are grouped into months.
• Fiscal Year displays a fiscal year. Your administrator can configure the startingmonth for a fiscal year. Each month is listed as a column, and the months aregrouped into quarters.
• Calendar Year displays a calendar year that starts in January and ends inDecember. Each month is listed as a column, and the months are grouped intoquarters.
Any day specified as non-work time is grayed out in a timeline view.
Month-based text or calendar grid viewA month-based calendar view displays a calendar for a selected month.
In addition to a month-based timeline view, you can select from the following month-based calendar views:
• 1-Month Text: Each day contains a text listing of selected Collaborate Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns.
• 1-Month Calendar Grid: Each calendar item is displayed as a horizontal bar thatbegins on the item start date and ends on the item end date. If you enable colorcoding, each calendar item is colored according to attributes you select.
Any day specified as non-work time is indicated by a gray X in the background in acalendar grid view.
Color-coded by attribute viewYou can color-code the calendar display for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns by selected attributes. You can apply color-coding to a calendar grid view orto a timeline view.
You can filter the calendar display for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns according to the values of a selected attribute, such as the following:
• Execution status
• Schedule status
• Template type
The calendar displays a legend in the lower-right corner of the screen.
For example, consider the following On-demand Campaign attribute and its possiblevalues:
26 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Calendar
• Attribute name: Campaign Execution Status
• Valid attribute values: Active, Complete, Under development
If you group and display On-demand Campaigns by Campaign Execution Status, theresulting calendar appears with four colors in the legend. There is one color for eachvalid attribute value, and one for N/A.
The color assigned to N/A appears in the calendar when calendar items are notassigned a value for the selected attribute.
About the horizontal bars used in calendarsThe timeline view and calendar grid view display calendar items as horizontal bars.
Note the following about the bars:
• The bars represent the date range for objects displayed on the calendar.
• The bar color depends on values of an attribute you optionally select for colorcoding.
• The shape of the bars determine the following about item start and end dates:
• Rounded left end: The start date is the date indicated by the left end of the bar.
• Rounded right end: The end date is the date indicated by the right end of thebar.
• Flat left end: The start date is prior to the visible date range.
• Flat right end: The end date is beyond the visible date range.N170001
To access the calendarYou can access the calendar in one of the following ways:
• View the calendar for Corporate and On-demand Campaigns from the Home page.
• View the default calendar.
• View a calendar for a set of Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns.
1. From the Distributed Marketing menu, select Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns.
2. From the View menu, select from Set View Options.
3. Set view options, and select to view the calendar.
4. Click Apply.N180001
Navigating the calendarAll calendar/timeline views contain the following icons:
Version 8.5.0 27
2 - Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
Icon Description
Opens the Set View Options dialog box. Use this link to change the way thecalendar appears.
Opens the Advanced Search dialog box.
Changes the date range displayed, moving back one unit in time. For example, if
your current calendar view is a monthly timeline of September 2009, clickingdisplays August 2009.
Current date range Opens a drop-down list of available date ranges. Use this link to quickly change toany other date range.
For example, if you are viewing a monthly calendar for July 2009, you can changethe view to January 2010 by clicking this link and then choosing January 2010from the drop-down list.
Changes the date range displayed, moving forward one unit in time. For example,if your current calendar view is a weekly timeline from 7/20/2009 through
7/26/2009, clicking displays 7/27/2009 through 8/2/2009.
N190001
To set per-session calendar viewsYou can change the views of the calendar from default settings by clicking View fromany of the following:
• The Calendar page
• A listing of Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns.
1. Access the calendar.
2. Click View.
The Set View options dialog box opens.
3. Select options to change the view.
4. Click Apply.N1A0001
To access calendar objects by dateYou can filter the calendar to display all of the Collaborate objects for a selected date.
For example, if the calendar is currently displaying Corporate Campaigns for June,2009, You can click 7 to open a list page containing all Corporate Campaigns whosedate ranges contain June 7th, 2009.
28 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Calendar
1. Click the date in an open calendar displaying Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns.
N1B0001
To access an object from the calendarYou can view the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign from itscalendar.
1. Click the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign on the calendar.
The List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign opens.N1C0001
To export the calendarYou can save a snapshot of the current calendar in HTML format. The calendar issaved in a ZIP archive file.
1. With the calendar open, click the menu next to the print icon ( ) and selectExport.
2. Choose one of the following options:
• Click Open to open the ZIP file of the calendar.
• Click Save and choose a location, to save the calendar to disk.
• Click Cancel to return to the Calendar screen without publishing.
The system publishes the calendar into a ZIP file archive.N1D0001
To publish the calendarTo get a snapshot of the current calendar, save it in HTML format (into a ZIP archivefile).
1. Choose the calendar view to publish.
Select the objects, time range, and appearance for the calendar view. You can dothis in either of the following ways:
• From the Local Marketing menu, select Calendar, then select items to view.
• At a list page for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns, click
the View icon ( ) and choose a calendar view.
2. Click the Print icon ( ) and select Export.
3. Do one of the following.
• Click Open to open the ZIP file of the calendar.
• Click Save and choose a location, to save the calendar to disk.
Version 8.5.0 29
2 - Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
• Click Cancel to return to the Calendar page without publishing.
The system publishes the calendar into a ZIP file archive. You can use any applicationfor working with ZIP files to access the calendar HTML pages. Note that you cannavigate to the next and previous pages of the calendar view in your web browser. Ifyou exported any project data, you can also navigate to that data from the calendarHTML pages.
N1E0001
Viewing the timelineIf you choose a timeline view, you can choose from several date ranges; the screen candisplay a single week’s data all the way up to an entire year’s worth of data.
Related Topics• Navigating the timeline view
• About timeline view of the calendar
• About horizontal bars on the calendar
N250001
About timeline view of the calendarThis view displays a grid-like view of the objects by some unit of time, depending onwhich timeline view you selected.
Each object is displayed in a horizontal bar across its date range. The name of theobject displays on the bar.
If you select Enable Color Coding from the calendar view options screen, eachobject's bar appears in a color based on an attribute you chose.
Choose a date-range for the timeline.
• Week: displays one week, with each day listed as a column. The starting day iseither Sunday or Monday depending on the option selected in the Calendar/TimelineSettings screen.
• Month: displays a single calendar month. Each day is listed as a column, and daysare grouped into weeks.
• Quarter: displays three calendar months. Each week is listed as a column, andthose weeks are grouped into months.
• Fiscal Year: displays a fiscal year (starting month depends on a configurationsetting, firstMonthInFiscalYear). Each month is listed as a column, and themonths are grouped into quarters.
• Calendar Year: displays a calendar year (starts in January and ends in December).Each month is listed as a column, and the months are grouped into quarters.
Any day that has been specified as non-work time has its column grayed out.Additionally, the name of the non-work time (for example Labor Day) displays whenyou mouse over the date.
N240001
30 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Calendar
Navigating the timeline viewYou can navigate the timeline by doing any of the following:
• Click the expand icon (+) next to an object to display tasks within the workflow forthat object.
• Click the object name to drill-down to a timeline containing the objects contained inits hierarchy.
Clicking a task opens the Workflow page of the project with which the task isassociated.
• Click the zoom in ( ) and zoom out ( ) icons. These icons appear above thetimeline. Zooming changes the date range of the timeline. For example, zooming infrom a monthly timeline takes you to a weekly timeline. The top-level is yearly, andthe lowest level is weekly.
N1F0001
Viewing the text or graphical calendarThe calendar views display data for a selected month. The page displays a gridcontaining a column for each day of the week: either five columns representing theweekdays, or seven, if you have chosen to display weekend days. You set this optionon the Calendar/Timeline Settings page.The page contains either five or six rows, eachrepresenting a week.
The view contains a cell for each day of the selected month. The cell for a day containseither a list of items active on the day (text) or a portion of a horizontal bar for eachactive item (graphical).
Related Topics• About the monthly calendar
• About timeline view of the calendar
• About calendar color coding
• About horizontal bars on the calendar
N270001
About the monthly calendarThis view displays a calendar of the selected month. It lists the objects you selected andfiltered on.
Choose either of two, monthly, calendar views.
• 1-Month Text: Each day contains a list of objects. An object is displayed for all daysin its date range.
• 1-Month Graphical: Each object is displayed in a horizontal bar that begins on itsstart date and ends on it end date. If you select Enable Color Coding from thecalendar view options page, each object's bar appears in a different color.
Version 8.5.0 31
2 - Customizing IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
Any day that has been specified as non-work time is indicated by a gray X in thebackground. Additionally, the name of the non-work time (for example Labor Day)displays when you mouse over the date.
N2A0001
Navigating the text/graphical calendarNavigate the calendar by performing any of the following actions:
• Click the object to display its summary page. For example, clicking a List opens theList's Summary page.
• Click the date to display a list page containing objects falling on that date. Forexample, if the calendar is currently displaying Lists for June 2009, clicking on 9opens a page containing all Lists whose date ranges contain June 9, 2009.
N280001
About calendar color codingYou can display objects in a color-coded manner on either the graphical calendar or inthe timeline views.
You first select the Enable Color Coding check box in the either the Calendar/TimelineSettings page or the Set View Options dialog box. After you check the box, the Basedon values for drop-down menu displays. This list contains attributes for your Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns.
From this list, you can choose any attribute that is an enumerated type. For example,consider the following attribute:
• Name: Product Family
• Valid values: CDs, Credit Card, Home Mortgage
If you choose to group objects by this attribute, your calendar contains four colors: onefor each valid value, plus N/A, corresponding to any objects that do not contain a valuefor the Product Family attribute.
The calendar also displays a legend in the lower-right corner of the screen. The legendlists all valid values (plus N/A) along with the color corresponding to that value.
N260001
About horizontal bars on the calendarThe timeline view and graphical calendar view display horizontal bars.
Note the following.
• The bars represent the date range for objects displayed on the calendar.
• The name of the object displays on the bar.
• The bars may be colored based on an attribute you select.
• The shape of the bars indicate the following:
• Rounded-end “start”: indicates the object starts on the date where the bar has arounded end.
32 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Calendar
• Rounded-end “end”: indicates the object ends on the date where the bar has arounded end.
• Flat-end “start”: indicates the object starts prior to the visible date range.
• Flat-end “end”: indicates the object ends after the visible date range.N2B0001
To color-code calendar itemsYou can use color-coding to display objects in a calendar according to a selectedattribute.
For example, you can display different colors of Corporate Campaigns, according towhether or not the Corporate Campaign is active.
You can also set color-coding for the default calendar settings.
1. Open one of the following:
• Calendar
• Lists
• Corporate Campaigns
• On-demand Campaigns
2. Click View.
The Set View Options dialog box opens.
3. Check Enable Color Coding.
4. Choose a calendar item and corresponding attribute on which to base color-codingfrom the lists that appear.
5. Click Apply.N2C0001
To zoom in or out of a timeline viewWhen you select a timeline view, you use the zoom feature to expand or collapse thedate range for the view.
The top level for zooming out displays a year-based date range.
The lowest level for zooming in displays a week-based date range.
For example, zooming in from a monthly timeline takes you to a weekly timeline.
1. Click the zoom in icon ( ) or zoom out icon ( ) to change the view.
Version 8.5.0 33
N100E1
3 Overview of CorporateCampaigns
■ About Corporate Campaigns■ Why field marketers participate in Corporate Campaigns■ How Corporate Campaigns link to campaigns in Campaign■ About the Corporate Campaign workflow■ Example flow for creating a Corporate Campaign target list
NC0001
About Corporate CampaignsCorporate Campaigns are marketing campaigns that are planned, scheduled, andexecuted by a centralized marketing team.
Corporate Campaigns are campaigns that present a corporate marketing message totargeted contacts. In Distributed Marketing, Corporate Campaigns execute on a fixedschedule, which you specify using scheduled workflow tasks in the Corporate CampaignWorkflow tab.
Corporate marketers typically use Distributed Marketing to incorporaterecommendations about which target customers to include with a Corporate Campaignfrom field marketers throughout an organization. A corporate Campaign allowscorporate marketers and field marketers to collaborate on a corporate-level campaign.
Related Topics• Corporate Campaigns and field marketers
N2D0001
Why field marketers participate in CorporateCampaigns
By participating in Corporate Campaigns, field marketers help distribute the marketingcampaign effort, enabling the organization to take advantage of the marketing designand strategy expertise provided by a central team of marketing specialists, as well asthe familiarity field marketers have with their personal contacts.
34 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
How Corporate Campaigns link to campaigns in Campaign
Corporate marketer's role in a CorporateCampaignUsing Distributed Marketing, corporate marketers present the following to fieldmarketers:
• The campaign marketing initiative, in the form of marketing messages and othermaterials
• The portions of a proposed target list assigned to each field marketer
Field marketer's role in a Corporate CampaignField marketers participate in specific Corporate Campaigns. Optionally, you can usethe Subscription feature to manage field marketers' participation in CorporateCampaigns. Participating field marketers review their portions of the proposed target listand provide input to corporate marketers about whom to add or delete from thecampaign. Once each field marketer provides final feedback on his or her portion of thelist, the corporate office fulfills the campaign.
ExamplesThe following examples illustrate situations in which field marketers decide whichcustomers to include in a Corporate Campaign:
• One field marketer may decide that a particular corporate initiative is not appropriatefor some of her assigned customers and removes those customers from theproposed target list.
• Another field marketer may not have enough resources to handle the demandgenerated by the corporate initiative. In this case, the field marketer decides toremove some customers from the proposed target list.
• Another field marketer may want to include customers not originally targeted by thecorporate marketing campaign, and adds them to the proposed target list.
N2E0001
How Corporate Campaigns link tocampaigns in Campaign
You create a Corporate Campaign in Distributed Marketing. Then, through theCorporate Campaign user interface, you create a linked campaign in Campaign. Thevalues of the following attributes of the campaign created in Campaign match the valuesin the Corporate Campaign you created in Distributed Marketing:
• Campaign name
• Campaign code
• Target start and end dates
Version 8.5.0 35
3 - Overview of Corporate Campaigns
• Any custom fields assigned in the data mapping between Distributed Marketing andCampaign.
Matching campaign codesCorporate marketers must ensure that the Corporate Campaign code matches that ofthe campaign in Campaign.
Corporate Campaign template designers can create the templates so that these twocodes match automatically when:
1. Corporate marketers create the Corporate Campaign before creating the linkedcampaign in Campaign.
2. Corporate marketers use Distributed Marketing to initially create the linked campaignin Campaign.
In order for corporate marketers to create linked campaigns, the corporate templatedeveloper must map the data between Campaign and Distributed Marketing.
N2F0001
About the Corporate Campaign workflowCorporate and field marketers typically work on Corporate Campaigns as follows:
1. Corporate marketers design the corporate marketing campaign.
2. Corporate marketers create a Corporate Campaign in Distributed Marketing.
3. Using the optional Subscription workflow task, corporate marketers inviteappropriate field marketers to subscribe to the Corporate Campaign.
4. Field marketers subscribe to the Corporate Campaign.
5. Corporate marketers create the proposed target list for the campaign.
6. Corporate marketers notify field marketers of the availability of the List.
7. Field marketers review the Corporate Campaign and provide feedback to corporatemarketers on the target list.
8. Corporate marketers can check field marketer review status.
9. Corporate marketers incorporate field marketer feedback to generate the final targetlist.
10. Field marketers optionally analyze campaign success.N300001
Example flow for creating a CorporateCampaign target list
The typical workflow for creating a final target list for a Corporate Campaign is:
36 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Example flow for creating a Corporate Campaign target list
1. The corporate marketer generates a proposed target list
2. Field marketers review and revise the proposed target list.
3. The corporate marketer generates the final target list.
In this example, the corporation is a financial institution. A corporate marketer isintroducing a new financial product and expects marketing decision feedback from ateam of field marketers.
The corporate marketer generates a proposedtarget listAfter designing a marketing campaign for the new financial product, the corporatemarketer selects customers from the corporate database who are appropriate recipientsof this campaign.
The corporate marketer may use the optional Subscription task in the workflow to invitethe appropriate field marketers to participate in the Corporate Campaign.
If the corporate marketer does not use the Subscription task, all field marketers whohave access to any records in the original target list (as defined by Data Level Filters)are invited to participate in the Corporate Campaign through its Field Marketer Notifytask. If there are no data level filters, all field marketers are automatically invited toparticipate in the Corporate Campaign, and they receive notifications to review of thetarget list.
Field marketers review the proposed target listField marketers subscribe to the Corporate Campaign. They then review their portionsof the target list.
Field marketer target assignments are made through the corporate database. For thepurpose of this example, assume the following target assignments for two fieldmarketers within the same corporation:
• Field_Marketer_1 is responsible for target_FM11 and target_FM12.
• Field_Marketer_2 is responsible for trget_FM21, target_FM22, and target_FM23.
Field marketers can view only those target customers assigned to them from aCorporate Campaign, as defined through data level filters.
In this example, the following occurs:
• Field_Marketer_1 accepts both of her target customers on the proposed list.
• Field_Marketer_2 declines all of his target customers on the proposed list due tobusiness constraints.
• Both field marketers finalize their customer selection for the Corporate Campaign.
• Final customer selections made by the field marketers are recorded in the databaseused by Campaign.
Version 8.5.0 37
3 - Overview of Corporate Campaigns
The corporate marketer generates the final targetlistAfter the field marketers review the proposed customers and make their final decisions,the corporate marketer generates a final target list that incorporates field marketerfeedback. When they are satisfied that the list review is complete, they can click Verifyand Lock, and mark the Review List task as complete in the workflow, to enable theFulfillment tasks to begin.
38 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N10106
4 Running CorporateCampaigns
■ Corporate Campaign tasks■ About creating Corporate Campaigns■ About assigning and inviting people to a Corporate Campaign■ About linking a Corporate Campaign to Campaign■ About generating the target list from the flowchart■ About submitting the target list to field marketers■ About checking the validation status for target lists■ About fulfilling the Corporate Campaign
N320001
Corporate Campaign tasksThe goal of a Corporate Campaign is to target customers that local field marketers haveapproved. To reach the fulfillment of the Corporate Campaign, corporate marketersperform the following tasks:
1. Create a Corporate Campaign.
2. Assign Corporate Campaign participants.
3. Link the Corporate Campaign to Campaign.
4. Generate the target list from the flowchart.
5. Submit the target list to field marketers.
6. Check the validation status of the target list.
7. Fulfill the Corporate Campaign.N330001
About creating Corporate CampaignsCorporate marketers create Corporate Campaigns with a Wizard that guides themthrough the required steps.
In the first step, corporate marketers select a Corporate Campaign template on whichthe new Corporate Campaign is based. The template should have the required tabs,workflow, people, and other settings for the Corporate Campaign. Corporate marketerscan then modify the Corporate Campaign as necessary.
Version 8.5.0 39
4 - Running Corporate Campaigns
Required informationThe following information is required when creating a Corporate Campaign:
• Target start date
• Target end date
• Corporate Campaign code, which you can have generated automatically
Post-creation tasksAfter creating the Corporate Campaign, corporate marketers can:
• Attach campaign messages or other information about the initiative.
• Assign participants to the Corporate Campaign.N3B0001
To create a Corporate Campaign1. From the Local Marketing menu, select Corporate Campaigns.
2. Click the Add icon ( ).
The Select a Corporate Campaign Template dialog box opens. Templates are listedon the left. If you select a template, information about that template appears on theright.
3. Select a template from the list on the left, and click Continue.
4. Continue through the Wizard pages, entering all required information, and optionalinformation as needed.
5. Click Finish when you have entered the necessary information.
The new Corporate Campaign is saved.
You can modify the Corporate Campaign as necessary now.
Related Topics• About creating Corporate Campaigns
N340001
About assigning and inviting people to aCorporate Campaign
You can manually assign users to participate in a Corporate Campaign. You can alsoautomate the invitation process.
40 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About assigning and inviting people to a Corporate Campaign
Manually assigning users to a CorporateCampaignYou can manually assign users as participants in a Corporate Campaign in either ofthese ways:
• When you create a Corporate Campaign, you can select participants through theCorporate Campaign Wizard.
Assigning field marketers to the Corporate Campaign is automated through theNotify Field Marketer task in the workflow.
• You can view and assign Corporate Campaign participants from the People tab of aCorporate Campaign after creating the Corporate Campaign.
You can assign participants as individuals, or by role. When you assign participants byrole, you can assign an entire group of field marketers to participate in a CorporateCampaign at once.
Automatically inviting field marketers to aCorporate CampaignYou can automate the field marketer invitation process by using one of two tasks in theCorporate Campaign workflow:
• Notify Field Marketer task
• Subscription task
If you are manually inviting field marketers, ensure you do not include these tasks inCorporate Campaign workflow, so that field marketers do not receive automaticinvitations.
Related Topics• Notify Field Marketers system task
• Notify Field Marketers system task
N3D0001
About the People tabEach Corporate Campaign contains its own People tab. Use this screen to do thefollowing.
• Manage the members of a Corporate Campaign.
• Edit a member's access level.
• Replace a person in a role when a user becomes unavailable.
• Add or remove a role.
A Corporate Campaign template can contain information about the functional roles forthe project. A template can reduce some of the work necessary to assign people orteams to units of work within the Corporate Campaign.
Version 8.5.0 41
4 - Running Corporate Campaigns
By default, the People tab is available only for Corporate Campaigns. Forinformation on making it available for Lists or On-demand Campaigns, see theDistributed Marketing Administrator's Guide.
N3E0001
To manage Corporate Campaign members1. Navigate to the People tab of the Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
3. Do one of the following.
a. To add a person, select the name from the left pane of the dialog, and click >>.
b. To remove a person, select the name in the Select Team Members list box andclick <<.
c. To change the role for a person, select the name in the Select Team Memberslist box and use the Up and Down buttons to move them to the required role.
Note that you cannot remove a user assigned to a task.
4. Click Save Changes.
The Select Team Members dialog box closes. The People tab becomes the activewindow.
The changes you have made are reflected in the list of people and roles. For example, ifyou added a creative lead, the screen would contain a line similar to the following.
Member/Access Level Role Email Address
P Picasso (participant) Creative Lead [email protected]
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N3F0001
To select team members for a CorporateCampaignYou can select other Distributed Marketing users to participate in the CorporateCampaign. You can assign participants as individuals, or by role. When you assignparticipants by role, you can assign an entire group of field marketers to participate in aCorporate Campaign at once.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
42
About assigning and inviting people to a Corporate Campaign
4. To assign team members by role:
a. In the upper-left of the dialog box, click Roles.
b. Select roles to assign to the Corporate Campaign from the list on the left.
c. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected roles to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
5. To assign individual users:
a. In the upper-left of the dialog box, click Folders.
b. Expand the folder entries and select individuals to assign to the CorporateCampaign from the list on the left.
c. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected users to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
6. Click Save Changes.
You can now assign work for the Corporate Campaign by role.
Related Topics• To assign work by role
N410001
To edit Corporate Campaign member accesslevelsYou can control the access level other Distributed Marketing users have to theCorporate Campaign. You can specify whether users are Owners or Participants of theCorporate Campaign. The specific privileges of Owners and Participants are determinedby the user permissions defined by the Distributed Marketing administrator.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
4. To add users:
a. Expand the folder entries and select individuals to assign to the CorporateCampaign from the list on the left.
b. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected users to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
5. To make a user an owner of the Corporate Campaign:
a. In the Selected Team Members list, select the user.
b. Click Up.
Repeat this step until the user appears under Owner in the list.
Version 8.5.0 43
4 - Running Corporate Campaigns
6. To make a user a participant in the Corporate Campaign:
a. In the Selected Team Members list, select the user.
b. Click Down.
Repeat this step until the user appears under Participant in the list.
7. Click Save Changes.N400001
To assign work by roleBefore completing this task, you should select team members for the CorporateCampaign.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Assign Work by Role icon( ).
A dialog box opens asking how you want to assign work. You can chose to:
• Add the new user to any existing users assigned to the task
• Replace any existing assigned users with the new user.
4. Select append the new user to add the new user to any existing users assigned tothe task, or select replace the existing assignment to replace any existingassigned users with the new user.
5. Click Apply.
Users are assigned to tasks as you specified.
6. Click Close.
Related Topics• To select team members for a Corporate Campaign
N350001
About linking a Corporate Campaign toCampaign
After you create a Corporate Campaign and assign members, you must create acampaign in Campaign that is linked to the Corporate Campaign.
You must link a Corporate Campaign to a campaign in Campaign so that flowchart runtasks in the workflow of a Corporate Campaign can execute flowcharts that are part ofthe campaign.
You can create a linked campaign directly from Distributed Marketing. After you do this,you can create and run the flowchart for the linked campaign in Campaign.
44 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About generating the target list from the flowchart
After you link a campaign in Campaign to a Corporate Campaign, you can open thecampaign in Campaign from the Corporate Campaign.
N420001
To create a campaign linked to a CorporateCampaignYou can create a new campaign linked to a Corporate Campaign in Campaign, whileworking directly with a Corporate Campaign.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. In the Summary tab, click the Create a Linked Campaign icon ( ).
3. From the icon's drop-down list, select Create a Linked Campaign.
The linked campaign is created in Campaign.N430001
To access a Corporate Campaign from CampaignIf you are working on a campaign in Campaign, you can open a Corporate Campaign.
1. Open the Summary tab of the campaign.
2. Click the Distributed Marketing link in the tab list ( ).
The Summary page of the Corporate Campaign opens.N360001
About generating the target list from theflowchart
After you create a Corporate Campaign and link it to a campaign in Campaign with thesame ID, you must create and publish the campaign flowchart in Campaign to generatethe list of proposed targets for the Corporate Campaign.
N440001
To open a linked campaign in CampaignClick the Implementation icon ( ) in the tabs at the top of the CorporateCampaign page. The Summary page of the campaign in Campaign opens.
N450001
To create and run the flowchart for the linkedcampaign1. In Campaign, select the Flowchart tab for the linked campaign.
2. Create the flowchart with the same name as defined in the Corporate Campaignworkflow to select the target list according to your corporate campaign strategy.
Version 8.5.0 45
4 - Running Corporate Campaigns
3. Publish the flowchart.
You can now confirm the target start and end dates, and start the Corporate Campaign.N370001
About submitting the target list to fieldmarketers
You can notify field marketers that you are distributing the target list for them to reviewtheir portion.
You can use the field marketer notification feature to notify participant field marketerswho are responsible for targets on the list.
Notifying field marketersNote the following about notifying field marketers to review a proposed target list for aCorporate Campaign:
• You must first generate the proposed target list.
• You must be the Corporate Campaign owner.
• Only field marketers responsible for targets on the proposed target list are notified.
• Each field marketer who is responsible for targets in the list receives a personalizedmessage you type, along with a message similar to the following:
The campaign Name has just started. You have until Date to validate the
list content.
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
A field marketer becomes responsible for target records through data levelfilters. If data level filters are not defined, then all field marketers are notifiedduring the execution of the Notify Field Marketer system task.
N460001
To notify field marketers to review a proposedtarget list using notificationsYou can use notifications to alert field marketers to review the Corporate Campaignproposed target list.
1. Open the Summary tab of the Corporate Campaign.
2. Click Notify the Field Marketers.
This task is dependent on a List Generation task.
3. Optionally, select a role to assign the Corporate Campaign review to a group of fieldmarketers.
46
About checking the validation status for target lists
4. Type a personalized message.
5. Click OK.N380001
About checking the validation status fortarget lists
You can check the review status for a Corporate Campaign to see that participating fieldmarketers have made final decisions on the proposed target list before you generate thefinal target list.
N470001
To check the validation status for CorporateCampaign lists1. Open the Summary tab of the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the Analysis tab.
3. View the validation data.
The work of each field marketer is complete when the status of all records isValidated or Added.
N390001
About fulfilling the Corporate CampaignAfter your participating field marketers finalize selections for the proposed target list, thefield marketers' choices are recorded in the uacc_corporate_lists table in theCampaign database. In this table:
• Records with a value of A in the status column were added by field marketers.
• Records with a value of V in the status column were validated by field marketers.Validated records are accepted in the target list, and locked.
The final stage of the Corporate Campaign consists of running the campaign in order todeliver the offer to the final targets through a selected channel such as mail or e-mail.
You fulfill the Corporate Campaign by running the fulfillment flowchart in Campaign.N480001
To select the finalized list for the new flowchart1. Open the linked campaign in Campaign.
2. Create a new flowchart.
3. Select target records from the uacc_corporate_lists database table for whichthe status is A (for added records) or V (for validated (accepted and locked) recordsfrom the original list).
Version 8.5.0 47
4 - Running Corporate Campaigns
4. Complete the flowchart with any required exclusion rules with processes for any ofthe following:
• Generating targets
• Generating output data
• Response trackingN490001
To fulfill a Corporate Campaign1. In the workflow for the Corporate Campaign, create the flowchart run task.
2. In Campaign, create and publish the flowchart.
3. Set the dates for the Corporate Campaign and run it.
48 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N101A7
5 Corporate Campaignsand field marketers
■ Corporate Campaigns and field marketers■ Field marketer access to Corporate Campaigns■ About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists
N310001
Corporate Campaigns and field marketersWhen a corporate marketer uses the Subscription task in the workflow for a CorporateCampaign, invited field marketers choose whether or not to subscribe to the CorporateCampaign. When field marketers subscribe to a Corporate Campaign, they providecorporate marketers with recommendations about which target customers to include inthe campaign or wave.
By utilizing field marketer recommendations, central marketing teams can run programson behalf of some or all of their field marketing teams, while allowing field marketers toprovide input about specific individuals to contact.
Multi-wave Corporate Campaigns and fieldmarketersWhen a Corporate Campaign contains multiple waves, and uses the Subscriptionsystem task in the workflow, invited field marketers choose which waves to subscribe to.A field marketer can subscribe to any subset of waves in the Corporate Campaign.
N4A0001
Field marketer access to CorporateCampaigns
By default, only corporate marketers are authorized to create and modify all aspects ofCorporate Campaigns.
As a field marketer, you can view Corporate Campaigns to which you subscribed.
You can view proposed target customers that are assigned to you. You cannot viewtarget customers assigned to other field marketers.
You can typically perform the following tasks:
Version 8.5.0 49
5 - Corporate Campaigns and field marketers
• View the Corporate Campaign summary.
• View any attachments included with the Corporate Campaign.
• Review, accept, add, or remove target customers from the proposed target list.
• Finalize your portion of the proposed target list.
• View the calendar to see the Corporate Campaign schedule.
For more information about your access privileges, see you administrator.N4B0001
About Corporate Campaign proposed targetlists
■ About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists■ About reviewing the Corporate Campaign proposed target lists■ About adding customers to Corporate Campaign■ About making permanent additions and deletions to a list■ To review proposed target customers for a Corporate Campaign
N4B0008
About Corporate Campaign proposed target listsThe proposed target list for a corporate marketing campaign is the initial list ofcustomers for whom the campaign is intended when the campaign is first designed by acorporate marketer.
These customers are associated with field marketers in the corporate database; forexample, the associations may be based on the customer's region.
Field marketers are assigned those proposed target customers in a CorporateCampaign to whom they are associated. They must then review those customers anddecide on the final list for the Corporate Campaign.
Field marketers can:
• Accept or decline each customer.
• Add target customers to the list of proposed customers.
• Finalize the target list for the Corporate Campaign.N4C0001
About reviewing the Corporate Campaignproposed target listsField marketers typically perform the following tasks for Corporate Campaigns to whichthey are subscribed:
• Review Corporate Campaign status information and other data in the CorporateCampaign Summary page.
50 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists
• Review attachments to the Corporate Campaign.
Corporate marketers may include attachments to provide field marketers withinformation that is relevant to the Corporate Campaign. For example, an attachmentmay contain marketing messages.
• Review his or her portion of the proposed target list.
• Provide the corporate marketer with recommendations for modifications to theproposed target customer list.
Note the following:
• The changes field marketers make to the proposed target customer list are stored inthe corporate database; corporate marketers access the changes there.
• When field marketers finalize their portions of the proposed target list, targetcustomer review data status is updated in a database table.
N4D0001
About adding customers to Corporate CampaignField marketers can add target customers to a proposed list for a Corporate Campaignto which they subscribe.
For example, corporate marketers may propose that the list targets previous customers,while field marketers have new target customers in mind. Field marketers can filter theirlists of personal contacts to select target customers to add.
When field marketers add customers to the proposed list for a corporate marketingcampaign, they can select a set of customers with specific characteristics. For example,corporate marketers can allow field marketers to select from the following criteria whenadding customers to a proposed list:
• Name
• Age
• Income rangeN4E0001
About making permanent additions and deletionsto a listWhen working with a recurring workflow, you may be tasked with several list reviewsteps within the course of a single Corporate Campaign. If desired, you can makepermanent additions or deletions from the list; these additions or deletions remain ineffect for all future occurrences of the List Review task.
The ability to make permanent additions or deletions to a contact list is controlled bythe Review List task in the Corporate Campaign workflow. If this option has notbeen selected for a List Review task, you are not able to add or delete contactspermanently in the corresponding list.
Version 8.5.0 51
5 - Corporate Campaigns and field marketers
When to add or remove contacts permanentlyYou should make permanent additions or deletions to a list when the followingstatements are true:
• You are using a recurring workflow.
• The recurring workflow includes several List Review tasks.
• You know that the list as generated is incomplete; you need to add and/or deletecontacts. You want these additions and deletions to remain in effect for each futureoccurrence of the recurring campaign.
N4F0001
To review proposed target customers for aCorporate CampaignWhen you participate in a Corporate Campaign, you must review the proposed targetcustomers for that campaign. When you are presented with a proposed list of targetcustomers for review, you must either accept or decline each customer before you canfinalize your target list selections for the corporate campaign.
You can accept or decline proposed target customers individually, or all at once. Youcan also add one or more of your customers to the proposed list.
In recurring Corporate Campaigns, if you are allowed to do so by the campaign creator,you can add to or exclude contacts from a list for each recurrence of the workflow.When you add or remove contacts in this way, the changes you make remain in effectthroughout all list review tasks within the recurring workflow. If you are not allowed thisoption, you can only modify the target list for the current occurrence of the workflow.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. In the Summary page, click Waiting items.
The Contact to Validate page opens.
3. Accept or decline customers as needed.
• To accept all proposed customers, click Accept All Records.
• To decline all proposed customers, click Decline All Records.
• To accept specific customers only, check the Accept column in the rows forthose customers.
• To decline specific customers only, check the Decline column in the rows forthose customers.
• To decline specific customers permanently, check the Dec. Perm. column in therows for those customers.
This option appears only if permanent additions/deletions has been selectedin the Corporate Campaign.
• To add customers:
52 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists
a. Click Add Records.
b. Select one or more target list filtering criteria from the options presented onthe form, then click Search.
The target records resulting from your search are displayed.
c. Check one or more of the customer records to add to the target list.
d. Click Accept Selected.
If you selected to add or delete contacts permanently, a message opens askingwhether you want to add the contacts permanently for recurring campaigns.
e. Click OK to add the contacts for all future occurrences of the workflow.
Or click Cancel to add the contacts for the current occurrence only.
4. Optionally check After the next save, consider my review complete to validateand lock this list when you save changes.
If you do not check this option, any customer records that you do not accept ordecline appear when you next review the target contacts.
Added contacts do not appear until you close the window and click Newlyadded by Field Marketer.
5. Click Save to save changes and complete your review of the proposed target list.
Accepted and removed contacts disappear from the list, and are only viewable inthe Accepted/removed lists page.
N500001
To view or accept previously declined targetsYou can view previously declined target customers before finalizing your portion of theproposed target list, and, if desired, accept those customers.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign for which you have declined target customers on theproposed list.
2. Click View Declined.
3. You can accept any declined target customers from this list by checking thecustomer entries under the Accept column.
You can also select Accept All Records or Set All Records to Review to acceptor review all the previously declined records.
Those customers are now included in the list.
You must now finalize the list.
Related Topics• To finalize your portion of a Corporate Campaign target list
N520001
Version 8.5.0 53
5 - Corporate Campaigns and field marketers
To view or decline previously accepted targetsYou can view previously accepted target customers before finalizing your portion of theproposed target list, and, if desired, decline those customers.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign for which you have accepted target customers onthe proposed list.
2. Click View Accepted.
3. You can decline any accepted target customers from this list by checking thecustomer entries under the Decline column.
You can also select Decline All Records or Set All Records to Review to declineor review all the previously accepted records.
Those customers are now removed from the list.
You must now finalize the list.
Related Topics• To finalize your portion of a Corporate Campaign target list
N530001
To view or remove added targetsYou can view previously added target customers before finalizing the proposed targetlist. You can also remove previously added target customers.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign for which you have added customers to theproposed list.
2. Click View Additions.
3. You can remove any added target customers from the list by checking thecustomers under the Remove column.
You can also select Decline All Records to decline all the previously acceptedrecords.
Those customers are now removed from the list.
You must now finalize the list.
Related Topics• To finalize your portion of a Corporate Campaign target list
N510001
To finalize your portion of a Corporate Campaign target listYou can finalize the proposed target list for a Corporate Campaign after you have:
• Reviewed the proposed target list.
• Accepted or declined each customer in the proposed target list.
• Optionally, added target customers to the proposed list.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
54 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About Corporate Campaign proposed target lists
2. In the Summary page, click Validate and lock list.
You cannot reverse this action.
The list is now finalized.
Related Topics• To review proposed target customers for a Corporate Campaign
• To view or decline previously accepted targets
• To view or remove added targets
Version 8.5.0 55
N101F5
6 Subscriptions
■ About subscriptions■ The Subscription task in a Corporate Campaign workflow■ The Subscription task and territories■ About Selection Levels■ About the List of Territories■ About Subscription Levels■ Subscription example■ How territories, hierarchies, and user associations are defined
N540001
About subscriptionsA subscription is the invitation to a field marketer to include his or her territory in aCorporate Campaign, or a wave of a multi-wave Corporate Campaign. Throughsubscriptions, field marketers can control which Corporate Campaigns and waves, andpotentially which territories within a campaign or wave, they participate in.
In addition, supervisors can control the Corporate Campaigns or waves their staffsparticipate in. When a supervisor subscribes to a Corporate Campaign, field marketersthat are under the supervisor in a defined territory hierarchy are also subscribed to thecampaign. For example, if the territory supervisor for New England subscribes to acorporate campaign, the state manager for Vermont also participates in the campaign.
Subscriptions and data level filtersSubscriptions can be used in combination with data level filters to control both what datais included in the generated list of customers for a Campaign, and who is invited toreview the list of customers that is generated.
ExampleIf MA_FM is the field marketer for Massachusetts (MA), you can use a state-levelsubscription to invite MA_FM to include or exclude Massachusetts customers from theCorporate Campaign contact list. If MA_FM accepts the invitation, MA customers are onthe contact review list. Using data level filters, MA_FM can also be configured to onlysee MA customers, thus limiting his view to those customers of interest to him. Whendata level filters are present, only Field Marketers who have data of interest on thegenerated list are invited by the Notify Field Marker system task.
56 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
The Subscription task in a Corporate Campaign workflow
Subscriptions can operate at multiple levels. So for example, NE_FM might be theNortheast Regional FM who supervises the state field marketers in his region, whichmight include Massachusetts. The corporate marketer can invite regional field marketersto subscribe for their region.
If NE_FM is invited to subscribe, he could accept or decline. If he accepts, data for allcustomers in his region are included in the list generation. So continuing the exampleabove, data for Massachusetts's customers would be included in the list. In this case,the MA_FM has no control over whether MA data is included, because the subscriptioninvitation is issued at the region level. However, if the data level filters are configured toallow MA_FM to see MA customers, MA_FM is invited to review the MA customerswhen the Corporate Campaign contact list is generated.
Defining territoriesTo support subscriptions, the administrator must define a territory hierarchy on theDistributed Marketing server. For more information, see the Campaign and RelatedProducts Installation Guide or the Distributed Marketing Administrator's Guide.
N550001
The Subscription task in a CorporateCampaign workflow
Corporate marketers enable subscriptions by adding the Subscription task to theCorporate Campaign workflow, or to each occurrence in a recurring workflow. Bydefining Subscriptions tasks in workflows, as opposed to the Corporate Campaign as awhole, you enable field marketers to subscribe to individual waves, drops, and lots ofrecurring Corporate Campaigns.
The Subscription task is a system task and starts and stops automatically according toits target start and end dates.
N560001
The Subscription task and territoriesSubscription invitations are sent to field marketers based on their associated territories.
Territories are defined in a hierarchical relationship. For example, a typical hierarchywould be:
Country
Region
State
57
In this scenario, there could be a Country manager for each country, under which therewould be several region managers for the regions in the country. Under each regionmanager there would be managers for each state in the region.
When a corporate marketer configures the Subscription task, he or she specifies thefollowing:
Version 8.5.0
6 - Subscriptions
1. Selection Level
2. List of Territories
3. Subscription LevelN570001
About Selection LevelsThe Selection Level in a Subscription task filters territories and subscription levels thatare available to the corporate marketer.
All levels of the defined territory hierarchy are available values for the Selection Level.
For example, the corporate marketer might select one of the following:
• Country, in this case the top level in the territory hierarchy. These countries, forexample the United States, France, and Germany among others, become theoptions in the List of Territories field.
• Region, the second level in the territory hierarchy. Each country contains multipleregions; each region contains multiple states.
• State, the bottom level in the territory hierarchy. Each state is grouped under aregion.
N580001
About the List of TerritoriesThe territories that appear as options in the List of Territories field are determined bythe Selection Level. All territories defined at the selected level are shown.
For example, if you select Region as the Selection Level, all regions, from all countries,are listed as options in the List of Territories field.
You must select one or more of the territories listed.N590001
About Subscription LevelsThe Subscription Level is the level in the hierarchy for which users receive subscriptioninvitations.
The Subscription Level can be at the level of the Selection Level, or beneath that level,but not above that level. For example:
If you select Region as the Selection Level, you can select Region or State as theSubscription Level:
• If you select Region, regional managers for the regions you select in the List ofTerritories field receive a subscription invitation.
• If you select State, state managers for the states within the regions you select in theList of Territories field receive a subscription invitation.
58 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Subscription example
• You cannot select Country as the Subscription Level, as it is a higher level than theSelection Level.
N5A0001
Subscription exampleA corporate marketer may specify that for a Subscription task:
1. The Selection Level is Country.
2. The List of Territories is the United States
3. The Subscription Level is State
When this Corporate Campaign starts, each user designated as a state manager for astate within the United States receives an invitation to subscribe to the CorporateCampaign.
The corporate marketer may instead have set the Subscription Level to Region. In thiscase, each user designated as a region manager receives an invitation to subscribe tothe Corporate Campaign. State managers, lower in the territory hierarchy than regionmanagers, do not receive the invitation. However, if the region manager subscribes tothe Corporate Campaign, managers of states within that region also participate in theCorporate Campaign.
Subscriptions and user variablesWhen a Corporate Campaign has a Subscription system task linked to a Flowchart Runsystem task, the Flowchart Run system task needs to have an associated flowchart thatmakes use of the subscription response information. You do this by defining a uservariable in the flowchart called SubscriptionList. This user variable can then beused in a query such as the following:
Contact_Info.State IN (UserVar.SubscriptionList)
59
When the flowchart is run from Distributed Marketing, the list of states or regions thatare subscribed is sent as a parameter to Campaign, and the query above is executedas something like:
Contact_info.state in ('MA', 'VT')
where MA and VT are territories that were subscribed to.N5B0001
How territories, hierarchies, and userassociations are defined
The Distributed Marketing administrator defines the territories, hierarchical relationships,and territory managers by loading an XML file on the Distributed Marketing server.
Version 8.5.0
6 - Subscriptions
For more information, see the Campaign and Related Products Installation Guide or theDistributed Marketing Administrator's Guide, or online help.
60 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N1022D
7 Workflows forCorporateMarketers
■ About workflows■ Workflow concepts■ About System tasks■ About User tasks■ About task status■ To edit the the default workflow■ About milestones■ About date rippling■ About schedules■ About designing for multiple drops, lots, waves, and offers■ Updating and finishing tasks■ Managing task dependencies■ About adding a stage or task■ About editing a stage or task■ To add a stage or task■ To add a stage or task below a locked task■ About the workflow spreadsheet view
N5C0001
About workflowsYou can manage tasks associated with an Advanced List, On-Demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign. The Workflow tab provides a spreadsheet on which you can listall tasks. You can assign dates to the task, and team members to perform them.
When you create a new Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign,you use the Workflow tab to customize the workflow provided by the template. Whenyou participate in a Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, youuse the Workflow tab to keep track of your work. If you have the appropriatepermissions, you can save a workflow as a workflow template.
Any member of the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign canedit any column of the Workflow tab as long as he or she has the appropriate accesspermission.
The workflow tab has an edit mode and three view modes.
Version 8.5.0 61
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
• To edit the workflow displayed on the tab, click the Edit icon ( ).
• You can view the workflow as a spreadsheet, a timeline, or a process flowchart.
Related Topics• About the workflow spreadsheet view
• About the workflow timeline view
• About the workflow process flowchart view
N5D0001
Workflow conceptsTasksTasks are steps in the workflow where a user or the system must take an action. Thetask is not complete until the action is complete.
Tasks have several types of data associated with them, described below.
StagesYou can group workflow tasks under headings called stages. Stages can help you withtask organization. For example, you can create a stage that has all tasks performed byyour field marketers. Stages are the headings in bold that group the tasks together.
DatesWorkflows contain the following types of dates.
• Actual dates specify when tasks start and finish.
• Target dates are dates used to plan the schedule. Typically, they are set at thebeginning of the project.
• Anchored dates are fixed dates that cannot change, even if the dates of the tasksupon which they are dependent change.
• Non-work time are dates when people do not work so the system skips those dateswhen calculating durations for tasks. Distributed Marketing currently supportssystem-wide non-work time that applies to all tasks. It is up to the List, On-demandCampaign or Corporate Campaign manager to determine whether overriding any ofthese dates is necessary. System administrators enter and maintain these dates.
• Weekend dates are dates you use to specify work that occurs on a weekend on aper-task basis. You can schedule work on a weekend date using the ScheduleThrough option for each task.
62 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About System tasks
DurationDuration is the actual number of days assigned to a task. If you assign actual start andend dates, the duration is automatically calculated as the difference between the actualstart date, and the actual end date for a task. You can assign duration using any non-negative number. For example, you can use 0.25 to assign a quarter of a day for thetask duration.
EffortThe work effort in days (as opposed to duration) that it takes a user to complete a task.For example, the task may have taken three calendar days to complete, but the taskowner only spent half a day on the task for each of the three days, so the effort is oneand a half days.
Locked tasksWhen you edit a task, the task is locked so no other user can edit it at the same time.
If anyone attempts to edit a locked task, they receive a warning message, indicating thatit is currently in use.
People and rolesYou can assign tasks to individual team members or you can assign tasks to all teammembers in a given role. When you assign a task to one or more team members, theyare considered to be the task owner. You assign roles to team members from thePeople tab of the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
Workflows use the following concepts to identify the people who perform work.
• Task owners are the people responsible for executing or managing tasks.
• Roles are used as a bridge between tasks and people. When a role is assigned to atask in a List, On-demand Campaign or Corporate Campaign, all users associatedwith that role are owners of the task. Templates can contain roles for certain tasks.Then when you create a List, On-demand Campaign or Corporate Campaign, some(or all) of the tasks have a default role already associated with them.
Related Topics• About System tasks
• About User tasks
N5E0001
About System tasksSystem tasks are workflow tasks that start automatically, based on a combination ofstart date and completion of tasks on which they are dependent.
When you pause a workflow, system tasks scheduled during the time the workflowis paused do not execute until the workflow resumes.
Version 8.5.0 63
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
You can create these types of system tasks:
• Subscription
• Flowchart Run
• Notify Field Marketers
• List Review
Related Topics• Flowchart Run system task
• Notify Field Marketers system task
• List Review system task
• Subscription system task
N710001
Subscription system taskA Subscription system task allows you to have field marketers subscribe to, andparticipate in, a Corporate Campaign.
The Subscription system task is only used in Corporate Campaigns.
A Subscription system task starts and finished automatically, according to the targetstart and end date. You can also mark it complete manually.
Related Topics• About subscriptions
• The Subscription task in a Corporate Campaign workflow
N6F0001
Flowchart Run system taskA Flowchart Run system task allows you to specify a flowchart that should run at aparticular place in the workflow. When you create a Flowchart Run system task, youspecify one of the following:
• For corporate marketers working with Corporate Campaigns, the name of theflowchart in the linked campaign (in Campaign) in the workflow.
• For field marketers working with On-demand Campaigns and Lists, the name of thetab that is associated with the flowchart in the On Demand Campaign or List thatyou want to use to gather data.
When Distributed Marketing executes a Flowchart Run system task, flowchart run isstarted in Campaign.
Flowchart Run system tasks start and finish automatically when there is a matchingflowchart in Campaign, when the target start date is reached and when all tasks itdepends on are finished; you do not need to manually start or stop a Flowchart runsystem tasks. The % Complete field fills in automatically as the task proceeds.
64 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About System tasks
Flowchart run tasks with no assigned flowchartThe icon for the Flowchart Run system task appears red when no known flowchart isassigned to the task. After you have assigned a flowchart, the icon’s color changes toblack.
Flowchart Run tasks and Corporate CampaignsFor Corporate Campaigns, for the Flowchart Run system task to run correctly, you mustsave and publish the flowchart of the linked campaign in Campaign.
N3C0001
Notify Field Marketers system taskA Notify Field Marketers system task allows you to include, within the workflow,automatic notification to Field Marketers. This type of system task is used only withCorporate Campaigns.
A Notify Field Marketers system task must be dependent on a Run Flowchartsystem task.
When a Notify Field Marketers system task starts, Distributed Marketing sendsnotification to Field Marketers, informing them that contact lists are ready for theirreview. Distributed Marketing also adds all selected Field Marketers to the People tab ofthe Corporate Campaign.
The Notify Field Marketers system task starts and finishes automatically; you do notneed to manually start or stop a Notify Field Marketers system task. The % Completefield fills in automatically as the task proceeds.
N700001
List Review system taskA List Review system task allows you to identify time within the workflow during whichField Marketers will be reviewing contact lists that result from a flowchart run.
A List Review system task must be dependent on a Run Flowchart system task.
List Review system tasks start and finish automatically. You can also manually finish aList Review system task when you are sure all Field Marketers have completed thereview. Once you manually finish the List Review task, the next dependent task (if any)in the workflow starts when its target start date has been reached.
When the List Review is completed, manually or automatically, the List is locked to fieldmarketers; field marketers can no longer change their portions of the List.
List Review system tasks and recurring workflowsIn recurring On-demand Campaigns or Corporate Campaigns, you can enablepermanent updates so that any additions or removals that take place during List Revieware applied automatically in all occurrences.
Version 8.5.0 65
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
List Review system tasks and multi-offer campaignsIn multi-offer On-demand Campaigns or Corporate Campaigns, you can divide a listgenerated by a single Run Flowchart system task into several segments. The results ofthe Run Flowchart system task are presented as several Lists.
N720001
To create a flowchart run task1. In the workflow spreadsheet, in Edit view, select the row after which you want the
Flowchart Run task to appear.
2. Click the Add Task Row icon ( ).
3. Select Flowchart Run.
A new task row is added to the flowchart.
4. In the Flowchart Name column, perform one of the following tasks:
• For Corporate Campaigns, enter the name of the flowchart from your linkedcampaign.
• For On Demand Campaigns and Lists, select the name of the tab that runs theCampaign flowchart.
5. Complete the Schedule Through, Target Start, Target End, Duration, andMember Role fields as desired.
You can also change the name of the task.
6. Click Save and Finish.
If the workflow is part of a Corporate Campaign, you must save and publish theassociated flowchart in Campaign.
Related Topics• Flowchart Run system task
N730001
To create a Notify Field Marketers system task1. In the workflow spreadsheet, in Edit view, select the row after which you want the
Flowchart Run task to appear.
2. Click the Add Task Row icon ( ).
3. Select Notify Field Marketers.
A new task row is added to the flowchart.
4. Complete the Schedule Through, Target Start, Target End, Duration, andMember Role fields as desired.
You can also change the name of the task.
66 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About System tasks
5. Make the new Notify Field Marketers system task dependent on a Run Flowchartsystem task.
6. Click Save and Finish.
Related Topics• Notify Field Marketers system task
• Managing task dependencies
N740001
To create a List Review system task1. In the workflow spreadsheet, in Edit view, select the row after which you want the
Flowchart Run task to appear.
2. Click the Add Task Row icon ( ).
3. Select List Review.
A new task row is added to the flowchart.
4. Complete the Schedule Through, Target Start, Target End, Duration, andMember Role fields as desired.
You can also change the name of the task.
5. Make the new List Review system task dependent on a Run Flowchart system task.
6. Click Save and Finish.
7. if you are working on a multi-offer campaign:
a. Click the name of the List Review system task.
The Task properties screen opens.
b. In the Segment Code field, enter the name of the segment as it appears in theflowchart in your linked campaign.
c. Click Save and Return.
You can now enable permanent updates to a list.
Related Topics• List Review system task
• To enable permanent updates to a list
• Managing task dependencies
N750001
To enable permanent updates to a list1. In the workflow spreadsheet, in Edit view, double-click the List Review system task
you want to change.
The Post Task dialog box opens.
Version 8.5.0 67
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
2. Check the Allow permanent updates checkbox.
Related Topics• List Review system task
N760001
To create a Subscription task1. In the workflow spreadsheet, in Edit view, select the row after which you want the
Flowchart Run task to appear.
2. Click the Add Task Row icon ( ).
3. Select Subscription.
A new task row is added to the flowchart.
4. Complete the Schedule Through, Target Start, Target End, Duration, andMember Role fields as desired.
You can also change the name of the task.
5. Click Save and Finish.
You must now configure the Subscription task.
At least one flowchart run task must depend on the subscription task. You must add theflowchart run task with this dependency.
Related Topics• To configure the Subscription task
• Subscription system task
• The Subscription task in a Corporate Campaign workflow
N770001
To configure the Subscription taskBefore completing these instructions, you must create the Subscription task.
When you configure the Subscription task, in addition to setting the target task dates,you set the subscription Selection Level, the List of Territories, and the SubscriptionLevel. These settings determine which field marketers receive invitations to subscribe tothe Corporate Campaign.
1. View the workflow spreadsheet, not in Edit mode.
2. Double-click the Subscription task.
The Post Task dialog box opens.
3. Enter the Target Start and Target End dates as needed.
4. Select a Selection Level.
5. Select one or more territories in the List of Territories field.
68 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About System tasks
6. Select a Subscription Level.
7. Click Save and Finish.
Related Topics• The Subscription task and territories
• About Selection Levels
• About the List of Territories
• About Subscription Levels
N780001
Example of a Corporate Campaign workflow withsystem tasksA typical workflow for a Corporate Campaign might include two flowcharts: one thatinitially selects a list of contacts, and another that fulfills the campaign after FieldMarketers have reviewed and approved the initial list.
Task 1: SubscriptionTask 1 is a Subscription system task. You configure a subscription task to inviterelevant field marketers to participate in the Corporate Campaign.
Task 2: Flowchart RunTask 2 is a Flowchart Run system task. The Flowchart Name column identifies thename of the flowchart in the linked campaign (in Campaign) that should be run tocomplete this task. When task 2 runs, the flowchart Corporate Campaign Selection runsin the linked campaign in Campaign to create a list that Field Marketers should review.Task 2 starts and finishes automatically.
In the image above, the flowchart icon appears in red. This indicates that theassociated flowchart in Campaign has not been saved and published.
Task 3: Notify Field MarketersTask 3 is a Notify Field Marketers system task. This task notifies Field Marketers thatthe flowchart run has completed and a list is ready for their review. This task startsautomatically when Task 2 completes. Task 3 also finishes automatically.
Task 4: List ReviewTask 4 is a List Review system task. This task identifies time within the workflow duringwhich Field Marketers should be reviewing the list generated in Task 2. Task 4 startsautomatically when Task 3 finishes and finishes automatically when its target end dateis reached; however, you can still manually finish the task when all Field Marketerscomplete their reviews.
Version 8.5.0 69
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Task 5: Flowchart RunTask 5 is a Flowchart Run system task. The Flowchart Name column identifies thename of the flowchart in the linked campaign (in Campaign) that should be run tocomplete this task. When task 5 runs, the flowchart Corporate Campaign Fulfillmentruns in the linked campaign in Campaign This fulfillment flowchart creates the final list ofcontacts using the results of the Field Marketer review that occurred in Task 4. Task 5starts and finishes automatically.
N5F0001
About User tasksUser tasks are workflow tasks that you define and that must be started manually. Forexample, you can add a user task to the workflow to accommodate the time necessaryto develop creative material for the campaign, followed by a user task to approve thecreatives.
Users must manually update the status and progress for user tasks.N600001
About task statusEach task in a workflow has a status, which is shown in the spreadsheet view. You canalso view and modify the status by clicking the task to open it it the Post Task dialogbox.
The task status can be:
• Pending
• Finished
• Skipped
If you change the status of a task from Finished to Pending, you must change thepercent complete value to 0%.
N610001
To edit the the default workflowBefore you can edit a workflow, the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign must not be in the In Progress state. If it is, you must pause it.
When you create a new Advanced List, Corporate Campaign, or On-demand Campaign,the system guides you through a wizard based on the template you selected. When youfinish with the wizard forms, you might need to customize the default workflow providedby the project's template. The ability to customize default workflows is controlled by youruser permissions.
70 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To edit the the default workflow
When you open the Workflow tab in edit mode, if any of the toolbar buttons are disabledor the values in the columns are read-only, it means that you do not have theappropriate security permissions to edit the workflow.
1. Open the Advanced List, Corporate Campaign, or On-demand Campaign that has aworkflow to set up and open the Workflow tab.
This tab displays the workflow as designed in the template.
2. Click the Edit icon ( ).
3. Edit the names listed in the first column to change the default task and stage namesto specific tasks and stages.
Stages are the headings in bold that group the tasks together.
4. Add any stages or tasks, as necessary.
• Click the Add a Stage Row icon ( ) to add a stage.
• To add a user task, click the Add a Task Row icon ( and select User Task.
5. Enter target dates.
• You can enter start dates, end dates, and duration for a task. Enter any two, thethird value is calculated automatically. For example, if you enter a target startand a target end date, the system calculates the duration.
• You are not prevented from picking any dates that are not in agreement with theper-task options for non-work-time. For example, even if a task is not scheduledto include weekends, you can still pick a Sunday as an end-date for the task.
6. To specify that a task is a milestone of some sort, for example, a drop date, selectthe Milestone Type column and select a milestone that appears in the drop-downlist.
Your administrator can set the milestones that appear in the list.
7. Select members or roles to assign the task to in the Members column.
8. Enter any notes about the task in the Notes section.
9. Perform one of the following actions.
• Click Save to save your changes and remain in edit mode. If you are makingextensive edits, it is a best practice to click Save occasionally to prevent anyloss of work.
• Click Save and Finish to save your changes and return to view mode.
• Click Cancel to undo any changes and return to view mode.
Related Topics• To add a stage or task
• About schedules
N7A0001
Version 8.5.0 71
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
To add roles to tasksNormally, when you create a Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign, the workflow automatically contains member and reviewer roles for all tasksif the template selected contains this information.
However, you may occasionally need to assign roles to workflow tasks that differ fromthe template settings.
1. Navigate to the Workflow tab of your project.
2. Click Edit ( ).
3. Select the Member Role cell for the task you wish to assign.
4. Click the turndown icon ( ) to expand the list of available roles, and select the oneto assign to this task. Repeat this step until you have assigned all the tasks.
5. Save your work.N7C0001
To fill data into a range of cellsYou can copy a value in one or more cells to a group of continuous cells above orbelow the selected cells. This can greatly reduce the data entry time for addingduplicate information. For example, assume you have a workflow that contains tenconsecutive tasks all having the same target start. target emd. target duration, andtarget effort.
You can fill in this data for the first task, then copy the values to all the other tasks, byselecting these four columns for all ten tasks and using Fill Down.
1. Open the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign that hasthe task values to duplicate, and click the Workflow tab.
2. Click the Edit icon ( ).
3. Select the first cell.
4. Mouse over the final cell, then Shift-click over this cell.
A range of cells you selected is highlighted.
You must select a continuous range of cells, rather than selecting multiple,disconnected cells.
5. Click the Tools icon ( ), and select Fill Down or Fill Up.
• Fill Down copies the values in the top-most cell (or cells) to all the otherselected cells, including the bottom-most.
• Fill Up copies the values in the bottom-most cell (or cells) to all the otherselected cells, including the top-most.
72 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To edit the the default workflow
All the selected cells now contain the same value.
Remember to save the workflow to keep your changes.N7D0001
To print the Workflow tabYou can print all information found on your Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign Workflow tab, or select certain columns of information to print.
1. From the Workflow tab, click the Print icon ( ).
A window appears with a list of columns from which you can choose to print. Bydefault, all columns are selected.
2. Clear any columns you do not want to print.
By default, the Shrink to Fit Landscape Page Width box is checked.
3. Optionally, clear the Shrink to Fit Landscape Page Width checkbox to print thecolumns at a size of 100%.
If you keep this option checked, all selected columns print on a single page. If youuse this feature, change your printing preference (for this print job) to landscape.
4. Click Print Selected Columns.
5. Click Print.
6. Select your printer and printer options, then click Print to print the selected workflowcolumns.
Choose landscape mode for best results.
7. In the preview window, click Close to close the print preview.N7E0001
To add an attachment to a taskTo add attachments for a task, a project owner must enable adding attachments for thetask. The following users can add or remove task attachments.
• Task owners only can add attachments to their tasks.
• Task owners and users with the Delete Attachment security permission for projectscan delete task attachments.
Note the following.
• There is no versioning for task attachments: uploading a new version overwrites theexisting version of the attachment.
• It is possible to have multiple task attachments with the same name for the sametask. This can occur if multiple owners of the task each upload a file with the samename. You can differentiate the files by the the user who created the attachment.
• You can add and remove attachments no matter the state of the task. That is, evenif a task is marked complete or skipped, you can still add and remove attachments.
Version 8.5.0 73
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
• The Attachments tab for projects is divided into two sections: one for files attachedto the project's tasks, and one for files attached directly to the project.
• If a task owner adds task attachments, and later the project owner sets the EnableTask Attachment flag to false, nobody would be able to add or remove attachmentsfrom the Post Task Update dialog. However, task attachments for the project couldstill be removed from the project attachment tab.
1. Navigate to the task to which you would like to add an attachment.
Click the task from a project workflow or from the Tasks list page.
The Post Task Update dialog box opens.
2. Click the Attachments tab.
The tab displays any attachments that already exist for the task.
3. In the File to Attach field, select From My Computer , From the Asset Library, orURL.
4. Do one of the following:
• Click Browse to attach on your computer. When the dialog box appears,navigate to the file you want to attach, and click Open.
• Enter the URL in the field provided.
5. Add any comments about the attachment.
6. Click Add More to display an additional set of fields for each additional attachmentyou want to add.
7. After you have added all your attachments, click Save and Return to close thedialog box.
Any new attachments are added to the Attachments tab for the task.N620001
About milestonesA milestone is a point in time within workflow at which all tasks until that time must becomplete in order for work to continue.
If tasks before the milestone are not complete, the milestone is not met, and the nexttask cannot begin.
Why use milestonesBy using milestones within a workflow, you can better enforce process for your lists andcampaigns, so that tasks take place in the intended order. In addition, the specificmilestones you select in a workflow aid in reporting.
Setting milestones in a workflowYou can set milestones for tasks within a workflow for an Advanced List, On-demandCampaign, and Corporate Campaign.
74 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About milestones
When you set a milestone, the next task in the workflow cannot begin until themilestone is reached.
ExampleFor example, the workflow for an On-demand Campaign may consist of the followingtasks:
1. Run the flowchart to generate the list of targets.
2. A user task to produce creatives for the campaign.
3. A user task to approve creatives for the campaign.
At this task, a milestone called Creatives Approved is set.
4. Run the flowchart to fulfill the campaign.
By using a milestone at task 3, you can ensure that all creatives for the On-demandCampaign are approved by the necessary people before campaign fulfillment begins.
How available milestones are definedThe specific milestones available for selection in a workflow are defined in a databasetable by your administrator. See the Distributed Marketing installation and administrationdocumentation for more information.
Related Topics• To define a milestone for a task
N800001
To define a milestone for a taskBefore you can define a milestone for a task:
• Your administrator must have defined milestones in the Distributed Marketingdatabase.
• The Milestone Type column must be present in the workflow layout. You canensure it is present by basing the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign on a template that uses milestones, or by editing the workflowlayout.
You can set a milestone for a task in order to ensure that task is complete before theworkflow proceeds.
1. Open the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, and openthe Workflow tab.
2. If necessary, change the layout of the spreadsheet view to show the MilestoneType column.
3. Click Edit to make the workflow spreadsheet editable.
4. In the Milestone Type column, in the task row for which you want to set amilestone, select a milestone from the drop-down list.
Version 8.5.0 75
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
5. Click Save or Save and Finish to save the milestone you set.
The milestone is now in effect for the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign.
Related Topics• About milestones
N630001
About date ripplingWhen you enter or change the date for a task, Distributed Marketing can calculate otherdates based on your entry. It uses an internal algorithm to bi-directionally calculate thedates of dependencies, starting with the cell where you entered the date.
When you recalculate dates on a workflow, note the following.
• In addition to factoring in non-work days and hours, date calculations use twoadditional system-wide properties: start time of day and, number of hours per day.Your system administrator configures these parameters.
• If a task row is anchored, date rippling does not update its dates (even if the datecolumns are empty).
• Date rippling does not affect active and finished tasks; only tasks with a status ofPending.
• Date rippling observes the per-task options for non-work time. That is, the daterippling algorithm takes into account whether or not a task is scheduled to progressduring non-work time and/or weekends.
• Do not log target times outside of business hours if you intend to do date rippling orother automatic calculations afterwards, because that information will be overwritten.
N810001
To automatically calculate workflow datesWhen you enter or change the date of a task, Distributed Marketing can calculate otherdates based on your entry.
1. Enter or change the date for a task in any of the date fields.
2. Select the date and click anywhere on the screen except for another date field.
The Ripple icon ( ) appears next to the end date.
3. Click the Ripple icon.
Alternatively, you can select one of the toolbar icons for recalculating dependencydates.
The other dates in the workflow change, based on the new entry.
76 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About schedules
Related Topics• Workflow toolbar
• To ripple dates above a locked task
N830001
To ripple dates above a locked taskIf a workflow has a locked task, and you change the date of a task that is located abovethe locked task, you receive a warning when you attempt to ripple dates.
To clarify this task, the steps below assume the following:
• Task 1.8 is locked.
• You need to change the duration of task 1.5 from 5 days to 10 days.
• All tasks are dependent on the previous task.
1. Open the workflow for editing, and change the duration on task 1.5 from 5 days to10 days.
2. Click the ripple icon next to the end date of task 1.5.
The system displays a warning message, saying you cannot ripple through thelocked row.
3. Click the start date of task 1.8
4. Click the ripple icon ( ).
The system calculates the dates below the locked task.N640001
About schedulesThere are two options for scheduling in workflows.
• Baseline
• Up-to-date
Baseline schedulingYou use baseline scheduling when you want to compare an actual schedule to a fixedtarget schedule. With baseline scheduling, you never change the target schedule,allowing it to serve as a baseline. Users who are assigned tasks receive reminders onthe actual dates.
While working with a baseline schedule, the owner of the Advanced List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign sets the initial Target Start and End dates for eachtask. These dates stay fixed throughout the entire workflow. As the List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign progresses, the owner can update the actual dateswith real data based on status information received from team members.
Version 8.5.0 77
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Up-to-date schedulingYou use up-to-date scheduling when you want to establish the schedule as the officialschedule that is updated regularly. This mode enables project managers to capture themost up-to-date, official schedule; however, it does not provide easily for viewing abaseline version of the schedule.
N840001
To use a baseline scheduleBefore creating your Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns, have thesystem administrator set up permissions and reminders as follows.
• Set permissions so that only List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaignowners can update Target dates.
• Set reminders (Alerts) based on the Actual dates.
While working with a baseline schedule, team members perform the following high-levelsteps.
1. The owner sets the initial Target Start and End dates for each task.
These dates stay fixed throughout the entire List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign.
2. As the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign progresses, teammembers update the Actual dates with real data.
N850001
To keep an up-to-date scheduleBefore creating your Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns, have yoursystem administrator set up permissions and reminders as follows.
• Set permissions so that only List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaignowners can update Target dates.
• Set reminders (Alerts) based on the Target dates.
• Set reminders to be sent only to the owner or owners.
• Optionally, set reminders on the Actual dates to be sent to team members.
While working with an up-to-date schedule, team members perform the following high-level steps.
1. The owner sets the initial Target Start and End dates for each task.
2. As the List or On-demand Campaign progresses, team members update the Actualdates with real data.
3. Once a task is delayed (the owner receives reminders based on Target dates), theowner assesses the situation and adjusts the Target dates and durations asnecessary.
N650001
78 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About designing for multiple drops, lots, waves, and offers
About designing for multiple drops, lots,waves, and offers
With Distributed Marketing, you can design Corporate Campaigns, On-DemandCampaigns, and Lists that fulfill a number of business needs.
Related Topics• About multi-drop design
• About multi-lot design
• About multi-wave design
• About multi-offer design
N860001
About multi-drop designMulti-drop Corporate Campaigns, On-Demand Campaigns or Lists are recurringcampaigns or Lists that run at specified intervals (each month, for example) over adefined period of time.
Multi-drop campaigns and Lists use a workflow or a workflow stage that is configured torepeat at specified intervals. Each drop, or stage, in the workflow is made up of thetasks necessary to fulfill one complete drop, or stage, of the campaign.
When to use a multi-drop designOrganizations use multi-drop campaigns or Lists to manage campaigns that span timeand require multiple contact points, usually at regular intervals. Examples of multi-dropcampaigns are:
• Newsletter campaign—You might create a multi-drop Corporate or On-DemandCampaign to manage distribution of newsletters at regular intervals on an ongoingbasis.
• Birthday campaign—You might create a multi-drop Corporate or On-DemandCampaign to manage a campaign where some kind of offer and greeting is sent tocontacts during the months of their birthdays.
Setting up multi-drop Corporate Campaigns, On-DemandCampaigns, and ListsMulti-drop Corporate Campaigns, On-Demand Campaigns, and Lists use recurringtemplates. In the multi-drop template, you must:
• Define the stage of your workflow that contains the tasks you want to recur (onlyone stage can be recurring)
• Define properties for recurrence using the Recurrence tab
Multi-drop design is applied when you create a Corporate Campaign, On-DemandCampaign, or List using the recurring templates you've established.
N870001
Version 8.5.0 79
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
About multi-lot designMulti-lot Corporate Campaign and On-Demand Campaigns are campaigns thatdistribute the effort of customer contact over time when dealing with a very large list oftargeted customers.
When to use a multi-lot designOrganizations use multi-lot features to manage customer lists that are too large tohandle at once. A multi-lot design allows Field Marketers to accept a subset of a list forcontact in one "lot." Field Marketers can then accept more contacts for contact atsubsequent lots, thereby distributing the effort over time.
Setting up multi-lot Corporate Campaigns and On-DemandCampaignsTo achieve a multi-lot design, your Corporate Campaigns or On-Demand Campaignsmust use flowcharts in Campaign that are designed specifically for each lot. You canuse a single flowchart for all lots, or a separate flowchart for each lot. In either case:
• The list generation task for the initial lot selects from your Campaign database tocreate the first list for Field Marketer review.
• The list generation task for the second lot targets those contacts that were left in theWaiting state after the first list review, as well as any new contacts included from thelatest list generation.
N880001
About multi-wave designA multi-wave design for Corporate Campaigns and On-demand Campaigns allows youto distribute offers through several waves of contact. Multi-wave Corporate Campaignsand On-demand Campaigns are typically nonrecurring campaigns, with workflows madeup of different stages, or waves. Multi-wave campaigns take advantage of Campaignresponse tracking. You can design a "second wave" of offers to be sent to contacts whodid not respond to the initial offer.
When to use a multi-wave designUse a multi-wave design when you want to manage campaigns that present a series ofoffers to customers. For example, an organization may want to create a multi-waveCorporate Campaign to:
1. Send an offer to a list of contacts.
2. Send a second offer to contacts who did not respond to the initial offer.
For example, Field Marketers may use the same flowchart each month to identifyprospects who have birthdays in the current month. In this case, the first wave of thecampaign must complete, so that you can identify the non responders. Once thiswave is complete, the second wave of the campaign can be used to distribute thesecond offers to the non responders.
80 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About designing for multiple drops, lots, waves, and offers
Understanding multi-wave Corporate Campaigns and On-Demand CampaignsTo achieve a multi-wave design, your Corporate Campaigns and On-DemandCampaigns must use flowcharts in Campaign that are designed to accommodate eachwave of contact. Note that you can use a single flowchart for all waves, or create aseparate flowchart for each individual wave. In either case:
• The list generation task for the initial wave selects from your Campaign databaseand creates the first list for Field Marketer review.
• The list generation task for all subsequent waves should select from only thosecontacts generated by the previous wave as input. For example, if you want to sendan offer to contacts who did not respond to the first wave, the flowchart used for thesecond wave should filter out the responders and select the non responders fromthe first wave.
N890001
About multi-offer designA multi-offer design for Corporate Campaigns, On-Demand Campaigns, and Listsallows you to create a campaign or List that sends different offers to differentcustomers.
Multi-offer Corporate Campaigns, On-Demand Campaigns, or Lists can be nonrecurringor recurring. These campaigns take advantage of the segmenting capabilities inCampaign to target different contact segments with different offers.
When to use a multi-offer Corporate Campaign, On-demandCampaign, or ListOrganizations use multi-offer design to manage campaigns and Lists that targetdifferent segments of the customer population. Examples of multi-offer design include:
• Offers for responders and non responders—You might create a multi-offer campaignto provide one offer to those who respond to a campaign, and another separateoffer to those who do not respond.
• Offers for different audiences—You might create a multi-offer campaign to managedifferent offers for different audiences. For instance, a financial institution might sendone offer to college students and another offer to individuals who are head-of-household.
N8A0001
Flowchart design in Campaign for multi-offer campaigns andListsTo achieve multi-offer design, your Corporate Campaigns, On-demand Campaigns, andLists must use Campaign flowcharts that divide contacts into Segments. Each segmentrepresents a different customer list; each customer list is paired with a different offer inCampaign.
You can use Distributed Marketing to ensure that each customer list is reviewed by theright Field Marketers.
Version 8.5.0 81
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
The flowchart must be configured to write the Segment Code for a segment into theList Manager table
The List Review task matches the segment code in the task with the code written intothe List Manager table; it can then filter the list by segment code.
List Review task/segment association for multi-offer campaigns and ListsFor multi-offer campaign and Lists, you create a workflow that consists of user andsystem tasks, just as you would for any other Corporate Campaign, On-demandCampaign, or List.
With multi-offer campaigns and Lists, however, you must ensure that all customer listscreated by the flowchart are reviewed. You do so by associating each List Review taskin your workflow with each segment created by the flowchart in the campaign inCampaign
In the workflow spreadsheet, if you click the link to any List Review system task, thefollowing screen appears:
82 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About designing for multiple drops, lots, waves, and offers
The Segment Code field that appears in this screen allows you to identify theappropriate segment for the review.
The Segment Code you enter here must match the segment name as it appears inCampaign.
N8B0001
To create a multi-offer Corporate Campaign1. Create a Corporate Campaign.
2. Modify the workflow.
Enter the flowchart names that will be used for each Flowchart Run task. For eachList Review system task:
a. Click the task name.
Version 8.5.0 83
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
The task properties window appears.
b. Complete the task properties window as desired.
In the Segment Code field, enter the appropriate segment name as it appears in theflowchart in your linked campaign (in Campaign).
3. Create the linked campaign in Campaign.
4. Create the flowcharts corresponding to one or more Flowchart Run tasks in theworkflow.
Ensure the following:
• The flowcharts create different segments.
• The Segment Codes are written to the List Manager table.
5. Save and publish each flowchart.
6. Start the Corporate Campaign in Distributed Marketing.N8C0001
To create a multi-offer On-demand Campaign or ListIn most cases, field marketers create multi-offer On-demand Campaigns and Lists byselecting a template in which a corporate marketer or administrator has already set upthe necessary segments, flowcharts, and workflows.
The instructions below describe the steps to take before the field marketer actuallycreates the On-demand Campaign or List, to be performed by others working withCampaign and Distributed Marketing templates.
1. Create flowcharts and forms for your On-Demand campaign or List.
Ensure the following:
• The flowcharts create different segments.
• The Segment Codes are written to the List Manager table.
2. Create an On-Demand campaign or List template and add forms as a custom tab.
3. Modify the workflow.
For each List Review system task:
a. Click the task name.
The task properties window appears.
b. Complete the task properties window as desired.
In the Segment Code field, enter the appropriate segment name as it appears inthe flowchart used to create your forms/tabs.
4. Create an On-Demand campaign or List using the template.
5. Start the On-Demand campaign or List.N660001
84 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Updating and finishing tasks
Updating and finishing tasksWhen you create a task, or open a new workflow with existing tasks, the status of thetask or tasks is Pending. As project members work on tasks, they update the status toindicate the current progress.
To place a task into any status, ensure the workflow is in edit mode, and click theStatus column of the task, then choose the appropriate status from the drop-down list
Status Description
Pending Indicates a task has not yet started. When you create a task, it defaults tothe pending state. The pending state is symbolized by a blank status field.
Active Indicates a task is in progress. Symbolized by the icon. You can also typeA to place a task in the active state
Skipped Indicates a task has been skipped. Symbolized by the icon. Skippedtasks are tasks for which members no longer do work. Any dependencies ofthis task are also disregarded. You can also type S to place a task in theskipped state.
Finished Indicates a task has been completed. Symbolized by the icon. You canalso type F to place a task in the finished state.
Note the following behavior.
• If you enter 100 in the % Complete column for a task, the status is updated toFinished.
• If you enter 0 in the % Complete column for a task (if it was previously finished), thestatus is updated to Pending.
• If you enter any number from 1 to 99 in the % Complete column for a task (if it waspreviously finished), the status is updated to Active.
• If you mark the status for a task as Skipped, all of the dates for the task arecleared. Until you hit Save (or Save and Finish), you can retrieve the dates bycanceling out of the editing session. However, once you save the spreadsheet withthe dates cleared, you cannot retrieve them.
N8D0001
To complete multiple tasksYou have been assigned tasks for one or more Advanced Lists, On-demandCampaigns, or Corporate Campaigns.
1. Open the Tasks list page to view all of your assigned tasks.
2. Select the checkbox for each task you wish to complete.
3. Click Complete Selected.
4. In the Complete Selected Tasks dialog box, select one of the radio buttons:
Version 8.5.0 85
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
• Leave all dates as they are. The tasks are marked as complete, but no enddates are modified.
• Set all actual end dates to now. Each selected task is marked complete, andits actual end date field is set to the current date and time.
5. Click Continue to complete the selected task or tasks, or Cancel to return to the listpage without making any changes.
Any tasks you selected are removed from the Tasks list page, and their status ischanged to Complete. Additionally, their end dates are set, if you selected that option.
N8E0001
To skip multiple tasksYou can perform this task when you have been assigned tasks for one or moreAdvanced Lists, Corporate Campaigns, or On-demand Campaigns.
1. Open the Tasks list page to view all of your assigned tasks.
2. Select the checkbox for each task to skip.
3. Click Skip Selected.
4. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK to skip the selected tasks, or Cancel toreturn to the list page without making any changes.
Any tasks you selected and skipped are removed from the Tasks list page, and theirstatus is changed to Skipped.
N8F0001
About copying and pasting tasksWhen copying and pasting tasks, note the following.
• For copying, you must select a continuous range of tasks, rather than selectingmultiple, disconnected tasks (by using Ctrl+click).
• If you do not insert enough blank tasks to correspond to the ones you are copying,existing tasks are overwritten.
• To paste rows at the insertion point, you can click Paste from the Tools menu orpress Ctrl+V. To paste rows after the selected row, you must click Paste RowsAfter from the Tools menu.
N900001
To copy tasks in Internet ExplorerYou can copy a continuous group of tasks to another place in the same workflow or intothe workflow for another Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign.
1. Open the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign that hasthe tasks to copy and click the Workflow tab.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the first source task. If this is the only task you are copying, skip to step 5.
86 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Updating and finishing tasks
4. Mouse over the final source task, then Shift-click over this task. A range of tasks youselected is highlighted.
5. From the workflow toolbar, select Copy from the Tools menu item to copy theselected task or tasks.
If you are pasting the tasks into the same workflow, skip to step 7.
6. If you are copying the tasks to another project workflow, navigate to the destinationworkflow tab, and open it for editing (click its Edit link).
7. Optionally, insert enough blank rows below the destination to act as placeholders forthe tasks you are copying.
For example, if you are copying 6 tasks, make sure there are 6 blank rows available.If you do not create the necessary rows, existing tasks below the insertion point areoverwritten.
8. Click the destination task.
9. From the workflow toolbar, select Paste from the Tools menu item to paste thetask.
The source tasks are placed in the workflow, starting from the selected destination task.
Related Topics• To add a stage or task
N910001
Post task update dialog boxThis dialog appears when you click a workflow task in view mode. Use this dialog as aquick alternative to editing the entire workflow, when you only need to update a singletask. From this dialog, you can update certain items, add task attachments, as well asadding comments to the revision history of the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign,or Corporate Campaign.
The Post Task Update dialog box contains two tabs, Status and Attachments.
StatusThe Status tab contains the following fields.
Field Description
Owner(s) The task owner or owners. At the task level, Advanced List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign members are referred to as task owners.
That is, in the workflow spreadsheet, you use the Members column to add peopleto a task; this column refers to Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign members. When you open the task in the Post TaskUpdate screen, these members are listed as Owners (which refers to taskowners).
Version 8.5.0 87
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Field Description
Target Dates The target start and end dates, as well as the duration for the task. You can editeither or both of the date and time selectors to update the information.
Status The status of the task. Edit this field by selecting a value from the field’s pull downmenu.
% Complete The current progress for the task. Enter a number between 0 and 100 to changethe value.
Actual Effort The effort for the task, measured in days. Enter a value to update the field. Thisfield can contain partial days, for example, 3D-2H-0M
Actual date and The Actual begin and end dates and times for the task. You can edit either or bothtime fields of the date and time selectors to update the information.
Begin and end dates are mandatory; you receive a warning if you attempt tosave without entering values for both fields. Additionally, the system checks toensure the end date is not earlier than the begin date.
Comments Displays comments for the task. You can enter text to update the field.
These notes go in to the revision history of the project and any notifications thatmay be sent about the task.
Enable Task At- A flag to determine whether or not the task can contain attachments. This field istachments visible to Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign owners
only. Check the box to allow the task to contain attachments.
Make sure you close the dialog box by clicking either Save and Return or Cancel; ifyou do not use one of the buttons to close the dialog box, the task may remainlocked, and no one else can edit it.
To change the state of a finished task back to active, you must set both the Statusto Pending, and the % Complete field to an integer less than 100. If you do notchange both fields, after you close the dialog box, the task is still marked ascompleted.
AttachmentsThe Attachments tab contains the following fields.
88 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Managing task dependencies
Item Description
Current attach- The top portion of the page describes the current attachments of the task. Itments section contains three columns of information for each attachment:
• File: Contains a link to the attachment file and describes the file type and size.• Description: Contains revision history and description for the attachment.
The name of the user who added the attachment is listed. This isimportant, as the creator differentiates attachments with the same namefor the same task.
• Actions: Contains links for deleting the attachment or for sending theattachment via email.
File to Attach Contains a drop-down menu that allows you to specify the source of the file toattach.
Browse Use this button to browse your computer or the asset libraries for the file to attach.
Comments Use this text box to add any comments for the attachment.
Attach Selected Use this button to attach the selected file or URL.File
Related Topics• Workflow tab fields
N670001
Managing task dependenciesIBM Unica Distributed Marketing has several options for managing dependencies ontasks as new rows are added to the spreadsheet and existing rows are removed.
• Normal: no dependencies are automatically created. If you need dependencies forthe new tasks and stages, create them manually.
• Sequential: insert the new task in an existing chain of tasks.
• Parallel: insert a new task branch parallel to an existing chain of tasks.
Inserting tasks in sequenceInsertion in sequence makes the new task dependent on the task before it, and thenmakes all items that were dependent on that task dependent on the new task.
You insert a task in sequence when it can only start after the previous task hascompleted. For example, in the figure below, if task X cannot be worked on until task Bhas been completed, you insert task X in sequence.
Version 8.5.0 89
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Inserting tasks in parallelInsertion in parallel makes the task dependent on the items (tasks or stages) that thetask before it was dependent on, and makes the items dependent on the previous taskdependent on the new task as well.
You insert a task in parallel when it can be worked on at the same time as another task.For example, in the figure below, if task X can be worked on simultaneously with task B,you insert task X in parallel.
Deleting tasksDeleting a task removes the selected task from the chain, but re-links the two remainingsegments of the chain together so that it is one continuous chain again.
90 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About adding a stage or task
When a task is deleted its dependents are made dependent on its dependencies beforethe deletion takes place. This preserves all sequential chains of dependencies.
Default and "last used" modesTo make adding a task as simple and consistent as possible, IBM Unica DistributedMarketing provides the following behavior.
• The default mode is "in series;" when you begin an editing session, this is theinsertion mode.
• There is a "last used mode," remembered for each editing session. Once you selecta mode from the menu, this mode is used each time you add a task during theremainder of your session.
For example, to add several tasks in parallel, you only need to select the in parallelmode once; then every time you insert another task, the system inserts it in parallel,unless you explicitly select another mode.
N680001
About adding a stage or taskTo add a task or stage to a workflow, your security role must grant you the permissionnamed Add/Edit/Delete Steps, Dependencies and Targets for the template youselect. If the Add button is missing from the toolbar, contact your administrator aboutobtaining the appropriate access rights.
Note the following about stage and task rows.
• When adding a stage or task, if you place the number of the task in front of the taskname, the task is inserted in the place that the number indicates.
For example, if you enter 2.3 Have team meeting anywhere in the task list, thetask is placed under the task labeled 2.2 and the numbers of subsequent tasksshifts, so that the step previously labeled 2.3 is now 2.4.
• You can add a stage or task anywhere in the list and then use the up and downicons on toolbar to move the stage or task to the appropriate place in the list.
Version 8.5.0 91
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
• There are several options for managing dependencies on tasks as new rows areadded and existing rows are removed.
Related Topics• Managing task dependencies
N690001
About editing a stage or taskIf you change the number for a task or stage, the task is inserted before the rowmatching the new number.
For example, assume the stage order as shown here.
1. Planning
2. Collateral Design
3. Lead Generation
4. Show Setup-to-Breakdown
5. Marketing Review
If you edit task 5, Marketing Review, changing its number to 3, the new order is asfollows.
1. Planning
2. Collateral Design
3. Marketing Review
4. Lead Generation
5. Show Setup-to-Breakdown
Now suppose you edit task 2, Collateral Design, changing its number to 4. The neworder is the following.
1. Planning
2. Marketing Review
3. Collateral Design
4. Lead Generation
5. Show Setup-to-Breakdown
To move a task or stage to the end, give it any number higher than the final task orstage. For example, to move stage 2, Marketing Review to the end, change its numberto 6 or higher.
N6A0001
92 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To add a stage or task
To add a stage or taskBefore adding a stage or task, open a workflow in edit mode.
1. In the workflow, select the stage or task above the place to insert the new stage ortask.
2. Add a stage, or standard task.
• Click the Add Stage Row icon ( ) to add a stage.
• Click the Add Task Row icon ( ) to add a standard task.
3. Optionally, to make a task dependent on another task, enter the number of the taskit is dependent on after the task in parentheses ( ).
For example, suppose task is named Generate List. To make this taskdependent upon task 1.3, name the task 2.5 Generate List (1.3).
4. When you have finished editing the workflow, save your changes.
The stage or task is added to the workflow, after the insertion point.
If the date of one task changes, it changes the dates of all the dependent tasks.
If a task has more than one dependency, separate the task numbers with commas. Forexample, use 2.2 Setup Milestone Schedule (1.1, 2.1).
N6B0001
To add a stage or task below a locked taskBefore adding a stage or task, open a workflow in edit mode.
If you select a locked task, the insert task/stage links do not work. To add a task directlybelow a locked task, you must perform the following steps.
1. Navigate to the workflow page to change and click Edit.
2. Select any task row that is not locked.
3. Add a stage, standard task, or approval task.
• To add a stage, click the Add Stage Row icon .
• To add a standard task, click the Add Task Row icon .
4. Change the number of the task or stage so that it directly follows the locked task itshould follow.
For example, suppose the locked task is 2.5 Review copy - informal (2.3) .You would set the number of the new task to 2.6. Once you finish naming the task,the system moves it so it is after task 2.5.
Version 8.5.0 93
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
N6C0001
About the workflow spreadsheet viewWhen you display the workflow as a spreadsheet (the default), the workflow displays theinformation about the stages and tasks in your workflow as a list in a spreadsheet. Youuse this view to update task status, add reviewers, and changes dates, among othertasks.
Related Topics• Workflow tab fields
• Workflow toolbar
N6E0001
About the workflow process flowchart viewThe process flowchart view shows displays the tasks in a network diagram style, asfollows.
• Each task is displayed as a box with a task number and ID.
• Tasks that have dependencies are connected to any tasks they depend on.
• Sequential tasks are displayed on the same line.
• Parallel task are displayed on different lines.
• Independent/orphan tasks are displayed on their own line, with no connections.N6D0001
About the workflow timeline viewThe timeline view of the workflow tab presents a view of the List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign over a period of weeks or months. To view theproject schedule in a timeline view, click the View as Timeline icon.
You can customize the timeline view by using the Layout link from the workflow tab.Use this dialog box for the following purposes.
• Select the captions, if any, to appear next to each bar in timeline.
• Choose a weekly or monthly view of the timeline.
• Select the types of dates to view.
If you click the Edit link from the timeline view, the spreadsheet opens for editing.
N930001
Workflow tab layout pageUse this page to set the appearance for both the spreadsheet and timeline views of aworkflow tab.
94 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About the workflow spreadsheet view
To hide the Spreadsheet Layout or Timeline Layout section, click the icon next tothe title. To view a hidden section, click the icon.
Spreadsheet layout sectionField Description
Columns Check a column to display, or uncheck to hide.
Preset Column Click a link to select one of a preset group of columns to display.groups • All: default setting; all boxes checked (all columns displayed)
• Targets: hides Status, % complete, and Actual date columns.• Actuals: hides Target Dates/Effort and Member/Reviewer roles columns.• All dates: displays all columns related to target and actual dates.• Responsibility: displays columns related to who is assigned to complete the
tasks.
First Column Width Select one of the radio buttons.
• Remember Last Setting: When viewing the workflow spreadsheet, you mayadjust the first column width to see more or less of the task names.
• Exactly: Select this button and enter a number to set the column to an exactwidth in pixels.
Timeline layout sectionField Description
Time Scale The increment of time used for measurement. Select either Weeks or Months.The default setting is Weeks.
Bars Represent The bars in the timeline view indicate durations. You can choose to display eitherForecast/Actual dates, Target dates, or both. The default is to display both.
Bar Captions By default, the bars do not have captions. Select one of the choices from the dropdown menu to display certain information as bar captions. For example, you canhave the task name or milestone type display as a caption.
First Column Width See the First Column Width description for in the Spreadsheet Layout sectionabove.
Version 8.5.0 95
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
ButtonsButton Description
Make these the de- Check this box to keep your settings as the default for the workflow. This ensuresfault that whenever you navigate away from and back to this tab, your display setting
will not change (until the next time you make changes and check this box).
These are the defaults for all users, for this workflow, until someone changesthe defaults.
Apply and Close Click to apply your changes and close the dialog.
Apply Click to apply your changes. Your changes display on the workflow, and the dialogremains open for further editing.
Restore Defaults Restores all settings to their default values, undoing any customizations you havemade.
Cancel Click to close the dialog without changing any settings.
Related Topics• To set first column width on workflow spreadsheet
N920001
Workflow tab fieldsWhen the workflow appears in spreadsheet view (the default view), it includes thefollowing fields and columns.
Field Description
Tasks and stages Lists the task stages and tasks that comprise the Advanced List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign.
When in edit mode, click a stage or task to revise or change.
When in view mode:
• Clicking a workflow task opens the Post Task Update screen in a newwindow.
Status The status of the task.
% Complete The percentage value that represents how complete a task is.
When in edit mode, click the measuring bar for a task and enter a number. Themeasuring bar expands to a comparable level.
96 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About the workflow spreadsheet view
Field Description
Actual Start After you change a task from Pending to Active, this field represents the ActualStart date. Actual Start dates are in regular font.
In edit mode, use the pop-up calendar to select a date and time.
End After you change a task from Active to Finished, this field represents the ActualEnd date. Actual End dates are in regular font.
In edit mode, use the pop-up calendar to select a date and time.
Dur. The duration of the task, in days, hours, and minutes.
If you enter both start and end dates, the system automatically calculates a valuefor this field (the End date minus the Actual Start date).
Actual Effort The actual effort it took to complete the task, as opposed to calendar duration.Effort is measured in days, hours, and minutes.
Anchored Dates Indicates whether the task is anchored. If a lock appears in this field, the task’sdates are anchored.
To specify a fixed date for a task, click the column, then select Anchored from thepull down menu. The task date cannot move even if the dates of the tasks it isdependent on change.
If a dependency is not met, the dates in conflict appear with a different icon and ina different font.
For example, suppose task 2.2 is dependent on task 2.1. If the target end date oftask 2.1 is after the target start date of task 2.2, both the target end date of 2.1and the target start date of 2.2 appear in red, if you anchored the date for task 2.2by selecting the lock icon in the Anchored Dates column.
Schedule Through Indicators for which dates to use when determining task dates. The followingoptions are available.
• Business: indicates this task includes only standard, non-holiday, non-weekend dates. This is the default for all tasks.
• Weekends: indicates this task includes weekends. The system includesweekends when it calculates dates for this task.
• Off.: indicates this task includes system-wide non-work time that has beendefined. The system takes into account these times when it calculates datesfor this task.
• All: indicates this task includes all dates. No dates are ignored when datesare calculated for this task.
Target Start The targeted start date of the task. In edit mode, use the pop-up calendar toselect a date.
Target End The targeted end date of the task. In edit mode, use the pop-up calendar to selecta date.
Version 8.5.0 97
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Field Description
Target Dur. The actual duration of the task, in days, hours, and minutes. The Target Endminus the Target Start dates.
Target Effort The targeted effort estimated to complete the task, as opposed to calendarduration.
Milestone Type A task milestone that you choose from a drop-down list. Example options might beMeeting, Event, and Job Start. Plan administrators set the milestone types thatappear on the list.
For more information on setting up milestones, see the Distributed MarketingAdministrator's Guide.
Member Role(s) A role or roles associated with the task. These can be loaded automatically fromthe project template used to create the project, or the project owner can set themup manually.
When an approval task has a status of In Progress, On hold, or Completed, thisfield is read-only.
Members The people associated with the task.
If a workflow task has a role in its Member Role(s) column, when you assignpeople to roles, the workflow automatically adds a person in the correspondingMembers column.
You can also add people to the Members column manually, while editing theworkflow.
When you edit the workflow for an approval task, teams are not listed in this fieldbecause a team cannot be the owner of the approval task.
Typically, standard tasks have members.
Related Topics• Updating and finishing tasks
N820001
Workflow toolbarWhen the Workflow tab is in edit view, a toolbar appears. You use the buttons on thetoolbar to make changes to the workflow. For example, you can insert and delete tasks,add a stage, clear all entries, and so on.
The following table explains each button.
Icon Description
Add Task Row. Adds a new people task in the spreadsheet.
98 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About the workflow spreadsheet view
Icon Description
Click a dependency option
• No dependencies• In series• In parallel
This option determines how IBM Unica Distributed Marketing behaves whenadding new tasks.
Add Stage Row. Adds a new stage in the spreadsheet. Tasks are grouped instages.
The Tools menu contains the following choices.
• Copy: copies the contents of the selected cells to the clipboard.• Paste: pastes the contents of the clipboard, beginning at the selected cell.• Paste Rows After: pastes the contents of the clipboard below the selected
row.• Mark as...: marks the selected task appropriately. For example, selecting
Mark as Finished changes the status of the selected task to Finished. Youcan mark the task Skipped, Finished, Active, or Pending.
• Fill Down/Up: copies a cell’s values to a range of cells.• Clear: erases all entries in the selected cell or group of cells.• Clear Column: erases all entries in the selected column.
The date columns have dependents as follows: if you select Clear Columnto erase the Target Start, the Target End column is also erased and viceversa. If you select Clear Column to erase the Forecast/Actual Start, theForecast/Actual End column is also erased and vice versa.
• Clear All: erases all entries in the workflow.
Click to recalculate dependent dates while preserving slack time. Recalculates alldate dependencies based on your changes; leaves any existing slack timebetween dependent tasks.
Click to recalculate dependent dates while removing slack time. Recalculates alldate dependencies based on your changes; removes any slack time betweendependent tasks.
Click to undo your last change.
Click to reapply a change you undid with the Undo action.
Move row up. Click to move the selected task or stage upward. If you move astage, the associated tasks move with it.
Version 8.5.0 99
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
Icon Description
Move row down. Click to move the selected task or stage downward. If you movea stage, the associated tasks move with it.
Delete row. Click to delete the selected task or stage. Note the following.
• If you delete a stage, all of its associated tasks move up one stage.• If you delete the first stage, the first task associated with it becomes the stage
for the rest of the tasks.
Related Topics• Managing task dependencies
• To copy tasks in Internet Explorer
• To fill data into a range of cells
N970001
Workflow linksThe Workflow tab displays the following links.
Link Description
Breadcrumbs Click any active link in the breadcrumbs trail to go to that page.
Breadcrumbs (a list of pages you visited prior to arriving at the current page)are located above the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaignname.
EditClick the icon to add, remove, or make changes to workflow stages andtasks.
View as spreadsheetClick the icon to view the workflow as a spreadsheet.
This view provides access to granular information about a task, presented intable format. For example, you can easily look up a task's status, duration,forecasted end date, and team members using the column headers. This isthe default view.
View as timelineClick the icon to view the workflow as a timeline.
This view provides a graphic view of information such as task duration andstatus. From the Project Timeline drop-down menu, select various optionssuch as Dates/Progress to show this information on the timeline.
LayoutClick the icon to open a dialog for adding and removing columns fromthe spreadsheet view.
100 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About the workflow spreadsheet view
Link Description
Save as template Click to save the workflow definition directly into the template library (if youhave the permission to do so).
A dialog is presented to allow you to name the template. For more details,see the Distributed Marketing Administrator’s Guide.
Tasks and stages In the spreadsheet view, tasks are links that behave as follows:
• Clicking an approval tasks pops up the summary page for the approval ina new window.
• Clicking a workflow task pops up the Post Task Update dialog in a newwindow.
Related Topics• To edit the the default workflow
• About the workflow spreadsheet view
• About the workflow timeline view
• Workflow tab layout page
• Post task update dialog box
N980001
To change the layout of the workflowYou can change the layout of the spreadsheet and timeline views of the workflow todisplay the information that you need.
1. In the Workflow tab, click Layout.
The Instance Workflow Tab Layout dialog box opens.
2. In the Spreadsheet Layout section, select the checkboxes of all columns you wantto show in the workflow.
You can also use the links after Columns to display: to select subsets of availablecolumns.
3. Set the first column width for the spreadsheet view.
4. In the Timeline Layout section, select values from the Time Scale, BarsRepresent, and Bar Captions drop-down lists.
5. Set the first column width for the timeline view.
6. To have these settings apply only to the currently opened workflow, as opposed toall workflows you view, check Use these settings for current workflow only.
7. Click Apply or Apply and Close to save your selections.
The view of the workflow is updated to reflect your selections.
Related Topics• To set first column width on workflow spreadsheet
N940001
Version 8.5.0 101
7 - Workflows for Corporate Marketers
To set first column width on workflowspreadsheetYou can change the width of the first column in the workflow spreadsheet view, andkeep this setting for your entire session. That is, your changes remain after younavigate to other pages and subsequently return to this tab.
1. Navigate to the Workflow tab of the Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign.
2. Use the column width control to resize the first column to your preferred width.
3. Click the Layout link in the top right section of the screen.
4. In the Instance Workflow Tab Layout dialog, do the following:
a. In the First Column Width section, select the Remember Last Setting radiobutton.
b. At the bottom of the dialog, check the Make these the default settings for thisproject's workflow tab box.
5. Click Apply and Close to save your changes and close the dialog.
The first column width is now set for this Advanced List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign, for the remainder of your session; no matter which pages younavigate to, when you navigate back to this workflow tab, the first column width remainsas you set it.
102 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N103C6
8 IBM Unica CampaignFlowcharts for IBMUnica DistributedMarketing
■ About flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns■ About flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns■ About flowcharts for Lists■ About list selection flowcharts■ About campaign fulfillment flowcharts■ About viewing campaign and list attributes in Distributed Marketing■ About running flowcharts
N990001
About flowcharts for Corporate CampaignsFor a Corporate Campaign, two flowcharts are typically executed by corporatemarketing through Campaign:
• A List selection flowchart selects target customers from your customer database.Field marketers then accept or decline the target customers who are associated withthem.
• A second flowchart runs the campaign. It selects those customers approved by fieldmarketers, associates them with offers, and fulfills the campaign.
N9A0001
About flowcharts for On-demandCampaigns
For On-demand Campaigns, field marketers typically specify selection criteria madeavailable by the administrator in the On-demand Campaign template. That selectioncriteria is sent to the associated List selection flowchart in Campaign and used to selectcustomers from the customer database.
Version 8.5.0 103
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
A second flowchart runs the On-demand Campaign based on criteria you configure. Forexample, the On-demand Campaign can have an attribute to indicate whether it shouldbe fulfilled locally or by the corporate office. If it's to be fulfilled locally, the flowchartgenerates a file that is attached to the On-demand Campaign, and the field marketercan use this file to fulfill the campaign. If it's to be fulfilled by the corporate office, thenthe results are written to a table that the corporate marketer can use for fulfillment.
While the flowcharts run in Campaign, field marketers can complete all their workthrough Distributed Marketing. The Flowchart Run tasks in the workflow execute theCampaign flowcharts in the background.
Typically, corporate marketers design and create the flowcharts in Campaign, as well astemplates and forms in Distributed Marketing; field marketers work only withinDistributed Marketing.
N9B0001
About flowcharts for ListsFor Lists, field marketers typically specify selection criteria made available by theadministrator in the List template. That selection criteria is sent to the associated listselection flowchart in Campaign and used to select customers from the customerdatabase.
While the flowchart runs in Campaign, field marketers can complete all their workthrough Distributed Marketing. The Flowchart Run task in the workflow executes theCampaign flowchart in the background.
Typically, corporate marketers design and create the List selection flowcharts inCampaign; field marketers work only within Distributed Marketing
N9C0001
About list selection flowchartsA list selection flowchart in Campaign uses certain criteria to select customers from thecustomer database. This criteria is specified in a Select process.
The flowchart must also contain a Snapshot or Extract process to write the selected listto the Distributed Marketing database.
Related Topics• About List selection flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns
• About list selection flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns and Lists
NA00001
About List selection flowcharts for CorporateCampaignsFor Corporate Campaigns, the corporate marketer creates and generates the Listthrough Campaign. The contact list is then made available to subscribed field marketersusing Distributed Marketing for validation.
104 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About list selection flowcharts
Steps for generating the Corporate Campaign ListThe following steps outline the tasks for generating the Corporate Campaign List:
1. The corporate marketer creates the Corporate Campaign and the linked campaign,by accessing the Corporate Campaigns page through the Corporate Campaigncommand in the Local Marketing menu.
2. The corporate marketer configures the linked campaign, by accessing the campaignthrough the Campaigns command in the Campaign menu.
3. The corporate marketer builds the List selection flowchart, by accessing thecampaign through the Campaigns command in the Campaign menu.
4. A Corporate Campaign workflow task runs the List selection flowchart.
5. In Campaign, the flowchart runs, resulting in the List being written to the DistributedMarketing database.
6. The corporate marketer accepts the contact list.
Related Topics• About linking a Corporate Campaign to Campaign
• About generating the target list from the flowchart
NA20001
How Corporate Campaign selections are storedYou should design the list selection flowchart associated with a Corporate Campaign sothat when it runs in Campaign, the selected customers are stored in the DistributedMarketing system database, in the uacc_corporate_lists table.
Generating and storing the list through the flowchart
Before the flowchart can store the list selections in the uacc_corporate_lists
table, the table must be mapped in Campaign.
List selections are made through a Select process in the flowchart. You define the SQLstatements to select desired customers for the Corporate Campaign. For example, theSelect process might select all customers with a savings account within a specificrange.
You can use one or more Select processes to select the target customers for theCorporate Campaign list.
Following the Select processes, you add a Snapshot or Extract process. Whenconfiguring the Snapshot or Extract process, ensure that you:
• Export the selections to the uacc_corporate_lists table.
• Select the the Add to Existing Data radio button.
The uacc_corporate_lists table contains the history of all the generatedlists. If you select either Replace All Records or Update Records, the contentsof the table are overwritten or updated and all the lists are deleted or updated.
Version 8.5.0 105
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
Mapping database fields to the uacc_corporate_lists tableIn the list selection flowchart, you must map fields in your customer database to thefollowing fields in the uacc_corporate_lists table:
Field Field Type Saved Value
ListId <Project_code> Project code.
ListId is a required user variable. Distributed Marketingsends this value to Campaign, which uses it to populatethe database ListId field.
AudienceLevel Derived Field The audience level(s) configured in the List Manager modulemust be hard-coded with the values configured in thelistmanager_tables.xml file (for example, "P" for People Tableor "P/C" for People Table/Contract Table).
UserBranch N/A Not required.
UserID <Customer_User> The user name of the field marketer or corporate marketerrunning the flowchart.
Internally, all flowcharts are run by the same Campaignuser. The flowchart uses the UserName variable to storein the UserID field the user name the field marketer orcorporate marketer to record who ran this flowchart.
GenerationDate <Generate_Date> Date on which the records are generated. This can be aspecific date, a formula, or a date indicated in the campaign.
Status Derived Field All records are initially set to T, for To Accept, whichcorresponds to Waiting in the user interface.
List records can have one of four status values, dependingon the actions of field marketers during validation:
• T: To Accept• V: Accepted• A: Added• D: Deleted
Audience Level ID <CustomerID> or The unique ID for the target of the campgaign, typically a<AccountID> Customer ID Or Account ID.
You may need to map additional fields for filtering purposes. For example, if theregion_id column was added for Data Level Filtering, you need to map it as well.
NA10001
106 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About list selection flowcharts
About list selection flowcharts for On-demandCampaigns and ListsFor On-demand Campaigns and Lists, the corporate marketer typically creates theflowchart in Campaign, then field marketers run the flowchart and generate the lists.
Steps for generating the On-demand Campaign or List customerlistThe following steps outline the tasks for generating the customer list for an On-demandCampaign or List:
1. In Campaign, create and publish the list selection flowchart.
2. In Distributed Marketing, create and publish forms, then add them to a template withcustom tabs for displaying the flowchart forms.
3. In Distributed Marketing, create the On-demand Campaign or List using theappropriate template.
4. In Distributed Marketing, select the list composition criteria.
5. In Distributed Marketing, generate the list by running the flowchart.NA30001
About user variables for list selection flowchartsWhen building the List selection flowchart in Campaign, you must first specify the uservariables to be used in the queries to select your contacts.
You must define two types of user variables:
• All user variables that map to selection criteria that you want field marketers to beable to set when creating an On-demand Campaign or List. For example, if youwant field marketers to be able to select an Income Range for an On-demandCampaign, you must define a user variable for Income Range in the list selectionflowchart.
• All user variables specified in the following table:
User Variable Data Type Value
UserName Text <User_name> (the ID that the user enters to log into Collaborate).
This parameter is never displayed in DistributedMarketing.
ListId Text <ID_List>
This parameter is displayed as the List Code in theList Summary page, or the On-demand CampaignCode on the On-demand Campaign Summarypage.
Version 8.5.0 107
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
User Variable Data Type Value
ListSelection Text Allows you to combine lists to form new lists.
<Anycharacter_string> All variables with the prefix "ListSelection" arelinked to the list of Lists.
The list of Lists contains the field marketer's activeLists that can be included or excluded.
NA40001
Guidelines for list selection flowcharts for On-demandCampaigns and ListsWhen you build the list selection flowchart in Campaign, you must follow theseguidelines:
• You must specify the flowchart name in the template for On-demand Campaigns orLists from which the flowchart is run.
• You cannot use the following processes in a list selection flowchart:
• Plan
• Create Segment
• Cube
If you are using the List Manager, follow these additional guidelines:
• For On-demand Campaigns, the flowchart must end with a Snapshot or Extractprocess that writes the selections to the uacc_ondemand_lists table in theDistributed Marketing system database.
• For Lists, the flowchart must end with a Snapshot or Extract process that writes theselections to the uacc_lists table in the Distributed Marketing system database.
NA50001
How On-demand Campaign or List selections are storedWhen the list selection flowchart associated with an On-demand Campaign or List runsin Campaign, the selected customers are stored in the Distributed Marketing systemdatabase:
• On-demand Campaign selections are stored in the uacc_ondemand_lists table.
• List selections are stored in the uacc_lists table.
Generating and storing the list through the flowchart
Before the flowchart can store the list selections in the uacc_ondemand_lists oruacc_lists table, the table must be mapped in Campaign.
List selections are made through one or more Select processes in the flowchart. Youdefine the SQL statements to select desired customers for the On-demand Campaign orList. For example, the Select process might select all customers with a savings accountwithin a specific range.
108 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About list selection flowcharts
You also use user variables to specify parameters in Distributed Marketing that areused as selection criteria in the flowchart in Campaign.
If you are using the List Manager following the Select processes, you add a Snapshot orExtract process. When configuring the Snapshot or Extract process, ensure that you:
• Export the selections to the uacc_ondemand_lists or uacc_lists table.
• Select the the Add to Existing Data radio button.
The uacc_ondemand_lists and uacc_lists tables contain the histories ofall the generated lists. In the flowchart in Campaign, if you select either ReplaceAll Records or Update Records, the contents of the tables are overwritten orupdated and all the lists are deleted or updated. The lifecycle of data in thesetables is meant to be managed through Distributed Marketing. For example,when you delete a List, the data for that List is the uacc_lists table is cleanedup. In addition, when the List is re-run, entries from previous runs of that list arecleared from the table.
Mapping database fields to the uacc_ondemand_lists or uacc_lists tableIn the list selection flowchart, you must map fields in your customer database to thefollowing fields in the uacc_ondemand_lists or uacc_lists table:
Field Field Type Saved Value
ListId User Variable UserVar.ListId
AudienceLevel Derived Field The audience level(s) configured in the List Manager modulemust be hard-coded with the values configured in thelistmanager_tables.xml file (for example, "P" forPeople Table or "P/C" for People Table/Contract Table).
UserBranch N/A N/A
UserID User Variable UserVar.UserName
User to which the selected customer is associated. The valuemust correspond to the ID that the user uses to log in.
GenerationDate <Generate_Date> Date on which the records are generated. This can be aspecific date, a formula, or a date indicated in the campaign.
Status Derived Field "V" is hard-coded.
All records are set to "Accepted" by default.
List records can have one of four status values, dependingon the actions of field marketers during validation:
• T: To Accept• V: Accepted• A: Added• D: Deleted
Version 8.5.0 109
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
Field Field Type Saved Value
AudienceLevelID <CustomerID> ID of reference(s)
You may need to map additional fields for filtering purposes. For example, if theregion_id column was added for Data Level Filtering, you need to map it as well.
N9D0001
About campaign fulfillment flowchartsA campaign fulfillment flowchart in Campaign begins the actual marketing campaign andcontrols how specific offers are sent to selected customers.
For On-demand Campaigns, corporate marketers build the campaign fulfillmentflowchart in Campaign and associate it with an On-demand Campaign template inDistributed Marketing. Field marketers then run the campaign fulfillment flowchart fromwithin Distributed Marketing.
The selected customers are handled differently for Corporate Campaigns and On-demand Campaigns.
Related Topics• About campaign fulfillment flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns
• About campaign fulfillment flowcharts for On-demand Campaigns
NA60001
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts forCorporate CampaignsThe Corporate Campaign fulfillment flowchart can be executed by a Run Flowchart taskin the workflow, or the corporate marketer can create and run the fulfillment flowchartthrough Campaign.
How you select target customers in the campaign fulfillmentflowchartYou select target customers in the campaign fulfillment flowchart from theuacc_corporate_lists table in the Distributed Marketing system database.
In a Corporate Campaign, field marketers must approve their associated targetcustomers for inclusion in the campaign. Field marketers can also add customers whowere not in the original list generated by the list selection flowchart. Only approved oradded customers should be selected by the Corporate Campaign's fulfillment flowchart.
The list selection flowchart records the original list of customers in theuacc_corporate_lists table in the Distributed Marketing system database. Whenfield marketers review the customer list, their approvals, rejections, and additions arerecorded in the uacc_corporate_lists table as well.
110 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts
Therefore, the campaign fulfillment flowchart must select the approved target customersfrom the uacc_corporate_lists table, not the original table in the customerdatabase.
Filtering targets in the uacc_corporate_lists table to select theright customersWhen you select customers from the uacc_corporate_lists table in the DistributedMarketing system database, you must filter your selections based on two criteria:
• Project Code
You must select only target customers for this Corporate Campaign by matching thecampaign's unique code with the project_code value. For example, the Selectprocess in the flowchart could include the statement:
project_code = "CorpCamp029"
111
• Status
You must select only approved target customers by matching values of A or V in theStatus column. The Select process in the flowchart should include the statement:
Status in ('A', 'V')
Related Topics• About List selection flowcharts for Corporate Campaigns
NA70001
About campaign fulfillment flowcharts for On-demand CampaignsFor On-demand Campaigns, the corporate marketer creates and publishes thecampaign fulfillment flowchart through Campaign. Corporate marketers, oradministrators, then add the form that is automatically created by the publishing of theflowchart to an On-demand Campaign template. Field marketers then use the On-demand Campaign template to create new On-demand Campaigns.
A field marketer runs the campaign fulfillment flowchart for an On-demand Campaignthrough Distributed Marketing.
How you select target customers in the campaign fulfillmentflowchartYou select target customers in the campaign fulfillment flowchart from theuacc_ondemand_lists table in the Distributed Marketing system database.
Version 8.5.0
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
The list selection flowchart for the On-demand Campaign records the list of customersin the uacc_ondemand_lists table. Field marketers refine this list by refining theselection criteria for the On-demand Campaign and re-running the list selectionflowchart.
Filtering targets in the uacc_ondemand_lists table to select theright customersWhen you select customers from the uacc_ondemand_lists table in the DistributedMarketing system database, you must filter your selections based on theUserVar.ID_List user variable.
NA80001
On-demand Campaign fulfillmentCorporate marketers can specify On-demand Campaign fulfillment requirements to fieldmarketers through a custom tab on the On-demand Campaign template.
Local or corporate service fulfillmentDepending on how your administrator configured the On-demand Campaign template,you may need to fulfill the On-demand Campaign. Or, you may be required to use acorporate service to fulfill the campaign. Or you may have to choose between thesemethods.
When you are permitted by the corporate office to fulfill the On-demand Campaign, thecorporate marketers may configure the mail merge feature to facilitate fulfillment.
The mail merge featureField marketers or corporate marketers can use the Collaborate mail merge feature topersonalize standard letters by merging a Microsoft Word letter document with a filecontaining contact data for on-demand marketing campaign target customers.
N9E0001
About viewing campaign and list attributesin Distributed Marketing
Corporate marketers can expose the list and campaign attributes. The attributes canthen be viewed by field marketers for On-demand Campaigns and Lists.
Field marketers view of campaign and listattributesField marketers can view the selection criteria for a List or On-demand Campaign, andthe fulfillment specifications for an On-demand Campaign. This information comes fromthe flowchart attributes the corporate marketer exposes in Distributed Marketing.
Selection criteria and fulfillment specifications are made available as tabs in thetemplate for the On-demand Campaign or List.
112 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About viewing campaign and list attributes in Distributed Marketing
Field marketers cannot view this information for Corporate Campaigns; therefore thesetabs are not available in Corporate Campaigns.
NA90001
To make flowchart attributes visible in DistributedMarketingBefore you can complete this task, you must define the selection criteria as uservariables.
For On-demand Campaigns, corporate marketers can follow these steps to make listand campaign attributes visible to field marketers using Distributed Marketing.
1. Edit the flowchart with the criteria you want to make visible to field marketers.
2. In the flowchart editor, click the Options icon ( ).
3. From the drop-down menu, select Parameter List.
The Campaign Distributed Marketing Settings window displays the ExposeParameters tab.
This tab contains all the settings used in the processes contained in the flowchart,as well as the user variables that you have already defined.
4. Check the box next to the parameters that you want to be visible to field marketers.
Only the selected parameters are visible in Distributed Marketing.
Each published flowchart must have the user variables UserName and ListID. Ifthese two user variables are not present when the flowchart is published, theassociated form in Distributed Marketing is not saved.
5. Select the name of each checked user variable or setting to define how they aredisplayed in Distributed Marketing:
a. Enter the name of the setting selected in the Prompt field to use as the name ofthe linked field in Distributed Marketing.
b. Enter the text that is displayed in a help bubble if the field marketer selects theassociated help icon in Distributed Marketing.
c. Select desired interface in which the criteria value are input or selected inDistributed Marketing.
The following types are available:
• Edit Box
• Select One From Drop-Down List
• Select One using Radio Buttons
• Select Multiple From List
• Select Multiple Using Check Boxes
Version 8.5.0 113
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
6. Redefine the default value if it is not correct.
The default value of the user variable is specified in the Default Value field, if it isassigned to the variable.
If you do not select a user variable, Distributed Marketing uses the valuespecified in the Default Value field. If no default value is specified, then allpossible values are selected.
7. Click OK when finished.
Related Topics• About user variables for list selection flowcharts
• Process display settings and field marketer actions
NAA0001
Process display settings and field marketeractionsEach process in Campaign has its own group of settings to which you can provideaccess. The following table describes the possible actions a field marketer can take foreach selected setting.
Processes Display Settings Supported Field Marketer Actions
Select Query Expression Enables the user to edit the requestused by the process.
Export Cell Size LimitEnables the user to set this limit
Cell Size Limit MethodNot supported
Cell Size Limit Random SeedNot supported
Result Cell Size(output)Displays the total number of customerswho meet the selection or export criteriain the Results tab.
Merge Cell Size Limit Enables the user to set a target countlimit.
Reference Result Cell Size(output)Displays the total number of customerswho meet the selection or export criteriain the Results tab.
Segment Mutually Exclusive Segments Not supported.
For each segment: See above. Query Expression is notsupported.
Cell Size Limit / Query Expression /Result Cell Size (output)
114 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About running flowcharts
Processes Display Settings Supported Field Marketer Actions
Sample Random Seed Enables the user to select records ran-domly.
Specify Size byEnables the user to specify the type of
For each sample: sample (percent or number of records).Cell Size Limit / Result Cell Size (out- See above.put)
Snapshot Export To Enables the user to save the extractionresult in a table or a file.
Output Export OperationIf the process is configured to export
Event Export Table/File Name data to a table or a file, you can viewthe file name and location, or let theDelimited fileuser specify her own name and location
Include Headers for the file.
Output File/Table Name Enables the user to include the columnheaders in the tables.
If the process is configured to exportdata to a table or a file, the name of theoutput file must be entered for thegenerated file to be attached to the listor campaign in Distributed Marketing.
Segment Mutually Exclusive Segments Not supported.
For each segment: See above. Query Expression is notsupported.
Cell Size Limit / Query Expression /Result Cell Size (output)
MailList Random Seed If the process is configured to export acontact list, the name of the export
CallList table/file must also be entered for thegenerated file to be attached to the On-demand Campaign in Distributed Mar-keting.
N9F0001
About running flowchartsRunning flowcharts for Corporate CampaignsFor Corporate Campaigns, the corporate marketer must run the list generation flowchartthrough a Flowchart Run task in the workflow. For fulfillment flowcharts, the corporatemarketer has the option of running the flowchart through Campaign.
Version 8.5.0 115
8 - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts for IBM Unica Distributed Marketing
Running flowcharts for On-demand Campaignsand ListsFor On-demand Campaigns or Lists, the field marketer schedules the flowcharts whenediting the On-demand Campaign or List workflow, or runs them directly via theGenerate List and Run Campaign links in the Summary tab of the On-demandCampaign or list in Affinium Campaign Collaborate.
A field marketer can also run the flowchart from the Summary tab of the On-demandCampaign or List, by clicking Run Campaign or Generate List respectively.
Field marketers typically do not work directly in Campaign.
Reviewing run historyYou can view the history of flowchart runs in the Analysis tab of the CorporateCampaign, On-demand Campaign, or List. In the Analysis tab, select Run History fromthe drop-down list in the upper-right corner.
For each run, the run history shows user variables, input and output parameters andcounts for the generated lists.
NAB0001
About attaching flowchart output files to On-demand CampaignsFor an On-demand Campaign, you can have flowchart output files attachedautomatically. To do so, follow these guidelines:
• Output files must be exported by the flowchart to a single folder on the Campaignserver under partitions/partition_x.
• You must expose the Output File output parameter to Distributed Marketing so thatthe system knows which file in the directory to attach to the List or On-demandCampaign.
• You must make flowchart attributes visible in Distributed Marketing
• You must specify the access mode and path between the Distributed Marketingserver and the Campaign server in the collaborate_config.xml file.
You can choose to retrieve files by:
• Accessing the Affinium Campaign folder (the default)
• FTP
• HTTP
• TFTP
Related Topics• To make flowchart attributes visible in Distributed Marketing
116 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N10452
9 Working with CorporateCampaigns
■ Working with Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns■ To view and edit the Summary page■ To modify the default contents of the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and
Corporate Campaigns pages■ To modify how Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns are
displayed■ To view specific Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns■ To open and edit a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign■ List, On-demand Campaign, and Corporate Campaign status■ To print a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign■ To export a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign■ To copy a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign■ About people and teams■ About attachments■ To post a message■ To delete Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns
NAC0001
Working with Lists, On-demand Campaigns,and Corporate Campaigns
This section contains common information on working with Lists, On-demandCampaigns, and Corporate Campaigns. The content in this section applies to each ofthese objects, as the instructions are the same. For example, you delete a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign in the same way; therefore information ondeleting these objects is presented together.
Where necessary, differences between Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and CorporateCampaigns are noted.
Version 8.5.0 117
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
You may not have the necessary permissions to perform all tasks described in thissection, or you may have permissions to perform the task on some objects, but notothers. For example, field marketers can typically make changes to Lists and On-demand Campaigns, but can only view Corporate Campaigns. For more information,see your administrator.
NAD0001
To view and edit the Summary pageYou can edit some, but not all, data on the Summary page for a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign to view the Summarypage.
2. Click the Edit icon ( ).
Certain fields in the Summary page become editable. For example, fields that youcan typically edit are:
• Name
• Description
• Security Policy
• Target Start and Target End dates
• Other custom attributes created by your administrator
Typically, you cannot edit campaign codes or List Review data.
3. Edit data as necessary.
4. Click Save Changes.
The Edit Summary page closes, and the changes you made are reflected in theSummary page.
NAE0001
To modify the default contents of the Lists,On-demand Campaigns, and CorporateCampaigns pages
When you select Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns from theLocal Marketing menu, a page opens listing those objects.
You can change which Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns aredisplayed by default, as well as the columns included in the page.
118 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To modify how Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns are displayed
1. While viewing the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns page,
click the Options icon ( ).
The Options dialog box opens.
2. In the Default drop-down list, select the set of Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns that you want shown by default when you open that page.
3. Determine which columns to show by selecting columns from the AvailableColumns list and Selected Columns list and using the horizontal arrow keys tomove columns between lists.
Continue until the columns you want to display are all in the Selected Columns list.
4. Determine the order of columns by selecting columns in the Selected Columns listand using the vertical arrow keys to move columns up and down.
Continue until the columns are in the desired order.
5. Click Save Changes.
The Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns page changes to reflectyour selections. These changes remain in effect when you view the page later.
NAF0001
To modify how Lists, On-demandCampaigns, and Corporate Campaigns aredisplayed
When you select Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns from theNavigation pane, a page opens listing those objects. The exact content of this pagedepends on settings defined by your administrator.
You can change how Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns aredisplayed in a multiple ways.
1. To change how objects are displayed, click the View icon ( ).
The Set View Options dialog box opens.
You can select:
• Timeline, to show the objects in a table format.
• Text Calendar, to show the objects as text entries in the calendar.
• Graphical Calendar, to show the objects as graphics in the calendar.
You also select the time period and color coding.
To return to the table view, click the object name in the Navigation pane.
2. To sort the objects when viewing as a table, click the name of the column to sort by.You can click the name again to switch between ascending and descending order.
Version 8.5.0 119
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
The number of objects may be too high for a single screen. If there are multiplescreens, you can click the screen number to view at the bottom of the table to see otherobjects, or you can click Show All to fit all objects in one screen.
Related Topics• To view specific Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns
NB00001
To view specific Lists, On-demandCampaigns, or Corporate Campaigns
When you select Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns from theLocal Marketing, a page opens listing those objects. The exact content of this pagedepends on settings defined by your administrator.
You can change which Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns aredisplayed in multiple ways.
1. To view all objects, click All ... at the top of the page.
All objects are displayed, as well as various filters for the display, for example, LastWeeks ..., My ..., and Completed .... You can click on a filter name to see onlyobjects that meet that criteria.
2. To view objects that meet certain criteria, click the Filter icon ( ).
The Search for dialog box opens.
3. Fill in the search criteria you need, then click Apply.
Related Topics• To modify how Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns are displayed
NB10001
To open and edit a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign
You must have the required permissions to open and edit a List, On-demand Campaign,or Corporate Campaign. See your administrator for more information.
You can open a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign from theDashboard, or from the page listing that object.
Once you open a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can edit anyof its tabs.
1. Click the name of the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
The Summary tab for that object opens.
2. Click the name of the tab you want to edit, or remain on the Summary tab to edit it.
120 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
List, On-demand Campaign, and Corporate Campaign status
For example, if you need to edit the Workflow, you must open the Workflow tabbefore you click Edit.
3. Near the top of the page, next to the object's name, click the Edit icon ( ).
4. Edit the contents of the tab as necessary.
5. Click Save Changes.
Edits you made to the tab are saved.NB20001
List, On-demand Campaign, and CorporateCampaign status
A List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign is in one of the following states:
• Not Started
• In Progress
• Paused
• Cancelled
• Finished
Simple Lists begin in the In Progress state.
Advanced Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns, whether recurringor not, begin in the Not Started state.
NBA0001
To change the Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaign statusThe status of the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign is shown in theHome page, the pages listing these objects, and in the Summary page. To change thestatus, you must be viewing the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate CampaignSummary page.
1. View the Summary page for the List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign.
2. Click the Status icon ( ).
3. From the drop-down list, select the status to change to.
A dialog box prompts you to add comments about the status change.
4. Add a comment and click Continue to close the dialog box.
The status of the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign changes to yourselection.
Version 8.5.0 121
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
Related Topics• To view and edit the Summary page
• List, On-demand Campaign, and Corporate Campaign status
NB30001
To print a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign
When viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can print iton your local printer.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Print icon ( ), and select Print.
The Print dialog box opens.
3. Complete the Print dialog box as needed.NB40001
To export a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign
When viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can export itto a Microsoft Excel file.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Print icon ( ), and select Export.
The File Download dialog box opens.
3. Click Open to open the Microsoft Excel file directly, or Save to save it to yourcomputer.
If you choose to save it, you are prompted for the location on your computer.NB50001
To copy a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign
When viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can copy it tocreate a new one with the same settings.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Copy icon ( ).
122 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About people and teams
You are prompted to confirm the copy.
3. Click OK.
The Summary page for the new List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign opens. The name of the new object is Copy of existing objectname .
4. Edit information in the Summary page as needed.
5. Click Save Changes.
The object closes.
6. To edit other pages in the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign,open and edit the object.
Related Topics• To open and edit a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign
NB60001
About people and teams■ About people■ About the People tab■ To manage Corporate Campaign members■ To select team members for a Corporate Campaign■ To edit Corporate Campaign member access levels■ To assign work by role
NB60009
About peopleYou assign people to units of work. You do this primarily through the People tab of aList, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
You may see only a subset of the people available. Your organization can limit theview of available resources.
Related Topics• About the People tab
N3D0001
About the People tabEach Corporate Campaign contains its own People tab. Use this screen to do thefollowing.
• Manage the members of a Corporate Campaign.
• Edit a member's access level.
Version 8.5.0 123
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
• Replace a person in a role when a user becomes unavailable.
• Add or remove a role.
A Corporate Campaign template can contain information about the functional roles forthe project. A template can reduce some of the work necessary to assign people orteams to units of work within the Corporate Campaign.
By default, the People tab is available only for Corporate Campaigns. Forinformation on making it available for Lists or On-demand Campaigns, see theDistributed Marketing Administrator's Guide.
N3E0001
To manage Corporate Campaign members1. Navigate to the People tab of the Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
3. Do one of the following.
a. To add a person, select the name from the left pane of the dialog, and click >>.
b. To remove a person, select the name in the Select Team Members list box andclick <<.
c. To change the role for a person, select the name in the Select Team Memberslist box and use the Up and Down buttons to move them to the required role.
Note that you cannot remove a user assigned to a task.
4. Click Save Changes.
The Select Team Members dialog box closes. The People tab becomes the activewindow.
The changes you have made are reflected in the list of people and roles. For example, ifyou added a creative lead, the screen would contain a line similar to the following.
Member/Access Level Role Email Address
P Picasso (participant) Creative Lead [email protected]
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N3F0001
To select team members for a CorporateCampaignYou can select other Distributed Marketing users to participate in the CorporateCampaign. You can assign participants as individuals, or by role. When you assignparticipants by role, you can assign an entire group of field marketers to participate in aCorporate Campaign at once.
124
About people and teams
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
4. To assign team members by role:
a. In the upper-left of the dialog box, click Roles.
b. Select roles to assign to the Corporate Campaign from the list on the left.
c. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected roles to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
5. To assign individual users:
a. In the upper-left of the dialog box, click Folders.
b. Expand the folder entries and select individuals to assign to the CorporateCampaign from the list on the left.
c. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected users to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
6. Click Save Changes.
You can now assign work for the Corporate Campaign by role.
Related Topics• To assign work by role
N410001
To edit Corporate Campaign member accesslevelsYou can control the access level other Distributed Marketing users have to theCorporate Campaign. You can specify whether users are Owners or Participants of theCorporate Campaign. The specific privileges of Owners and Participants are determinedby the user permissions defined by the Distributed Marketing administrator.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Edit Member/Role Settings icon ( ).
The Select Team Members dialog box opens.
4. To add users:
a. Expand the folder entries and select individuals to assign to the CorporateCampaign from the list on the left.
Version 8.5.0 125
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
b. Click the right-pointing arrow button to move the selected users to the SelectedTeam Members list on the right.
5. To make a user an owner of the Corporate Campaign:
a. In the Selected Team Members list, select the user.
b. Click Up.
Repeat this step until the user appears under Owner in the list.
6. To make a user a participant in the Corporate Campaign:
a. In the Selected Team Members list, select the user.
b. Click Down.
Repeat this step until the user appears under Participant in the list.
7. Click Save Changes.N400001
To assign work by roleBefore completing this task, you should select team members for the CorporateCampaign.
1. Open the Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the People tab.
3. Click the Assign Work by Role icon( ).
A dialog box opens asking how you want to assign work. You can chose to:
• Add the new user to any existing users assigned to the task
• Replace any existing assigned users with the new user.
4. Select append the new user to add the new user to any existing users assigned tothe task, or select replace the existing assignment to replace any existingassigned users with the new user.
5. Click Apply.
Users are assigned to tasks as you specified.
6. Click Close.
Related Topics• To select team members for a Corporate Campaign
NB70001
126 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About attachments
About attachmentsYou can include attachments with a List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign. These attachments provide information that is relevant to the campaign orList.
For example, corporate or field marketers may include the following as attachments:
• Marketing messages for the initiative, including content for a mail campaign
• Data, such as customer names, generated after running a List or On-demandCampaign
A List or On-demand Campaign owner or participant can include attachments only if thecorporate template developers include the Attachments tab in the List or On-demandCampaign templates.
If the template developer includes attachments in the On-demand Campaign templates,field marketers or corporate marketers can use the attachments to help fulfillcampaigns.
Corporate marketers can also add attachments to an On-demand Campaign when theAttachments tab is available through the On-demand Campaign template.
NBD0001
To add an attachment to a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate CampaignIf the template designer has allowed it, when viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign, you can add an file as an attachment.
The file you add can come from your computer, or a URL.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the Attachments page.
3. Click the Add Attachments icon ( ).
4. In the File to Attach field, select From My Computer or URL.
5. In the field to the right, enter the path to the file.
If you selected From My Computer, you can click Browse to visually find the file onyour computer.
6. Optionally, add notes about the attachment.
7. Click Save Changes.
The file is attached to the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.NBE0001
Version 8.5.0 127
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
To remove an attachment from a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Open the Attachments page.
3. In the row for the attachment to remove, click Remove.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
4. Click OK.
The file is no longer attached to the List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign.
NB80001
To post a messageWhen viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can post amessage. This message is associated with the List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign only. You have the option of having these messages sent to otherDistributed Marketing users. You may need to post messages to convey to othersworking on the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign to convey importantinformation about the project.
These messages are separate from alerts. An alert is created when you create amessage, but the alert does not contain the content of your message.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. While viewing any page of the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign,
click the Communicate icon ( ), then select Post a Message.
The Messages dialog box opens.
3. Enter your message in the message field.
4. Select the delivery option.
5. Click Post Message.
The message is then associated with the List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign. If indicated, it is also e-mailed to users.
For those working with the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, the
number next to the Communicate icon ( ), indicating that the new message isthere.
Related Topics• To read messages
NBF0001
128 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
To delete Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns
To read messagesOther Distributed Marketing users may attach messages to a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign in order to pass on important information to otherteam members. When you view the List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign, you can view these messages.
These messages may also have been e-mailed to you, if the other users chose thisoption.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
The number of messages associated with the List, On-demand Campaign, or
Corporate Campaign is indicated next to the Communicate icon ( ). In thisexample, there is one message to read.
2. Click , then select Read Messages.
The Messages dialog box opens, listing the messages associated with the List On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
You can post a new message from this dialog box.
3. Click Close when finished.
Related Topics• To post a message
NB90001
To delete Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns
You must have the required permissions to delete a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign. Typically, field marketers cannot delete Corporate Campaigns.See your administrator for more information.
1. From the Local Marketing menu, click Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns.
The page listing that object type opens.
To complete this task, you must view the objects in the Timeline view.
2. Check the field next to the name of one or more List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign you want to delete.
You can also check the field next to the Name column header at the top of the tableto select all currently displayed objects.
Version 8.5.0 129
9 - Working with Corporate Campaigns
Checking this field selects only those object currently displayed on screen. If thelist of objects spans multiple pages, those objects on other pages are notselected.
3. Click the Delete icon ( ).
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
4. Click OK.
The selected objects are deleted.NC00001
To delete a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate CampaignYou must have the required permissions to delete a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign. Typically, field marketers cannot delete Corporate Campaigns.See your administrator for more information.
While viewing a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign, you can delete it.
You can also delete multiple Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or CorporateCampaigns from the pages listing each of these objects.
1. Open the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
2. Click the Delete icon ( ).
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to delete the object.
The List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign is deleted.
130 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N104FF
10 Alerts
■ Alerts■ To subscribe to alerts for an object■ Viewing alerts
NC10001
AlertsYou can use alerts to communicate information to specific people about the state of anobject or about an action that the user needs to take. Default alert subscriptions are setby administrators, but can be overridden on a per-object basis by owners andparticipants of the specific objects.
Related Topics• To subscribe to alerts for an object
NC20001
To subscribe to alerts for an objectYou can override default settings within a List, On-demand Campaign, or CorporateCampaign even if you are not an administrator, which allows you to control the alertsthat each object owner and participant receives. However, if there are permissionsconfigured for any of the tabs of a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign,the system filters alerts appropriately.
1. Open the object for which you want to change alert subscriptions.
2. Click the Communicate icon ( ) and select Subscribe to Alerts from the dropdown list.
3. From the list of alerts, select the checkboxes that correspond to the alert that youwant to change. You can set or clear alert subscriptions for each type of user,Owner, Participant, and so on. The possible entries are as follows:
• Checkmark: indicates the user will receive the alert or alarm
• Blank: indicates the user will not receive the alert or alarm
• n/a: indicates you did not specify users for this access level when you createdthe object. Once you add a users with the corresponding access level, you canset alerts for that access level.
Version 8.5.0 131
10 - Alerts
4. Click Accept to save your changes or Cancel to leave the alert settings as theywere.
NC30001
Viewing alertsWhen you receive an alert, go to the Alerts page to view it. Alerts are also sent toaffected users' e-mail addresses (for each user that has a valid e-mail address set up).
To view alerts, log in and click the Alerts icon ( ). Clicking on, or scrolling over thealerts icon shows a drop down menu seperating the alerts for your installedapplications. The number of alerts appears to the left of each application name. Onceyou choose which application's alerts to view, the page displays the followinginformation:
Column Description
Page heading Contains the number of unread alerts (which appears in parentheses) and thetotal number of alerts
Check box Each alert contains a check box; use check boxes to select alerts for a specificaction (for example to mark a group of alerts for deletion).
Check the box in the first line (next to the Message Text label) to select all thealerts.
Message text Displays the text of the alert.
Date/Time Displays the time of the event that triggered the alert.
You can perform the following actions from the page.
Link/Button Description
Select the yellow envelope icon next to an alert to mark the alert as read.
After you click the icon, the alert is grayed out. Reselect the icon to mark the alertas unread.
Alert title Click the link in the alert to go to the object that is the subject of the alert.
The Alerts page remains open while you view the information in a separatewindow.
Pages Click a page number to list the corresponding page of alerts.
Delete Selected Click to delete the selected alerts.
Delete All Click to delete all of your alerts.
132 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Viewing alerts
Link/Button Description
Mark All as Read Click to mark all your alerts as read, graying out each alert. A confirmation screenappears to ensure you wish to mark all alerts as read.
Mark All as Unread If you have no unread alerts, click this link to mark all your alerts as unread.
Close Click to close the Alerts page.
Version 8.5.0 133
N10514
11 Templates
■ About templates■ About template components■ About creating templates
NC60001
About templatesA template is a definition of a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign thatcorporate and field marketers use to create new objects.
As an administrator, you create templates and specify various parts of the object. Forexample, among the many settings you determine for a Corporate Campaign templateare:
• The associated flowchart in Campaign
• Team members
• Workflow
• Custom tabs
All Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and Corporate Campaigns are based on a templateyou create, and the object inherits all settings from the template. Corporate or fieldmarketers can change the object's settings as needed.
Why use templates?Templates are the required building blocks for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, andCorporate Campaigns. Users cannot create these objects without templates.
By using templates, you help users save time because they do not have to configureobjects from the beginning; they only need to change settings that are specific to theList or campaign.
For example, if your organization is running multiple Corporate Campaigns that havethe same team members and workflow, you can create a template with the right settingsfor the team and workflow. Corporate marketers then create the Corporate Campaignsbased on this template, and do not have to configure the team members or workflow.
NC70001
134 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About template components
About template componentsTemplates are made up of other components that you, as the administrator, create andmanage.
Specifically, templates can include the following:
Component Description
Tabs Individual screens for the campaign. Tabs contain one or more forms.
Forms Sub-section of a tab, containing fields.
Field Data element contained within a form. Each field has a specific format; somefields, for example contain text, and others contain a set of radio buttons. You canplace fields into groups, and display them in either a 1- or 2-column layout.
Data mapping Mappings of data between Distributed Marketing and Campaign.
Icons Small images representing the object within the Distributed Marketing userinterface.
Attachments Files or folders appearing on the Attachment tab of the List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign.
Custom links Hypertext links appearing on selected tabs.
Workflow The set of stages and tasks appearing in the project's workflow tab.
NC80001
About creating templatesYou create a template by assembling existing components. Therefore, as you set upyour system, you must create the other components before you can create templates.
Planning your templatesBefore you begin building templates, you must analyze your organization's needs, thendecide on the templates you need.
For example, your organization might run three very different types of On-demandCampaigns, with different target selection criteria and different workflows. You mostlikely need three different templates for these On-demand Campaigns.
In addition to planning the number and types of templates, you must plan for the typesof objects you need in those templates. For example, the three On-demand Campaigntemplates you need can share the same Summary form, but require different SelectionCriteria forms and Workflows.
Version 8.5.0 135
11 - Templates
Planning template contentsOnce you have planned the types of templates you need, you must determine thecontents of those templates; that is, you must decide which fields to include, and how toorganize those fields.
You should capture this information on paper or in a spreadsheet, then use the FormsEditor to define the tabs and fields you need.
For example, you might determine that an On-demand Campaign template must includea field for the business unit that requests the campaign. You could list the requirementsfor this field as follows:
Field Attribute Value
Internal Name Business Unit
Display Name Business Unit
Tab/grouping In the Summary tab under the Collateral RequestInfo section
Input field type Single-Select
Possible values or database table to retrieve Retail Banking, Investment Services, Insurance,values from Credit Card Brochure, Postcard, DataSheet, Intro
Folder, White Paper, Print Ad, or a table name orcolumn name where Distributed Marketing shouldlook up these values.
Required field/error message if missing Business Unit is a required field.
Help Tip Enter the business unit requesting this collateralpiece.
As a best practice, create a similar table for each field you require, before you begincreating fields and tabs in the Forms Editor.
Before creating templatesTemplates depend on the existence of other, lower-level components. Therefore, youmust set up the following objects before you set up templates:
1. Forms
2. Icons
3. Data Mapping
4. Workflows
5. Roles
136 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N10529
12 Working with Templates
■ Template Configuration page■ Templates Definition page■ To build a template■ To edit a template■ Template Properties tab■ Template People tab■ Template Recurrence tab■ Template Workflow tab■ Template Campaign tab■ Template Tabs tab■ Template Attachments tab■ Template Custom Links tab■ Workflow templates page■ Data Mapping Definitions page■ Icons page■ About importing and exporting templates■ About template validation
NC90001
Template Configuration pageUse the Template Configuration page to create and manage templates and templatecomponents. To display the page, select Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.Then click Template Configuration.
The items and functions available are organized into two sections, TemplateConfiguration and Template Components. There is also a button to validate alltemplates.
Validating templatesYou can click Validate Templates to run a utility that validates templates and forms anddisplays any validation errors.
Version 8.5.0 137
12 - Working with Templates
Template Configuration sectionThe template configuration section of the page contains the link Templates, whichopens a page that lists all the existing templates and template folders. You use the linkson that page to create, delete, and organize templates.
Template Components sectionThe template components section of the page contains the following links.
Link Description
Forms Opens a list of the forms and displays the following information:
• File names of the forms definition file• List of templates that use the form
Click the Add icon( ) to add a new form.
Workflow Opens a list of the workflow templates and displays the following information.
• Name• The number of stages and tasks in the workflow template• When it was first created and last modified• Whether it is enabled or disabled
You create workflow templates from the Workflow tab of a List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign template or instance. You can use thelinks on this list page to delete, enable/disable, import, or export a workflowtemplate.
Data Mapping Opens a list of data maps and displays the following information.
• Data mapping file names• Type; Campaign data• List of templates that use the mapping.
• Click the Add icon( ) to add a new data mapping.
Icons Opens a list of icons and displays the following information.
• Icon images; large and small• Icon name• List of templates that use the icon• Delete link for deleting the icon (does not delete the file from its location
on disk)
Click the Add icon ( ) to add a new icon.
NCA0001
138 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Templates Definition page
Templates Definition pageUse the links and commands on the Templates Definition page to work with templates.
From this page, you can perform the following actions:
Action Description
Edit Click the template name to edit the template.
Enable or disable Click the link to toggle the state of the template, from Enabled to Disabledand back.
When a template is enabled, you can use it to create an object.
Delete Click to delete a template from the system. The link is only available fortemplates that do not have any objects created from them.
AddClick the Add icon ( ) to add a new template. From the icon's drop-downlist, select the type of object for which you want to create the template.
Open folder Click the folder name to open the folder.
Jump to Folder Click Jump to Folder to navigate to and open another template folder.
Move itemsSelect the items to move, then click the Move Items icon ( ) to display ascreen where you can choose a new folder for selected items.
Add folderClick the Add Folder icon ( ) to create a new template folder.
NCB0001
To build a templateBefore you create templates for Lists, On-demand Campaigns, and CorporateCampaigns, determine whether you must add custom tabs. If you do, see the chapteron the Forms Editor and use the procedures in that chapter to create forms for customtabs.
When the template components you need are available, create a new template andassemble the pieces. The steps to create a template are generally the same for eachobject type.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing Settings.
The Administrative Settings screen opens.
2. Click Templates.
The Template Configuration Screen opens
Version 8.5.0 139
12 - Working with Templates
3. Click the Add icon ( ).
4. From the icon's drop-down list, select the type of object for which you want to createa template.
5. Use the information provided in the rest of this chapter to determine how to fill outeach of the tabs for this template.
When assembling a template, click Save Changes when you have finishedediting a tab, before navigating to another tab in the template. Otherwise, yourchanges are not saved.
NDA0001
Effects of template changesWhen editing a template, be aware you are changing all instances of objects previouslycreated from the template.
The exceptions are workflow, people, or an attachment. When you change the workflowtemplate, add or remove roles, or add or remove an attachment, your changes applyonly to objects you create after the changes are made. Existing workflows are notchanged, nor are roles or attachments for any existing Lists, On-demand Campaigns, orCorporate Campaigns.
NDB0001
About template foldersYou can create folders for templates in the Templates Definition screen.
You can move templates to any existing folders.NCC0001
To edit a templateTemplate editing is spread across the following tabs. Depending on the object type, onlya subset of these tabs may be available.
• Properties: basic template properties, such as name and description.
• People: roles definition.
• Campaign: IBM Unica Campaign integration settings (Corporate Campaigntemplates only)
• Recurrence: recurrence settings.
• Workflow: workflow settings (not available for simple Lists).
• Tabs: Tab definitions; add additional forms and custom tabs.
• Attachments: files attached by default to all objects created from the template.
• Custom Links: custom links to programs, web pages, etc.
1. Click Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.
140 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Template Properties tab
2. In the Administrative Settings screen, select Template Configuration (locatedunder Other Options).
3. Select Templates.
4. Select the name of the template you want to edit.
The Properties tab of the selected template appears. You can edit fields on any ofthe object templates tabs; click a tab in the menu bar to navigate to it.
5. Click Save Changes to save any changes you made to the template.NCD0001
Template Properties tabFor all objects, the templates Properties tab contains the following settings.
Property Description
Name The template’s display name, used in the Templates list page.
Description Short description of the template that displays on the template selector page whenadding a new List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
Icon Large and small icon images for the template. The large icon is displayed whenyou create a new object based on this template. The small icon is displayed nextto the icon name in the list page.
Security Policies List of security policies that determine which users have access to the template.
Template ID Internal name for the template. Avoid spaces and special characters.
Note the following.
• Template IDs must be unique across Distributed Marketing.Additionally, once you use a template ID, you cannot use it again, even if youdelete it.
• Once created, you can edit this field only if no objects have been createdbased on this template.
Default Name The default name given to an object (project, marketing object, etc.) created usingthis template.
You can leave this field blank if you wish.
Version 8.5.0 141
12 - Working with Templates
Property Description
ID Prefix Prefix for the object’s external ID. Each List, On-demand Campaign, andCorporate Campaign has an external ID assigned to it. For example, you couldenter an ID Prefix of TRS for the Tradeshow On-demand Campaign template. Thefirst tradeshow On-demand Campaign you create would then have an ID ofTRS1001.
You can set the ID prefix by template, to easily determine the template on whichan object is based.
ID Generation Java class to specify a numbering algorithm for objects. By default, DistributedClass Marketing assigns a sequential number to each object.
However, you can configure Distributed Marketing to use an algorithm defined byyou to set the external ID. If you choose to do this, the ID Generation Classspecifies the Java class used to generate the code. You must edit this attributeonly if you want to generate IDs according to an algorithm other than the default.
NCE0001
Template People tabYou use the People tab of a template to define roles that are added to Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns created from this template.
You must define list definitions for roles before adding roles to a template.
To add a role, select a role from the drop-down list. The available values are populatedfrom the list definitions.
To delete a role, click Remove next to the role you need to delete.NCF0001
Template Recurrence tabYou use this tab to establish properties for a recurring campaign. Recurring campaignsreference a basic workflow; you can set up recurrence properties to define how manytimes the basic workflow should recur.
Note that this tab appears in both templates and in the actual instance of a CorporateCampaign, On Demand Campaign, and List. When creating a template, you can accessthis tab only after you have created a Workflow template.
Depending on permissions, users can modify recurrence properties when they create oredit a Corporate Campaign, On-Demand Campaign, or List. If they do so, all tasks inthe workflow are replaced by new tasks, with dates that are calculated based on thenew recurrence properties.
The Recurrence tab contains the following settings:
142 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Template Recurrence tab
Property Description
Campaign Work- Specifies whether the workflow used by the Corporate Campaign, On-Demandflow Type Campaign, or List contains a recurring stage. Options are:
• Nonrecurring• Recurring
If you select Recurring, the properties on this tab are applied to the stage in theWorkflow that is marked for recurrence.
Note that Recurrence properties you set up here can apply to only a singlestage of a workflow.
Frequency Specifies the recurrence pattern. Options are:
Daily—Occurs on a daily basis. When you select Daily, you must specify thenumber of days between each occurrence of the workflow or workflow stage.
Weekly—Occurs on a weekly basis. When you select Weekly, you must specifythe number of weeks between each occurrence of the workflow or workflow stage.(To specify every other week, enter 2 for the number of weeks between eachoccurrence.) You must also specify the day or days of the week on which theoccurrence should take place.
Monthly—Occurs on a monthly basis. When you select Monthly, you must specifythe number of months between each occurrence of the workflow or workflowstage. You must also choose one of these options:
• Each date of month—Choose this option if you want the occurrence to takeplace on a specific date each month.
• Each day of week—Choose this option if you want to schedule the occurrenceto run on a specific day of a specific week each month. For instance, if youwant to run the campaign monthly, on the third Thursday of each month, youshould select this option.
Keep in mind that your calendar options apply to your recurrence schedule; thatis, the recurrence schedule is built using your settings for valid working days.
Ending Specifies the total number of occurrences of the workflow or workflow stage. Youcan also choose to specify a date by which the recurrence should end.
Permissions to Allows you to specify the recurrence options that can be changed in eachmodify the recur- Corporate Campaign, On-Demand Campaign, or List.rences in the in-
This field appears only in the Corporate Campaign, On Demand Campaign, or Liststancetemplate; it does not appear in the actual instance of the Corporate Campaign,On-Demand Campaign, or List. Options are:
• All options—Users can change all recurrence options.• No options—Users cannot change any recurrence options.• All options but frequency—Users can change all options except frequency.
ND00001
Version 8.5.0 143
12 - Working with Templates
Template Workflow tabThe Workflow tab of a template is similar to the workflow spreadsheet displayed in anindividual List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign. Use the Workflow tabto set up the stages, tasks, and so on that are common for all Lists, On-demandCampaigns, or Corporate Campaigns created from the template. Then, List, On-demandCampaign, or Corporate Campaign owners use the workflow spreadsheet to modify theworkflows as necessary for their projects.
Like the workflow spreadsheet, the template Workflow tab has two modes: view andedit. To edit the workflow displayed on the tab, click the Edit link.
You can save a workflow as a template from either the List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign template Workflow tab or from the workflow spreadsheet in anindividual List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign.
NDE0001
To create workflow templatesTo create workflow templates, you start by creating a List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign template. When you are finished configuring the workflow for thetemplate, you save the workflow as a template.
A workflow template retains the stage and task definitions.
1. Select the Workflow tab of the appropriate List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign template.
2. While the tab is still in view mode, click the Save as Template icon ( ).
3. Enter a descriptive name for the template and click Continue.
4. Click Save Changes.
The workflow is saved as a template in the template library.NDF0001
To use workflow templates1. Create the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign template as usual,
but skip setting up roles because they are imported with the workflow template.
2. Select the Workflow tab.
3. While the tab is still in view mode, click the Import Template icon ( ).
A warning appears stating that the import will overwrite the existing workflow.
4. Click OK.
A list of templates appears.
5. Select a template from the list and click Import.
144 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Template Campaign tab
The workflow appears in the tab and the roles referenced in the task and stage rowsare now listed on the People tab.
6. If you need to modify or add stages or tasks, click Edit.
Then customize the workflow as necessary for the project template. Remember tosave your changes.
7. When the workflow is complete, click Save and Finish to return to view mode.NE00001
To configure workflow for a templateTo configure the workflow for a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaigntemplate, you create the template, specify the roles, and then create the workflow.
1. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Under Templates, click the Add Template icon ( ).
4. Complete the fields in the Template Properties form and click Save changes.
5. Use the People tab to specify the roles of the participants and click Save changes.
6. Select the Workflow tab and click the Edit icon ( ).
7. Add the appropriate system and user tasks, and stages.
Remember to save frequently.
8. When the workflow is complete, click Save and Finish. The tab returns to viewmode.
9. Optionally, click the flowchart button to display the workflow as a process flowchart.ND10001
Template Campaign tabYou use this tab in a Corporate Campaign template to set up communication betweenDistributed Marketing and Campaign. This tab is not available for On-demandCampaigns and Lists.
It contains the following settings:
Version 8.5.0 145
12 - Working with Templates
Property Description
Campaign Service The URL used to start Campaign. For example:URL
http://engsvr1:9001/Campaign/services/CampaignServices
Distributed Marketing uses this value to access services provided by a Campaignserver when you create a linked campaign.
Enter a value here only if you are mapping data between DistributedMarketing and Campaign.
Campaign Data The XML file containing the data map for creating a Campaign campaign from aMapping Distributed Marketing object instance.
Options A single checkbox, Use Campaign Code Generated by Campaign. Check thisbox to force Campaign and Distributed Marketing campaign codes to match.
Partition ID The Partition ID identifies the partition of the Campaigninstance containing thelinked campaign.
The default value is partition1, which is correct if Campaign is installed to asingle partition. If Campaign is installed on multiple partitions, you can specify thepartition to use for creating campaigns.
If you leave this field blank, Distributed Marketing obtains the partition ID from thedefaultCampaignPartition parameter in collaborate_config.xml.
Folder ID The folder ID where data where Campaign stores campaigns created from withinDistributed Marketing.
This ID comes from the Campaign UA_Folder system table. You must set up thissystem table in Campaign before you define it here.
ND20001
Template Tabs tabUse this tab to add forms to the Summary tab and create custom tabs. For example,you could create a custom tab called Printing, where you want users to specifyinformation about the outside vendor that they plan to use to get the collateral printed.In this tab, you could add a drop-down list that allows users to select a printing companyfrom a list of several vendors. You could also add a text box that allows users to enterthe quoted price of each page of the collateral.
Tab Page StyleSelect summary to add additional forms to the bottom of the Summary tab. Typically,you select this option for forms containing a relatively small amount of data that youwant users to see on the Summary tab when they first open the object.
146 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Template Tabs tab
Click tab to specify that the tab’s contents should appear on a separate tab. Use thisoption for forms, or groups of forms, that require their own page, as in the Printing tabexample.
Tab VisibilityClick Show in Wizard to make the tab visible in the new object wizard in IBM UnicaDistributed Marketing. If you leave this unchecked, the tab does not display when youcreate a new object using the wizard, but appears once you save the object.
NE10001
To add a tab to a template1. Navigate to the template’s Tabs page.
2. Click the Add a Tab icon ( ).
3. Enter a descriptive name for the tab in the Name text box.
The name you choose becomes the name of the tab in objects created from thistemplate.
4. Choose whether to show the form on the Summary tab or its own custom tab.
5. Select a form from the Form pull-down list.
This list contains all the forms available in IBM Unica Distributed Marketing.
For List templates, forms of type Campaign are not listed.
6. Select the visibility options for the tab.
7. Click Save Changes to save the tab, or the Add a Tab icon ( ) to add anothertab.
NE20001
To move a tab or form on a template1. Navigate to the template’s Tabs tab.
2. Click one of the following buttons after Move:
• Down to move a tab down. Moving a summary tab down places it lower on theobject's Summary page. Moving a separate tab down places it further to theright in the tab list. For example, if the tab was fourth in the list, moving it downonce makes it fifth.
• Up to move a tab up. Moves it up or forward one position.
Summary tabs must come before non-summary tabs.
NE30001
Version 8.5.0 147
12 - Working with Templates
To delete a form or custom tab from a templateDeleting a form or custom tab from a template deletes it from all existing objectscreated from the template. Do not delete a form or custom tab from a template thathas already been used to create items. If you do, data will be lost.
1. Navigate to the template’s Tabs page.
2. Scroll to the section that defines the form or custom tab you want to remove andclick Delete (located on the right side of the page).
The form or custom tab is removed from the object template.
3. Click Save Changes.
Related Topics• About invalid forms
ND30001
Template Attachments tabYou can store attachments with a template, so that whenever an object is created fromthe template, certain images or documents are attached to the object by default.
Use this tab to perform the following actions.
• Add one or more attachment folders to organize attachments; use the Add a Folderlink.
• Attach one or more files to the template.
• Move folders up or down in the list; use the Up and Down links to reorderattachment folders.
• Delete default attachments; click the Delete link next to the file you want to remove.
• Delete folders; click the Delete link next to the folder you want to remove. Note thatall attachments under the folder are also deleted.
1. Navigate to a template's Attachments page.
2. Click the Add an Attachment link next to the folder to contain the asset.
The Upload Attachment dialog appears.
3. Enter the filename and path or use the Browse button to locate the attachment.
4. Click Save Changes to attach the file.
The attachment file appears in the list under its folder.
5. On the Attachments tab, click Save Changes to save the new default attachment.
Repeat the steps to add as many attachments as needed.ND40001
148 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Template Custom Links tab
Template Custom Links tabUse this tab to create custom links that appear on one or more tabs for the objectcreated from this template. For example, you may want to link to an application thatyour organization uses to generate ID codes for collateral pieces or direct marketingoffers.
When adding parameters, the screen contains a series of pull-down menus. Thechoices you make in one list determine the choices available from the subsequent list.This screen contains the following properties.
Property Description
Name Enter a name for the link. This value becomes the name of the link.
ID Enter the unique internal ID of the custom link.
Description Enter some descriptive text for the link This text is shown on the mousover for thelink.
URL Enter the URL to open when users click the link.
Click to add a new link; a new group of fields appears. To add the link, fill in theAdd a Custom Linkfields and click Save Changes.
icon ( )
Add Parameter Click to add a parameter to the custom link. Name and Value fields appear.Depending on your selections, new name/value field pairs appear.
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing looks for a question mark(?) at the end of theURL and places the parameters after the question mark. If it does not find aquestion mark, it appends one to the end of the URL and then adds theparameters.
Delete (link) Click to delete a custom link. This link appears next to the Add Parameter link forthe link that you are deleting.
Delete (parameter) Click to delete a parameter for a custom link. This link appears next parameteryou are deleting.
Up Down If you have more than one custom link, use the Up and Down links to reorder thecustom links.
ND50001
Workflow templates pageUse the Workflow templates page to import, export, delete, enable, or disableworkflow templates.
Version 8.5.0 149
12 - Working with Templates
To edit workflow templates, use the Workflow tab of a project template. That is, importthe workflow template into a project template, edit the workflow, and then re-save theworkflow template.
Workflow templates fields and functionsThe Workflow templates page lists all the workflow templates and presents thefollowing information and functions.
Item Description
Name The name of the workflow template.
Stages/Tasks The number of stages and tasks in the workflow, separated by a ‘/’ character. Forexample, this column’s value for a workflow that has 5 stages and 30 tasks is 5 /30.
Created Date The date the template was created.
Last Modified Date The date of the most recent change made to the template.
Status Whether the template is enabled or disabled. When a workflow template iscreated, its status is set to Enabled by default.
Export A link that enables you to export an individual workflow XML file. You can thenimport it into another IBM Unica Distributed Marketing system.
A link that enables you to import an individual workflow XML file, typically one thatImport icon ( ) was exported from another IBM Unica Distributed Marketing system.
A link that allows you to delete selected workflow templates.Delete icon ( )
Enable/Disable Marks the selected templates as enabled or disabled. A disabled workflowbutton template cannot be selected from a List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate
Campaign template.
NE50001
To export a workflow templateYou can export individual workflow templates. You may want to edit the exported XMLfile, then re-import the workflow template back into IBM Unica Distributed Marketing.
1. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Click Workflow.
4. Click the Export link for the workflow you want to export.
5. Choose a location to save the XML file, and save it.
150 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data Mapping Definitions page
6. Open the file with a text or XML editor, make your changes, then save the file.
7. Navigate back to the templates library (Settings > Distributed MarketingSettings).
8. Click the Import Workflow Template icon ( ) and browse to your edited XML file.
9. Name the file to differentiate it from the previous version.
For example, if you export Marketing Collateral, you could name your editedfile Marketing Collateral 2. (Note that you can always rename the file later.)
10. Create a new template and use the new workflow; or open an existing template andreplace the old workflow template with the new one.
ND60001
Data Mapping Definitions pageThe Data Mapping Definitions page allows you to map data between objects inDistributed Marketing and campaigns in Campaign. Use the Data Mapping link from theTemplate Configuration page to configure data mapping.
The Data Mapping Definitions page contains the following columns:
Column Description
Name The name of the data mapping file.
Type Campaign Data: maps Distributed Marketing attributes to Campaign attributes.
If you have map files from previous versions, you may see other values in theType column.
Used By A list of templates that use this data map.
You cannot create a map file within Distributed Marketing; use a text or XML editorto create and edit the necessary map files.
The Campaign Service URL field on the Campaign tab in a Corporate Campaigntemplate behaves as follows:
• If it is blank, data mapping does not occur.
• If it contains information, the value in the field is used to map data betweenDistributed Marketing and Campaign.
NE60001
To add a data mappingUse a text or XML editor to create or edit a data mapping file. After you have a datamapping file, you add it to Distributed Marketing using the following procedure.
1. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.
Version 8.5.0 151
12 - Working with Templates
2. Click Template Configuration > Data Mapping.
3. Click the Add a data mapping icon ( ).
The Upload Data Mapping dialog box appears.
4. Enter a name.
This is the display name for the data mapping file.
5. Browse to the XML file that defines the data mapping.
6. Click Continue.NE70001
To edit a data mappingIf you want to update a data mapping file, you must first edit the XML file, and then re-load it back into Distributed Marketing.
1. Open the data mapping XML file in a text editor and make your changes.
2. Select Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings.
3. Click Template Configuration > Data Mapping.
4. Click the file name you are updating.
The Update Data Mapping dialog box appears.
5. Select File, and browse to the XML file.
6. Click Continue.
You will be prompted to overwrite the existing file.
7. Click:
• Save to overwrite the existing file with the newer version, or
• Cancel to leave the previous version of the file.ND70001
Icons pageThe Icons page allows you to view and add icon files. These icons are displayed invarious sections of Distributed Marketing, and for object templates you choose.
Use the Icons link from the Template Configuration page to manage icons used inobject templates.
The Icons page contains the following columns:
Column Description
Image files A large and small image for each icon. Click the images to change the icon nameor the image files.
152 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Icons page
Column Description
Name The name of icon.
Used By A list of object templates that use this icon.
Delete A link to delete the form. This link is only available for icons that are not used inany templates.
When you specify icons, specify two image files for each icon:
• Main icon: the large image is displayed when a file of this type is presented in thesystem. For example, the main icon is shown in the List, On-demand Campaign, orCorporate Campaign selector (the dialog box that appears when you create a List,On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign; you select from a list of templates).
• List icon: the small image appears on the object list page. For example, the List,On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign list page contains the list icons forall List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign on the page.
NE80001
To add or edit an icon1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Click Icons.
The Icons list page appears.
4. Click:
• The Add an Icon icon ( at the top right section of the page, to add an icon,or
• An icon image (large or small) to edit an icon.
The Update Icon dialog appears.
5. Type or edit the name of the icon.
If you are updating an existing icon's name only, do not check the box next tothe File or List Icon Image File labels and skip step 6. If you want to updateeither image, check the box corresponding box and continue to step 6.
6. Enter file names for the icon images:
• Navigate to a main image file using the Browse button of the File field to add orchange the main image.
• Navigate to a list image file using the Browse button of the List Icon Image Filefield to add or change the list image.
Version 8.5.0 153
12 - Working with Templates
Distributed Marketing is installed with a set of default icons; you can choosefrom these icons, or add icons customized for your organization. File imageshave a maximum size of 46 x 54 pixels. List icon images a maximum size of 20x 24 pixels.
7. Click Continue to load the files into Distributed Marketing, or Cancel to abort theupload:
8. Click Save Changes to confirm the upload, or Cancel to abort the upload.
The new or edited icon appears in the list.ND80001
About importing and exporting templatesThe template import/export functionality allows you to:
• Export templates into a self-contained archive, and
• Import templates that have previously been exported or saved to a self-containedarchive.
Specifically, the export command downloads a ZIP archive to the your computer; importuploads a ZIP archive to the Distributed Marketing server.
You can use the import and export commands to create a portable archive. Forexample, you can export all of your templates from a test server after you have verifiedthey work correctly, then import them to a production server.
NE90001
To import templatesYou can use the import button to import workflow templates that were created in thesame version of Distributed Marketing that you are using. To import templates from anearlier version of Distributed Marketing, you must upgrade.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing Settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Click the Import icon ( ).
The Import Templates dialog appears.
4. Enter the path name of the template archive you are importing, or navigate to itusing the Browse button.
5. In the Update Database section, choose which database scripts to run:
• Drop Lookup Tables
• Create/Update Lookup Tables
Checking all the boxes will fully import the template. However, you will losewhatever data you had if you are re-importing some templates.
154 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About importing and exporting templates
If you are concerned about overwriting data, you can examine the SQL scriptfiles in the template archive to see the details, and create the necessary tablesand columns manually.
6. Click Continue to import the selected template(s).
A summary page appears, detailing templates being imported, and any warningsabout current template files that will be overwritten.
7. Click:
• Save Changes to import the templates, or
• Cancel to abort the import, and avoid overwriting any existing templates.
The system reads the template files and analyzes them, and reports any errors.Imported templates are saved to the template database, then all available templatesare reloaded from the database.
The archives containing the example templates are located in the\tools\admin\ folder under your Distributed Marketing installation. Use thearchive for your database type. (For example, use sample_templatesDB2 ifyou are using a DB2 database.)
NEA0001
About exporting templatesIf you have created or edited a group of templates on a development or test DistributedMarketing server, you could export them, and then import them to a production server.
The template export feature in Distributed Marketing allows you to export a group oftemplates or a single template. In either case, the system creates a self-contained ZIParchive; you can use this archive to import the templates to another DistributedMarketing server.
Export creates separate SQL scripts. This gives you more control over updating yourdatabase to work with the new templates when you import them. For example, if youneed to add a column here or there, you can run only the create/alter scripts, so as notto needlessly delete tables and existing data.
The system generates the following script files (to use when you import the templatearchive)
File Description
createlkup.sql Adds columns to existing lookup tables, and creates new lookup tables needed forthe templates.
droplkup.sql Deletes existing lookup tables used by the templates. If you do not mind possiblydeleting data, you run this script before createlkup.sql to ensure the database isset up correctly.
Version 8.5.0 155
12 - Working with Templates
File Description
insertlkup.sql Inserts data into the lookup tables. This makes it possible to save complete lookuptables (schema plus data) with the template archive.
NEB0001
To export a group of templates1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing Settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Click the Export icon ( ).
The Export Templates dialog appears.
4. Select the Database Type from the pull-down list.
This determines the format of the SQL script files generated with the exportedtemplates.
5. Click:
• Continue to export the templates, or
• Cancel to abort the export; skip the remainder of the instructions.
6. Click Open or Save from the File Download dialog that appears.
The system creates a ZIP archive containing the template and SQL script files.NEC0001
To export a single template1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing Settings.
2. Click Template Configuration.
3. Click Templates.
4. Click the name of the template to export.
The template’s Properties page appears.
5. Click the Export icon ( ).
6. From the Export Template dialog, select the Database Type from the pull-down list.
This determines the format of the SQL script files generated with the exportedtemplate.
7. Click:
• Continue to export the template, or
• Cancel to abort the export; skip the remainder of the instructions.
8. Click Open or Save from the File Download dialog that appears.
156 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About template validation
The system creates a ZIP archive containing the template and SQL script files.Open or extract the ZIP file to view the SQL scripts.file.
ND90001
About template validationYou can perform two types of template validation:
• Database validation
• Attributes validation
You can perform validation at any time by clicking the Validate Templates link on theTemplates Configuration page. Additionally, the system performs certain validationautomatically as described in the following sections.
NED0001
About database validationDatabase validation checks:
• The validity of the database schema, and
• Whether form attributes match their data type in the database.
Notes about database validation:
• The system performs this type of validation on import, upgrade, and export oftemplates. For export, only forms not linked to any template are validated.
• On import and upgrade, you can save templates even if invalid. You will receivewarnings, but can still save.
• When adding a form, you cannot save the form if validation finds any errors.NEE0001
About attribute validationTemplates attributes type validation checks whether two form columns from twotemplates point to same table column but with different type (for example, one has atype of select and the other is multi-select).
If two or more form attributes with different types point to the same table column, thesystem generates an error describing the inconsistency.
Version 8.5.0 157
N1060F
13 FormEditor
■ About the Form Editor■ How forms and Campaign flowcharts relate■ Adding a form generated from Campaign■ About invalid forms■ Form Definitions page■ About Run History series■ About merging forms■ To change values displayed in forms■ Form status■ Form Editor page
NEF0001
About the Form EditorYou use the Form Editor to create and edit template components. Forms captureinformation about the List, On-demand Campaign, or Corporate Campaign. Forms arealso the way a field marketer provides input to Campaign flowcharts.
Forms and attributesForms are collections of attributes. Attributes are used to collect data about Lists, On-demand Campaigns, or Corporate Campaigns.
Forms define how the attributes are displayed for input by field marketers or corporatemarketers, and how the supplied values are stored in a database.
Forms and Campaign flowchartsWhen a flowchart is published in Campaign, an associated form is automatically createdin Distributed Marketing.
NF00001
How forms and Campaign flowcharts relateWhen a flowchart is published in Campaign, an associated form is automatically createdin Distributed Marketing. You use this form to capture and send information fromDistributed Marketing to Campaign.
By using the form in this way, you give field marketers control over certain aspects ofOn-demand Campaigns and Lists.
158 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Adding a form generated from Campaign
The administrator does this by exposing parameters in Campaign, publishing theflowchart, and then working with the automatically created form in Distributed Marketing.
Campaign tasksIn Campaign, you must create flowcharts, expose parameters, and publish theflowcharts. The typical workflow is as follows:
1. Create an input flowchart. The function of this flowchart is to create a list as an inputto Distributed Marketing.
2. For the input flowchart, expose the parameters that the field marketer should beable to control, for example, gender and income range.
3. Create an output flowchart. The function of this flowchart is to hold the final list ofprospects for the On-demand Campaign.
4. For the output flowchart, expose the parameters that the field marketer should beable to control.
For example, you may want to field marketer to be able to customize the greetingand the branch name.
5. Publish both the input and output flowcharts.
Distributed Marketing tasksIn Distributed Marketing, you must create a template for an On-demand Campaign orList. The typical workflow is as follows:
1. Run the SQL commands produced as part of the flowchart publishing process.
2. Edit the forms that were created when the flowcharts were published in Campaign.
3. On the Form Definitions screen, click Publish next to the form to make the formavailable for use in templates.
4. Create a template for an On-demand Campaign or List.
5. Add two tabs to the template, one for the input form and one for the output form.
6. Create a new On-demand Campaign or List, using the new template.
7. Generate the list.
8. Run the On-demand Campaign or List.NF10001
Adding a form generated from CampaignWhen you publish a flowchart in Campaign, an associated form is automatically createdin Distributed Marketing. However, the underlying schema for the form does not yetexist in the Distributed Marketing database.
When you open such a form, you are presented with a screen where you can select thedatabase type and the action to take. You select one of the following:
Version 8.5.0 159
13 - Form Editor
• Preview SQL
Select this option to preview the SQL script that will be used to create the databasetable for the form.
• Run SQL Script
Select this option to run the SQL script to create the database table for the form.
You cannot work with the form unless the underlying schema exists. That is, before youcan edit or publish the form, someone must run the generated SQL commands to createthe table(s) to store the contents of the form.
NE40001
About invalid formsIf a flowchart in Campaign that is associated with a form in Distributed Marketing ismodified, then the form becomes invalid. Templates that use the form also becomeinvalid.
Furthermore, all flowchart run tasks that use the form are cancelled.
In order to make the form and templates that use it valid, and to be able to run flowchartrun tasks that use the form, you must run the SQL generated by the republishedflowchart.
Invalid forms are marked with a a red exclamation point. If a form is deleted (forexample, when flowchart is removed in Campaign), then the template is marked witha red cross.
Related Topics• Adding a form generated from Campaign
NF20001
Form Definitions pageUse the links and commands on the Forms Definition page to work with forms. Youaccess this page by selecting Settings > Distributed Marketing Settings, then clickingTemplate Configuration, then Forms.
The following table describes the links contained in the Form Definitions page:
Link Description
Name The name of the form. Click the name to open the form.
The Pencil icon after a form Name indicates the form has been updatedbut the changes are not yet published.
The red exclamation mark indicates that a form is temporarily invalidbecause the associated flowchart was republished from Campaign.
160 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Form Definitions page
Link Description
The yellow triangle icon indicates a form has been republished andthere are changes that must be validated; you must run a SQL script tovalidate the form.
Disable/Enable Link to toggle the form between Enabled and Disabled states.
• Disable: indicates the form is currently Enabled. Click to disable theform. Disabling the form prevents it from being selected in atemplate.
Disabling a form does not affect templates currently using theform.
• Enable: indicates the form is currently Disabled. Click to enable.Enabling a form allows it to be selected in a template.
Used By The list of templates that currently use the form. Click a template nameto open that template.
Publish Click to publish the form.
Revert Click to discard all the changes made to the form and revert it to theprevious published version.
Delete Click to delete the form.
Related Topics• Form status
NF80001
To edit a formYou cannot edit a form in the Published state. You must first disable a published form inorder to edit it.
The system continues to use the published version of the form while you are editing it.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings screen opens.
2. Click Template Configuration.
The Template Configuration screen opens.
3. Click Forms.
The Form Definitions screen opens.
4. Make changes to the form as necessary.
If you are making multiple changes, you should periodically click Save Changes tosave the form and continue working.
Version 8.5.0 161
13 - Form Editor
5. When you are finished editing the form, click Save and Exit.
The Form Editor closes and you return to the Form Definitions screen.
You must now either republish or revert the form.
Related Topics• To republish a form
• To revert a form
NFA0001
To revert a formYou can revert a form to its last published state when you do not want to use recentchanges.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings screen opens.
2. Click Template Configuration.
The Template Configuration screen opens.
3. Click Forms.
The Form Definitions screen opens.
Forms that have changed are indicated by a pencil icon ( ).
4. In the row for the modified form, click Revert.
The form reverts to its last published state.NFB0001
To delete a formYou cannot delete a form that is referenced by a template.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings screen opens.
2. Click Template Configuration.
The Template Configuration screen opens.
3. Click Forms.
The Form Definitions screen opens.
4. In the row for the form, click Delete.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
5. Click OK to delete the form.
The form is removed from the system.NF30001
162 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
About Run History series
About Run History seriesDistributed Marketing produces a series of run histories, each series conceptually tied toa version of the form used to generate the results. You view the run history series in adrop-down menu that shows all the series available, with the most recent one selectedby default.
The series view contains the following additions to the standard run history:
• Show Series drop-down menu to select the series to show
• Legend that identifies the form version in use, containing the date and time ofpublishing
NF40001
About merging formsWhen a flowchart is republished in Campaign, a new form is generated that must bemerged with the old one. For example, the flowchart may expose a new parameter; youmust merge the form to have that parameter appear.
When merging forms, note the following:
• For trivial flowchart changes (for example, when a lookup value for an existing uservariable is added), you do not need to take any action, other than republishing theflowchart in Campaign. Distributed Marketing recognizes these changesautomatically.
However, in this example, you do have the option of not merging the change, ifDistributed Marketing uses different lookup values.
• If user variables are added to or deleted from the flowchart, the system alertsmarketers to the fact they need to re-validate their Lists and On-demandCampaigns.
• Some small changes made to a flowchart are ignored by Distributed Marketing. Forexample, changes to localized text such as labels, prompts, and option prompts areignored, because Distributed Marketing users typically modify this data. Thereforethe system does not overwrite these changes.
• If you expose new user variables in a flowchart, and there are already objects inDistributed Marketing that use this flowchart, the system does not update theexisting objects with a default value for any new attributes.
NF90001
To republish a formYou must republish a form when its associated flowchart in Campaign changes.
1. From the Settings menu, select Distributed Marketing settings.
The Administrative Settings screen opens.
Version 8.5.0 163
13 - Form Editor
2. Click Template Configuration.
The Template Configuration screen opens.
3. Click Forms.
The Form Definitions screen opens.
Forms for which the associated flowchart have changed are indicated by a pencilicon ( ).
4. In the row for the modified form, click Publish.
5. Edit the form as necessary.
If you are making multiple changes, you should periodically click Save Changes tosave the form and continue working.
Field marketers should re-validate List and On-demand Campaign instances that usethe updated form.
NF50001
To change values displayed in formsYou can modify the display values contained in lookup tables that are used to presentchoices in drop-down lists and selection tables contained in forms. This allows you todisplay choices to corporate and field marketers in your organization in their nativelanguage. You do this in the Form Editor by modifying individual elements of the form.
1. Edit the form for which you want to modify how values are displayed.
2. Select an element.
3. Click Update Lookup Table.
The Update Lookup Table window opens.
4. Modify or translate the values in the table.
For example, translate the values for Acquisition, Cross-selling, and Loyalty into alanguage other than English.
Your changes replace the text displayed in the drop-down list or display table that ispopulated by the lookup table.
This step fails if the lookup table is a view rather than a table.
5. Save and republish the form when you are finished.NF60001
Form statusThe follow table lists the possible form status values:
164 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Form Editor page
Status Value Description
Published The form has been published to make it availablefor use in templates. You cannot edit a form in thisstate; you must first disable it.
A Published form is also Enabled.
Disabled A previously Published form was disabled so thatit could be edited.
Enabled A previously Disabled form was enabled so that itcould be used by templates.
NF70001
Form Editor pageThe Forms Editor is a visual tool to help you lay out how you want pages to appear tocorporate and field marketers.
The form layout is displayed in the main area of the page. In this area, you can:
• Change the format and labels of the parameters.
• Rearrange the layout by selecting and moving elements around the page.
• Add help text, default values, and mark parameters as required
Form Editor tabsThe Form Editor contains three tabs:
• Add an Element tab
• Element Properties tab
• Form Properties tab
Form Editor CommandsThe Form Editor contains the following commands:
Command Description
Save Changes Saves the changes made to this form and continue editing.
Save and Exit Saves the changes made to this form and returns the user to the FormDefinitions page.
Preview Opens a pop-up window that shows how the form looks to corporateand field marketers.
Version 8.5.0 165
13 - Form Editor
Command Description
Cancel Discards the non-saved changes and returns to the Form Definitionspage.
NFC0001
Add an Element tabThe Add an Element tab of the Form Editor allows you to select elements and dragthem to the desired location on the form. In this tab, you work with two kinds ofelements:
• General Elements, which include the Attribute Group Header
• Custom Elements
Attribute Group HeaderYou can add group headers to group the fields on the form. When you add a new groupheader, you specify its properties, then drag it onto the form. The following tabledescribes the properties for a group header:
Property Description
Group Internal Name Internal name of the group.
Group Display Name The label that is displayed to users on the form.
Description Descriptive text for the group; this is useful for determining the purpose.This text is not displayed to users.
Show Group Heading Determines if the Group Display Name is shown on the form.
Group Layout Determines whether the group is displayed in one or two columns. Thevalue of this property sets the form layout until the next group headeron the form appears.
Custom AttributesYou can add custom attributes to the form.
You must first create custom attributes; the custom attributes you create are onlyavailable on the current form.
The following custom attribute types are supported:
Type Description
Text - Single-Line Text field allowing users to enter a single line of text.
Text - Multi-Line Text field allowing users to enter multiple lines of text.
166 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Form Editor page
Type Description
Single-Select Enumerated field, allowing a user to select one value from a list. Thechoices are driven by a hard-coded list of options you specify whencreating the attribute.
Single-Select Database Same as the Single-Select attribute, except that the list of choices isloaded from a database table containing valid items.
Multiple-Select Database Same as the Single-Select Database attribute, except that you canchoose more than one item from the list.
Yes/No Boolean field, allowing a user to select one of two values. Can appearin any of the following ways:
• Checkbox• Drop-down list• Radio button group
Date Select Date selector, where the user can enter a date or select a smallcalendar from which to choose a date.
Integer Numeric field, allowing users to enter whole numbers.
Float Numeric field. You can specify the number of decimal places.
Money Numeric field, allowing users to enter currency values. The system usesthe localized currency symbol. You can specify the precision (number ofdecimal places) for the field.
User-Select Creates a user selector, which is populated (from Marketing Platform)with all system users. You can use this attribute where the value shouldcome from a list of users.
List of Lists Special type of multi-select attribute that displays all of the lists of a fieldmarketer in a multi-select format.
Hidden Used to pass the ListID and Username properties from a Campaignflowchart that is brought into Distributed Marketing as a form.
You can also use this type to create a field to which you assign adefault value that you do not need users to see, for example, a fieldused only for reporting.
Note the following:
• Each attribute type can be displayed with different controls as indicated by the iconin the list.
• To create a new attribute, click Create a New Custom Attribute at the bottom ofthe custom attribute list.
NFF0001
Version 8.5.0 167
13 - Form Editor
To create an attributeBefore you can create any custom attributes for the form, the database schema for thelookup tables must be created. You must do this outside of Distributed Marketing, withyour database management software.
You can create custom attributes from the Add an Element tab of the Form Editor.
Custom attributes you create are only available in the form you are editing.
1. Open the Form Editor for the form to which you want to add a custom attribute.
2. With the Add an Element tab open, click Create a New Custom Attribute.
The Create a New Custom Attribute dialog box opens.
3. Enter information in the Basic Options section as needed.
Fields marked with two red asterisks (**) are required.
Additional Basic Options fields may be added, and the Display Options may change,based on the Attribute Type you select.
4. Set the Display Options as needed.
5. Click Save and Exit to save the attribute and return to the form editor.
You can also click Save and Create Another to save this attribute, and then createanother attribute in the same dialog box.
The custom attribute is now available for use in this form.
Related Topics• Add an Element tab
N1000001
To create a dependent attributeDependent attributes are attributes whose values are constrained by another attributevalue. For example, if you want to have a field that displays all the cities for a selectedstate, you could make the City attribute dependent upon the State attribute.
You can make only the following attribute types dependent on other attributes:
• Single-Select - Database
• Multiple-Select - Database
1. Create the parent attribute.
To continue with the example above, you would create the State attribute.
2. Place the parent attribute onto the form.
The Create a New Custom Attribute dialog box opens.
3. Create the child attribute.
For example, you would create the City attribute.
168 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Form Editor page
4. In the child attribute, check the field This field is dependent on the followingcolumn.
5. Select the database table column on which this attribute is dependent.
For example, you would select the State column.
6. Click Save and Exit to save the attribute and return to the form editor.
You can also click Save and Create Another to save this attribute, and then createanother attribute in the same dialog box.
The dependent custom attribute is now available for use in this form.
Related Topics• Add an Element tab
N1010001
To delete a custom attributeYou cannot delete custom attributes from forms that were created automaticallyfrom a published Campaign flowchart.
1. In the Form Editor, select the custom attribute to delete from the Custom Attributeslist.
The custom attribute to delete must be in this list, and not in the form itself.
2. Click Delete the selected attribute.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK.
The custom attribute is deleted.
4. Click Save Changes or Save and Exit to save the form with the deletion.
To cancel the deletion, click Cancel.NFD0001
Element Properties tabThe Element Properties tab displays the properties of the currently selected element inthe Form Editor. This tab is displayed when you select a single element in the form.
The values displayed in this tab are read-only. To edit the values, click Edit CustomAttribute or Edit Attribute Group.
NFE0001
Form Properties tabThe Form Properties tab displays the properties related to the form. Use this tab to viewor edit the form properties. The tab contains the following information:
Version 8.5.0 169
13 - Form Editor
Property Description
Form name The name of the form.
If the form was created automatically when a Campaign flowchart waspublished, the Flowchart name, ID, type are displayed in read-onlymode.
Form Description Description for the form.
Form Layout Radio button group indicating whether the form has a one- or two-column layout.
Properties for forms associated with Campaign flowchartsIf the form was created through the publishing of a Campaign flowchart, it has severaladditional properties:
Property Description
Flowchart Type The flowchart type is either List or Campaign. On-demand Campaignsand Lists typically have two tabs, one for input and one for output. Theinput form should be designated as List, and the output form should bedesignated as Campaign.
Flowchart Name The read-only name of the corresponding flowchart in Campaign.
Flowchart Version The read-only version of the corresponding flowchart in Campaign.
N1020001
To remove a custom attribute from a formYou cannot remove custom attributes from forms that were created automaticallyfrom a published Campaign flowchart.
1. In the Form Editor, select the element to delete.
2. Click the Delete icon ( ).
The element is deleted from the form.
3. Click Save Changes or Save and Exit to save the form with the deletion.
To cancel the deletion, click Cancel.
170 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N106A6
A IBM Unica CampaignFlowcharts
■ About flowcharts■ Creating flowcharts■ Copying flowcharts■ Viewing flowcharts■ Reviewing flowcharts■ Editing flowcharts■ Validating flowcharts■ Testing flowcharts■ Running flowcharts■ Deleting flowcharts■ To print a flowchart■ Packaging flowchart files for troubleshooting■ Flowchart reference
N1030001
About flowchartsYou use flowcharts to perform a sequence of actions on your data for executing yourcampaign logic. Campaigns are made up of one or more flowcharts. Flowcharts aremade up of processes, which you configure to perform the data manipulation, contactlist creation, or contact and response tracking required for your campaign. In effect, theprocesses are how you define and implement a campaign.
Working with flowcharts requires the appropriate permissions. For information onpermissions, see the IBM Unica Campaign Administrator's Guide.
N1040001
Creating flowchartsYou can add a new flowchart to your campaign either by creating a new one, or copyingan existing one.
Copying an existing flowchart may save time because you can start with a completedflowchart and modify it to meet your needs.
Version 8.5.0 171
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
To facilitate constructing flowcharts, you can use pre-configured flowchart templates toquickly create common campaign logic or process box sequences. You can also saveand reuse other objects such as queries, table catalogs, triggers, custom macros, uservariables, and definitions of derived fields.
N1100001
Flowchart design considerationsYou should be aware of the following considerations when creating flowcharts.
• Avoid cyclical dependencies. Be careful not to create cyclical dependenciesamong your processes. For example, your flowchart has a Select process thatprovides input to a Create Seg process. If you choose as input in your Selectprocess a segment that will be created by the same Create Seg process that theSelect process provides output to, you will have created a cyclical dependency. Thissituation will result in an error when you try to run the process.
• Applying global suppressions. If your organization uses the global suppressionfeature, be aware that a particular set of IDs might be automatically excluded fromuse in target cells and campaigns.
N1110001
To create a new flowchartIf you are creating an interactive flowchart, see the Interact documentation forinformation.
1. In the campaign or session to which you want to add a flowchart, click the Add aFlowchart icon.
The Flowchart Properties page appears.
2. Enter a name and description for the flowchart.
Flowchart names have specific character restrictions. For details, see Aboutspecial characters.
Under Flowchart Type, Standard Batch Flowchart is the only option unlessyou are a licensed user of Interact. If you have installed a licensed version ofInteract, you can also select Interactive Flowchart.
3. Click Save and Edit Flowchart.
The Flowchart page displays the process palette and a blank flowchart workspace.
4. Add processes to your flowchart.
A flowchart typically begins with one or more Select or Audience processes to definethe customers or other marketable entities with which to work.
Be sure to click Save frequently while adding and configuring the processes inyour flowchart.
172 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Copying flowcharts
5. Click Save or Save and Exit when you have finished creating your flowchart.N1050001
Copying flowchartsCopying an existing flowchart to add to a campaign saves time because you can startwith a completed flowchart and modify it to meet your needs.
If the copied flowchart includes contact processes (Mail List or Call List) with target cellslinked to target cells defined in the target cell spreadsheet, new cell codes will begenerated for cells in the new copy of the flowchart so that duplicate cell codes do notoccur. Note that if the target cells were defined "bottom up" that is, from the flowchart,and if the Auto-generate cell code option in the contact process is off, new cell codesare NOT generated when you paste the copied flowchart.
When you copy an existing flowchart, if the flowchart logic uses derived fields thatreference any cell codes from the old flowchart, the logic will be broken in the newflowchart.
Process configuration settings are copied to the new flowchart. However, any temp filesor temp tables that were created as a result of running the original flowchart are notcopied to the new flowchart.
N1130002
To copy a flowchart1. View the flowchart you want to copy.
For example, you can click the flowchart's tab while viewing its campaign.
2. Click the Copy icon.
The Duplicate Flowchart window appears.
3. Select the campaign into which you want to copy the flowchart.
Navigate through the list by clicking the + sign next to a folder to expand it.
4. Click Accept this Location.
You can also double-click a folder to select and accept the location in one step.
The flowchart is moved to the campaign you selected.
Related Topics• Viewing flowcharts
N1060001
Version 8.5.0 173
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
Viewing flowchartsIf you have View permissions for a flowchart, you can open it in Read-Only mode forviewing, which allows you to view the flowchart structure, but not to open processconfiguration dialogs or make any changes. In Read-Only mode, you can view theprocesses and connections between processes to quickly see the purpose of theflowchart.
When the flowchart is open for viewing, you can also zoom out to see more processesat once or zoom in to magnify a portion of the flowchart more closely.
To see more details of the flowchart, such as how the processes in the flowchart areconfigured, you must open the flowchart for reviewing or editing.
N1140001
To view a flowchartYou can view a flowchart in three ways:
• On the Campaigns page, click the View a tab icon next to the campaign and selectthe flowchart you want to view from the context menu.
• Open the flowchart tab directly from the campaign.
• Open the campaign’s Analysis tab, then click the flowchart name from the list offlowcharts.
To zoom in and out
Click the Zoom In and Zoom Out icons.N1070001
Reviewing flowchartsIf you have Review permissions (and not Edit permissions) for flowcharts, you can openthem only in Review mode, which allows you to view process configurations and modifythe flowchart, but you cannot save any changes or perform production runs offlowcharts or any of their processes. This allows you to safely verify a flowchart’scontents, or copy and re-use processes within a flowchart without fear of inadvertentlychanging the flowchart.
Be aware that test runs can write output, and that test runs can execute triggers. Inaddition, even in Review mode, if you have the appropriate permissions, you canedit custom macros and triggers in the flowchart, and thus might change theflowchart.
Other actions you can perform in Review mode are:
• test runs if you have the appropriate permissions.
• save processes or the flowchart you are reviewing as a template.
174 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Editing flowcharts
In Review mode, the flowchart auto-save option is disabled and cannot be enabled.To save changes to a flowchart, you must have Edit permissions.
N1150001
To review the processes in a flowchartYou open a flowchart in Review mode in the same way as you open a flowchart inEdit mode. Your permissions settings automatically ensure that you can only accessflowcharts in Review mode if you do not also have Edit permissions.
You can open a flowchart for reviewing in several ways:
• On the Campaigns page, click the Edit a tab icon next to the campaign and selectthe flowchart you want to review from the context menu.
• Open the campaign, then click the flowchart tab. On the flowchart page, click theEdit icon.
You can also press Ctrl and click the flowchart tab to open the flowchart directly inReview mode.
• Open the campaign’s Analysis tab, click the link to the flowchart you want toreview, then click the Edit icon.
On the Analysis tab, you can also press Ctrl and click the flowchart link to open theflowchart directly in Review mode.
When you enter a flowchart in Review mode, you see a message indicating that theflowchart is in review mode and that any changes you make cannot be saved. The pageheader indicates "Reviewing", and only the Cancel option is visible.
N1080001
Editing flowchartsYou edit a flowchart to add or remove processes or to configure the processes. You canalso edit the flowchart’s name and description.
If you try to edit a flowchart that is already being edited by someone else, Campaignwarns you that the flowchart is open by another user. If you continue opening theflowchart, the other user’s changes are immediately and permanently lost. Toprevent the loss of work, do not continue opening the flowchart without first checkingwith the other user.
N1160001
To open a flowchart for editingYou can open a flowchart for editing in several ways:
• On the Campaigns page, click the Edit a tab icon next to the campaign, and selectthe flowchart from the context menu.
Version 8.5.0 175
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
• Open the campaign, then click the flowchart tab. On the flowchart page, click theEdit icon.
You can also press Ctrl and click the flowchart tab to open the flowchart directly inEdit mode.
• Open the campaign’s Analysis tab, click the link to the flowchart you want to edit,then click the Edit icon.
You can also press Ctrl and click the flowchart name to open the flowchart directlyin Edit mode.
N1170001
To edit a flowchart's properties1. Open the flowchart for editing.
2. Click the Properties icon in the Flowchart toolbar.
The Edit Flowchart Properties page appears.
3. Modify the flowchart name or description.
Flowchart names have specific character restrictions. See About specialcharacters.
4. Click Save Changes.
The modified flowchart details are saved.N1090001
Validating flowchartsYou can check the validity of a flowchart at any time (except when the flowchart isrunning) using the Validate Flowchart feature. You do not need to have saved aflowchart to run validation on it.
Validation performs the following checks for a flowchart:
• that the processes within the flowchart are configured.
• that cell codes are unique within the flowchart, only if the AllowDuplicateCellCodesconfiguration parameter is set to No. If this parameter is set to Yes, duplicate cellcodes within flowcharts are allowed.
• that cell names are unique within the flowchart.
• that offers and offer lists referenced by contact processes are valid (that is, that theyhave not been retired or deleted). Offer lists that are referenced but are empty willnot generate an error, only a warning.
• that any cells linked to a top-down entry from the target cell spreadsheet are stillconnected.
176 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Testing flowcharts
The validation tool reports the first error found in the flowchart. You might need to runthe validation tool several times in succession (after correcting each displayed error) toensure that you have fixed all found errors.
A best practice is to run validation on flowcharts before executing production runs,particularly if you will be running flowcharts by batch mode or will not be activelymonitoring the run.
N1190001
To validate a flowchart1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click the Run icon and select Validate
Flowchart.
Campaign checks your flowchart.
2. If errors exist in the flowchart, a message box appears, displaying the first errorfound. As you correct each error and re-run the validation.tool, the remaining errorsare displayed successively.
N10A0001
Testing flowchartsYou can conduct a test run on a flowchart or branch if you do not want to output data orupdate any tables or files. However, note that triggers execute on completion of bothtest and production runs.
When testing processes, branches, or flowcharts, note that global suppression isapplied.
A best practice is to conduct test runs on processes and branches as you arebuilding flowcharts, so that you can troubleshoot errors as they occur. Also,remember to save each flowchart before you run or test it.
N11A0002
To test run a flowchart1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click the Run icon and select Test Run
Flowchart.
The flowchart runs in test mode. Data is not written to any tables.
Each process displays a blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there areerrors, the process displays a red "X".
2. Click Save and Exit to save the flowchart.
You can also click Save to save the flowchart and leave it open for editing.
If you click Save and Exit before the flowchart has finished running, the flowchartwill continue running and save when it finishes. If you or another user re-open theflowchart while it is still running, any changes made to the flowchart are lost. For thisreason, always save a flowchart before running it.
Version 8.5.0 177
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
To pause the run, right click on the process box and select Run > Pause. To stopthe run, right click on the process box and select Run > Stop.
3. Click the Analysis tab on the Campaign toolbar and view the Campaign FlowchartStatus Summary report to determine if there were any errors in the flowchart run.
N11B0001
To test run a flowchart branch1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click a process on the branch you want to test.
2. Click the Run icon and select Test Run Selected Branch.
The flowchart runs in test mode. Data is not written to any tables.
Each process displays a blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there areerrors, the process displays a red "X".
Related Topics• Troubleshooting runtime errors
N10B0002
Running flowchartsYou can choose to run an entire flowchart, a branch, or an individual process in theflowchart. For best results, conduct test runs as you are building flowcharts, so that youcan troubleshoot errors as they occur, and be sure to save each flowchart before youtest or run it.
For flowcharts containing contact processes, note that each production run of aflowchart can generate contact history only once. To generate multiple contacts fromthe same list of IDs, snapshot out the list of IDs and read from the list for eachflowchart run.
Users with Administrative privileges can access the Monitoring page , whichdisplays all running flowcharts and their statuses, and provides controls to suspend,resume, or stop flowchart runs.
N11D0001
To run a flowchart1. If you are viewing a flowchart, you can run it by clicking the Run icon and selecting
Run This.
If you are editing a flowchart, click the Run icon and select Save and RunFlowchart.
2. If the flowchart has already been run, click OK on the confirmation window.
Data from the run is saved to the appropriate system tables. Each process displaysa blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there are errors, the processdisplays a red "X".
178 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Running flowcharts
3. Click Save and Exit to save the flowchart.
You can also click Save to save the flowchart and leave it open for editing.
You must save the flowchart once after running to view the results of the run in anyreports. Once you have saved the flowchart, results of repeated runs areimmediately available.
If you click Save and Exit before the flowchart has finished running, theflowchart will continue running and save when it finishes.
4. Click the Analysis tab on the Campaign toolbar and view the Campaign FlowchartStatus Summary report to determine if there were any errors in the flowchart run.
N11E0001
To run a flowchart branch1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click a process on the branch you want to run.
2. Click the Run icon and select Save and Run Selected Branch.
Running only a process or a branch of a flowchart does not increment the RunID of a flowchart. When you run only a process or a branch, if contact historyrecords exist, you are prompted to choose run history options before you canproceed. For details, see About run history options.
Each process displays a blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there areerrors, the process displays a red X.
Related Topics• Troubleshooting runtime errors
N1200001
To run a flowchart processRunning only a process or a branch of a flowchart does not increment the Run ID of aflowchart. When you run only a process or a branch, if contact history records exist, youare prompted to choose run history options before you can proceed.
1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click a process on the branch you want to run.
2. Click the Run icon and select Save and Run Selected Branch.
Each process displays a blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there areerrors, the process displays a red X.
N1210001
To pause a flowchart runWhen you pause a running flowchart, branch, or process, the server stops running, butsaves all the data already processed. You might want to pause a run to free upcomputing resources on the server.
Version 8.5.0 179
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
After pausing a run, you can continue the run or stop it.
On a flowchart page, click the Run icon and select Pause This.
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also control flowcharts from theMonitoring page.
N1220001
To continue a paused flowchart runWhen you continue running a paused run, the run resumes at the exact point at which itstopped. For example, if a Select process were paused after processing 10 records, itwould resume running by processing the 11th record.
On a flowchart page, click the Run icon and select Continue This.
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also control flowcharts from theMonitoring page. For details, see the Campaign Administrator's Guide.
N1230001
To stop a flowchart runOn a flowchart page, click the Run icon and select Stop This.
The results of any currently running processes are lost and a red X appears on thoseprocesses.
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also control flowcharts from theMonitoring page.
N1240001
To continue a stopped flowchart runYou can continue running a stopped flowchart by running the flowchart branch thatbegins with the process where the flowchart stopped. That process will be re-run alongwith all downstream processes.
1. On a flowchart page in Edit mode, click the process that displays a red X.
2. Click the Run icon and select Save and Run Selected Branch.
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also control flowcharts from theMonitoring page. For details, see the Campaign Administrator's Guide.
N11C0001
Troubleshooting runtime errorsCorrectly configured processes are displayed in color (the specific color reflects the typeof process). A gray process with its name in italics has a configuration error. To find outmore information about the error, hold your mouse over the process to display adescriptive error message.
180 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Deleting flowcharts
If a flowchart stops running due to an error, the processes that were running display ared X. Hold your mouse over the process to see an error message.
If Campaign is configured so that system tables are stored in a database, you arenot viewing the flowchart, and the run stops due to a database connection failure,the processes will not display a red X. Instead, the flowchart appears as it did whenit was last saved.
You should also consult the log file for system error information and review the Analysisand Performance/Profitability reports for the campaign to see that the results are whatyou expected.
N10C0001
Deleting flowchartsDeleting a flowchart permanently removes a flowchart and all of its associated files,including the log file. If there are portions of your flowchart that you want to store forreuse, you can save them as a stored object.
Output files (such as those written by a Snapshot, Optimize, or a contact process) arenot deleted, and contact and response history information is retained.
If you try to delete a flowchart that is being edited by someone else, Campaignwarns you that the flowchart is open by another user. If you continue deleting theflowchart, the other user’s changes will be permanently lost. To prevent the loss ofwork, do not continue deleting the flowchart without first checking with the otheruser.
N1250001
To delete a flowchart1. Open the flowchart you want to delete in View mode.
The flowchart tab appears.
2. Click the Delete Flowchart icon.
3. Click OK on the confirmation window.
The flowchart and all its associated files are removed.N10D0001
To print a flowchartYou can print hard copies of flowcharts from Campaign.
Do not use your Web browser’s File > Print command, as flowcharts might not printcorrectly.
1. Open the flowchart that you want to print, in either View or Edit mode.
2. Click the Print icon.
Version 8.5.0 181
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
You see the Page Setup window.
3. Click OK.
You see the Print window.
4. Click OK to print the current flowchart.
You see a Campaign window indicating that the flowchart is printing.N10E0001
Packaging flowchart files fortroubleshooting
If you need help from IBM to troubleshoot a flowchart, you can automatically collectrelevant data to send to IBM Technical Support. You can select from a list of items toinclude, and specify date ranges by which to limit data. The data items you select will bewritten to the folder you choose, and the contents can be compressed and sent to IBMTechnical Support.
In addition to the data items you select, Campaign also writes a summary file thatidentifies:
• Current date and time
• Version and build numbers of the software
• Your user name
• The selections you chose to include in the packageN1260001
To package flowchart files for troubleshootingOnly a user with permissions to edit or run a flowchart (either test or production run) canperform this procedure. If you do not have “View logs” permission, you cannot select thelog-related entries in the selection window.
Use this task to automatically package flowchart data files so you can send them to IBMTechnical Support if you need help troubleshooting a flowchart.
1. From a flowchart page in Edit mode, select Admin > Collect Flowchart Data. Yousee the Create Data Package for Troubleshooting window.
2. Type a name for the package, or leave the default name. The package name will beused to create a subfolder in which the selected data items will be written.
3. Click Browse and select the folder under which the data package will be saved.
4. Select the check box for each item you want to include in the package. Some items,when selected, may allow additional information to be entered with which to filter theextracted data.
182 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Packaging flowchart files for troubleshooting
Alternatively, you can check the Select default items checkbox. This checkboxautomatically selects all data commonly required for troubleshooting flowcharts; thisincludes all of the listed items except the log files and the contents of the user table,contact and response history tables, strategic segments, and stack trace files.
5. Click OK to create the package.N1270001
Transmitting the flowchart data package to IBMUnica Technical SupportYou can send the data package to IBM Unica Technical Support by email or using amethod recommended by your support representative. IBM Unica Technical Support willaccept uncompressed data (the entire package sub-directory), but you may optionallycompress, encrypt, and package the files into a single file before sending them to IBM.
N1280001
Options for packaging flowchart dataItem Description of what is included Additional specifications you may set
Select Default All data commonly required for trouble-Items check box shooting flowcharts. This includes all of
the listed items except the log files andthe contents of the user table and con-tact history table.
Flowchart The flowchart’s .ses file. Include run results? Optionally includeor exclude the runtime data files, alsocalled the “underscore” files.
Flowchart Log The flowchart’s .log file. Optionally set start and end timestamps. If you do not set them, thedefault is the entire log file.
Listener Log The unica_aclsnr.log file. Optionally set start and end timestamps. If you do not set them, thedefault is the entire log file.
Startup Log The AC_sess.log file. Optionally set start and end timestamps. If you do not set them, thedefault is the entire log file.
Web Message The AC_web.log file. Optionally set start and end timeLog stamps. If you do not set them, the
default is the entire log file.
Campaign Config- The .config file, which lists configur-uration ation properties and settings from your
Campaign environment to assist in trou-bleshooting the flowchart.
Version 8.5.0 183
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
Item Description of what is included Additional specifications you may set
Campaign Cus- Thetom Attributes customcampaignattributes.dat
file, which lists attribute name and valuepairs for Campaign custom attributes.Only entries related to the current cam-paign are included.
Cell Custom At- The customcellattributes.dat
tributes file, which lists attribute name and valuepairs for Campaign cell custom attri-butes. Only entries related to the currentcampaign are included.
Offer Definitions All rows are included for each of thefollowing offer-related system tables:UA_AttributeDef.dat,UA_Folder.dat, UA_Offer.dat,UA_OfferAttribute.dat,UA_OfferList.dat,UA_OfferListMember.dat,UA_OfferTemplate.dat,UA_OfferTemplAttr.dat,UA_OfferToProduct.dat,UA_Product.dat,UA_ProductIndex.dat
Target Cell The targetcellspreadsheet.dat
Spreadsheet Data file, which includes data fromUA_TargetCells for the entire TargetCell Spreadsheet. Includes data for thecurrent campaign, in column/row-de-limited text format.
Custom Macro The custommacros.dat file, includes fol-Definitions lowing fields from UA_CustomMacros,
in column/row format: Name, FolderID,Description, Expression,ExpressionType, DataScrName,DataVarType, DataVarNBytes,CreateDate, CreatedBy,UpdateDate, UPdateBy, PolicyIS,ACLID
System Table The systablemapping.xml file. In-Mapping cludes all system table mappings, in-
cluding the data source.
184 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Packaging flowchart files for troubleshooting
Item Description of what is included Additional specifications you may set
+ Include System When you select this option, it expands Select each system table you want toTable Contents to list all system tables. include. When you select a table, the
entire table will be included (all rowsand all columns).
If you do not select any sub-options, thepackage will not include any systemtables.
+ Include Contact When you select this option, it expands For each set you select, the packageHistory Tables to show the contact history and detailed will include the contact history and de-
contact history tables for each audience tailed contact history records for thatlevel. audience level.
You can optionally set start and endtime stamps. If you do not set them, thedefault is all records.
If you do not select a sub-option, thepackage will not contain any contacthistory table information.
+ Include Re- When you select this option, it expands For each table you select, the packagesponse History to show response history tables for all will include the re response historyTables audience levels. records for that audience level.
For each table you select, you canoptionally set start and end timestamps. If you do not set them, thedefault is all records.
If you do not select a table, the packagewill not contain any response historytable information.
+ Include User When you select this option, it expands Select the user tables from the flowTable Contents to show the user table contents that you chart to include.
can select for the package.If you do not select any, the packagewill not include any user table contents.
For each user table that you select, youcan optionally set maximum number ofrows to include. If you do not set amaximum number of rows, the packagewill include the entire table.
+ Include Strate- When you select this option, it expandsgic Segments to show all the strategic segments that
you can select for the package.
Version 8.5.0 185
A - IBM Unica Campaign Flowcharts
Item Description of what is included Additional specifications you may set
+ Include Stack Option available for Unix versions only. Select the stack trace files that you wantTrace Files to include in the package. If you do not
When you select this option, it expands select any sub-options, the package willto show the list of stack trace files not include any stack trace files.(*.stack) in the same directory asunica_aclsnr.log.
N10F0001
Flowchart referenceThis section describes the icons in the Campaign interface for working with flowcharts.
N1290001
Flowchart tab icons (View mode)The flowchart tab uses the following icons in View mode.
The icons, left to right, are described in the following table.
Many of the icons in the interface are associated with features that requirepermissions. For more information, see the Marketing Platform Administrator'sGuide. The Copy and Delete Flowchart icons do not appear without theappropriate permissions:
Icon Name Description
Edit Click this icon to edit the flowchart.
Run Click this icon to access the Run menu.
Add a flowchart Click this icon to add another flowchart to the campaign.
Zoom In Click this icon to increase the view size of the flowchart.
Zoom Out Click this icon to decrease the view size of the flowchart.
Print this Item Click this icon to print the flowchart.
Copy Click this icon to create a copy of this flowchart.
Delete Flowchart Click this icon to delete the flowchart.
N12A0001
186 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Flowchart reference
Flowchart page icons (Edit mode)The Flowchart page uses the following icons in Edit mode.
The icons, left to right, are described in the following table.
Many of the icons in the interface are associated with features that requirepermissions. For more information, see the Marketing Platform Administrator'sGuide.
Icon Name Description
Run Click this icon to access the Run menu.
Properties Click this icon to view or edit the Flowchart Properties window.
Options Click this icon to access the Options menu.
Admin Click this icon to access the Admin menu.
Reports Click this icon to access the flowchart cell reports.
Cut Select one or more items in the flowchart and click this icon toremove them.
Copy Select one or more items in the flowchart and click this icon tocopy them.
Paste Click this icon to paste into the flowchart any items you havecut or copied.
Zoom In Click this icon to increase the view size of the flowchart.
Zoom Out Click this icon to decrease the view size of the flowchart.
Print Click this icon to print the flowchart.
Version 8.5.0 187
N107AE
B IBM Unica CampaignProcesses
■ List of processes■ Data manipulation processes■ Run processes■ Optimization processes
N12B0001
List of processesThe following processes, grouped by process type, are available in Campaign.
The sections for the individual processes provide step-by-step guidance for configuringeach process. Each set of the individual process configuration instructions assumes thatyou have added the process to your flowchart as a first step. For details about how toadd a process to a flowchart, see To add a new process to a flowchart.
You should also see About working with processes for information about configuringprocesses in general.
Campaign provides the following types of processes:
• Data manipulation processes
• Run processes
• Optimization processes
Interact, Optimize, and eMessage provide additional processes. For moreinformation, see the documentation for those products.
N12C0001
Data manipulation processesCampaign provides the following data manipulation processes:
• Audience
• Extract
• Merge
• Sample
188 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
• Segment
• SelectN1310001
AudienceAudience levels define the target entity with which you want to work, such as account,customer, household, product, or business division, and are defined during the tablemapping process by your system administrators.
Use the Audience process in a flowchart to switch between audience levels, or to filterout IDs by audience level. Using this process, you can select all, some, or a singleentity at one level in relation to another level.
For example, you can use the Audience process to:
• Select one customer per household based on some business rule (for example,oldest male or the person with the highest account balance);
• Select all accounts belonging to a particular set of customers;
• Select all accounts with a negative balance belonging to a particular set ofcustomers;
• Select all households with individuals holding checking accounts;
• Select customers with three or more purchases within a specified time-frame.
The Audience process can select from any defined table(s), so you can also use itas a top-level process in your flowchart to initially select data.
Related Topics• Audience levels
• Householding
• Switching levels
• Configuring the audience process
N1370001
Audience levelsAudience levels represent the key entities that represent how your customer data isstored, such as account, customer, household, product, or business division. Audiencelevels can be, but are not necessarily, organized hierarchically. Here are someexamples of hierarchical audience levels that are commonly found in customermarketing databases:
• Household > Customer > Account
• Company > Division > Customer > Product
Your organization can define and use an unlimited number of audience levels. If you areusing multiple audience levels (for example, customer and household), you need tounderstand how you can work with audience levels and the Audience process toaccomplish your business objectives.
Version 8.5.0 189
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Audience levels are created and maintained by a Campaign administrator. Moving fromone audience level to another requires that both of the audience levels that you usehave keys defined within the same table. This provides a “look up” mechanism to switchfrom one level to another.
Audience levels are global, and are attached to each mapped base table.Thus, when aflowchart is loaded, the audience levels are loaded along with the table mappings withinthat flowchart.
If you have permissions to map tables in Campaign, when you map a new table, youcan map it to one or more existing audience levels, but you cannot create new audiencelevels. Only users with the appropriate permissions, usually system administrators, havepermissions to create audience levels in Campaign.
In the Audience process, you specify an input audience level and an output audiencelevel. The input and output audience levels can be the same (for example, bothCustomer) or different (for example, Customer and Household). Use the Audienceprocess to stay within the same audience level, or to switch audience levels.
N1380001
Householding"Householding” is as a general term to describe reducing the number of members in thecurrent audience level by scoping using another audience level. One of the mostcommon examples of householding is to identify a single individual to target within eachhousehold. You might select one individual per household according to a marketingbusiness rule such as:
• The individual with the greatest dollar value across all accounts;
• The individual with the most purchases in a particular product category;
• The individual with the greatest tenure; or
• The youngest male over 18 within the household.
You can use the Audience process to change audience levels and filter IDs according touser-specified criteria.
N1390001
Switching levelsSome complex campaigns require processing at different audience levels to arrive atthe list of final target entities. This can involve starting at one audience level, performingsome computations and taking this output, then moving to another audience level, andperforming other computations, and so on.
For example, you might want to support complex suppressions at different levels. As aresult, in a data model where there is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationshipbetween customers and accounts, a marketing analyst might want to build a campaignthat does the following:
• Eliminates all accounts of customers that satisfy certain criteria (for example,eliminate any account that is in default);
• Eliminates particular accounts that satisfy certain criteria (for example, eliminate allthe low-profitability accounts).
190 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
In this example, the campaign might start at the customer level, perform customer-levelsuppressions (suppress accounts in default), switch to the account level, apply account-level suppressions (suppress low-profitability accounts), and then switch back to thecustomer level to obtain the final contact information.
N13A0001
Configuring the audience processTo use the Audience process, you must work with tables for which multiple audiencelevels are defined. These levels, defined within a single table, provide a relationship to“translate” from one level to another.
• One key is defined as the “primary” or “default” key for the table. (This default keyrepresents the audience used most frequently for this data source.)
• The other keys are “alternate” keys that are available for switching audience levels.
Once you switch audience levels, Campaign displays only those tables whose defaultkey is defined at the same audience level. If you work at different audience levels on aregular basis, you might need to map the same table more than once within Campaign,each time with a different primary/default key. The default level associated with a tableis specified during the table mapping process. For more information on mapping tables,see the Campaign Administrator’s Guide .
The options available in the Audience process configuration dialog depend on variouschoices that you can make:
• Whether the input and output audience levels are the same or different;
• Whether or not the audience level values are normalized in these tables;
• Whether or not there are multiple audience levels defined for the selected tables.
For this reason, not all of the options described in the following sections are availablefor all pairs of input and output table selections.
N13B0001
To configure an Audience process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Audience process is connected to one
or more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by theAudience process.
2. Double-click the Audience process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. Choose the input data source from the Input drop-down list. If one or moreprocesses are connected to the Audience process, their output cells will also appearas available input sources.
When you have chosen an input data source, you see that the audience levelcorresponding to this input is displayed next to the Input field; if there is no inputinto the Audience process, the audience level is shown as “not selected.” The Selectoptions also reflect your input audience level.
For example, before you choose an input audience, the Select options are labelledOne Entry per... , Some Entries per... , and For Each Audience.
Version 8.5.0 191
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
After you choose an input with, for example, an audience level of Customer, theSelect options are now labelled All Entries , Some Entries , and One Entry perCustomer.
4. Select the output audience from the Choose Audience drop-down list. The drop-down list displays only audience levels defined for tables containing keys defined atthe same audience level as the input data source. If a table has more than one leveldefined, each level is available as an entry in the Choose Audience drop-down list.
If you do not see a desired audience level, you might need to remap a table.
When you have chosen your output audience, you see that the Select optionsreflect both your input and your output audience level.
For example, if your input has an audience level of Household and you choose anoutput audience level of Individual, the Select options are labelled: All Individual IDEntries , Some Individual ID Entries , One Individual ID Entry per HouseholdID , and so on, allowing you to specify how IDs are selected while you switch fromone audience level to another.
5. Use the Select and Filter options to specify how you want the records to beselected. These options will vary depending on whether you are selecting All IDs (inwhich case there are no filtering options), switching levels, or staying at the samelevel. For details on how to select and filter based on whether you are switchingaudience levels, see:
• Using the same input and output audience levels
• Using different input and output audience levels
6. Click the Cell Size Limit tab if you want to limit the size of the output cell (that is,limit the number of IDs generated by the process).
7. Click the General tab where you can optionally modify the Process Name , OutputCell names, or Cell Codes , and enter a Note about the process.
8. When you have finished configuring your process, click OK. The process isconfigured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test the process to verifythat it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• Choosing data sources for processes
N1420001
Example: Audience processThe following figure shows a configured Audience process.
192 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
• The selected input audience level is Customer ; it is the default audience level ofthe DEMO_ACCOUNT table (this audience level is displayed to the right of the Inputfield).
• The output audience level is the same: Customer as defined in the DEMO_ACCOUNT
table. The DEMO_ACCOUNT table has two other audience levels defined: Branchand HouseHold .
• The process is configured to choose one Customer Entry per HouseHold basedon the maximum of the field HIGHEST_ACC_IND .
N1430001
Example: Filtering recordsWhen you configure an Audience process to select IDs based on a count, or a statisticalfunction ( MaxOf , MedianOf , MinOf ) or Any One , the Filter button becomesavailable. When you click Filter , the Specify Selection Criteria window appears, whichallows you to enter a query expression to specify which records will be used in theBased On calculation.
The filtering criteria is applied before the Based On calculation is performed, therebyallowing you to remove records from consideration.
For example, you might want to constrain the date range over which an operation isperformed. To use only purchase transactions over the last year, you can enter a filterquery expression such as:
CURRENT_JULIAN() - DATE(PURCH_DATE) <= 365
193Version 8.5.0
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Then, if you are computing a Based On calculation that chooses the sum of theAmount field, only the amounts from transactions within the last year are summedtogether.
N1440001
Using the same input and output audience levelsWhen you select the same audience level in the Choose Audience drop-down list asthe audience level of the Input , you have the following Select options available:
• One <Input/Output Audience> Entry per <Different Audience>
• Some <Audience> Records per <Different Audience>
• Entries for each entry at that audience level
The Select options vary depending on the relationship of the selected input and outputaudience levels. Options that are not meaningful are disabled.
For example, if a particular audience level (for example, Customer) is normalized withina table, the option to select one level (for example, Customer) per other level (forexample, Household) is not available. If there are multiple levels defined in the table, theSelect option would be One Customer Entry per, with a drop-down list appearing withthe other available audience level options.
Campaign automatically uses the name of the selected audience level in theprocess configuration dialog. For example, if the input audience level is Customer,the One Entry per option is automatically displayed as One Customer Entry per . Inthe following sections, this dynamically changing portion of the option text isindicated with <Input/Output Audience> wherever it is appropriate.
The Select options include:
Method Description Example
One Per One member of the input/output One customer per householdaudience level, scoped by an-other audience level
Some Per Some members of the in- All customers with above aver-put/output audience level, age purchases within the house-scoped by another audience lev- holdel
For Each Select members if the number of Number of accounts > 1, or num-members at the selected audi- ber of purchases > 3ence level satisfies some condi-tion
N1450001
194 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
To select One <Input/Output Audience> Entry per <DifferentAudience>This selection indicates that there is One <Input/Output Audience> Entry per <DifferentAudience>. Choose this option if the input and output audience levels are the same, buta different audience level is used to scope the output.
For example, you can use this option to select the one customer within each householdwho has the oldest account (Input audience level is customer, output audience level iscustomer, scoping by Household level, using MinOf(BaseInfo.AcctStartDt) toselect).
Specify a business rule to indicate how the single entity is selected (for example, theminimum, maximum, or median of some field), or else choose Any One (in this case,no field choices are available).
1. Select an input source for Input and the same audience level for the outputaudience in the Audience process.
The relevant Select options become available.
2. Select the One Entry per option.
A drop-down list appears next to the selected option.
3. Select an audience level from the drop-down list.
All alternate defined audience levels (other than the input audience) appear in thelist.
4. Choose a value to use from the Based On drop-down list:
• Any One eliminates the need to pick a Based On value
• MaxOf returns the maximum value of the selected field
• MedianOf returns the median value of the selected field
• MinOf returns the minimum value of the selected field
Each of these functions will return exactly one member from the input audiencelevel. If more than one entry is tied at the maximum, minimum, or median value, thefirst encountered entry is returned.
5. If you have selected a Based On criterion other than Any One, select a field onwhich the function operates. This drop-down list includes all the fields from the tableselected in the Choose Audience field, and any mapped dimension tables. Expanda table by clicking on the “ + ” sign. Created derived fields are listed at the bottom.
For example, to select the account holder from each household with the highestaccount balance, you would select “ MaxOf ” for the Based On criteria andAcct_Balance from the list of table fields.
You can also create or select derived field(s) by clicking Derived Fields.
6. (Optional) If you have selected a count to be based on, the Filter button becomesavailable.
Version 8.5.0 195
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Use the Filter function to reduce the number the IDs that will be available to theBased On calculation. For example, you might want to select customer IDs basedon their average account balance in the last 6 months, but prior to doing that, youwould want to filter out all customers whose accounts are inactive.
To filter records before performing the Based On computation, click Filter . TheSpecify Selection Criteria window appears. You can enter a query expression tospecify which records will be used in the Based On calculation. The filtering criteriais applied before performing the Based On calculation, thereby allowing you toremove records from consideration.
7. When you have finished building your filter query, click OK to save your query andclose the Specify Selection Criteria window.
8. Continue configuring the process by completing the fields on the remaining tabs.
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
• Configuring the audience process
N1460001
To select Some <Audience> Records per <Different Audience>This selection indicates that there are multiple entries per audience. In this situation, theinput and output audience levels are the same, but a different audience level is used toscope the output. You might select this option, for example, to select all customerswithin each household who have made purchases over $100 (Input audience level iscustomer, output audience level is customer, scoping by Household level, usingMaximum Purchase Value>$100
In addition to creating a query, the Based On criterion also supports keywords allowingthe functional equivalent of a GROUPBY macro function to be performed.
1. Select an input source for Input and the same audience level for the outputaudience in the Audience process. The relevant Select options become available.
2. Select the Some Entries per... option. A drop-down list appears next to the selectedoption.
3. Select an audience level from the drop-down list. All alternate defined audiencelevels (other than the input audience) appear in the list.
4. Click in the Based On field to enter a query. he Specify Selection Criteria windowappears.
5. Enter or build a valid query expression, then click OK to save it and close theSpecify Selection Criteria window.
6. Continue configuring the process by completing the fields on the remaining tabs.
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
• Configuring the audience process
N1470001
196 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
To select entries for each entry at that audience levelThis selection indicates that there are multiple selections from multiple audience levels.Select this option if the number of members at the selected audience levels satisfiessome condition (for example, Number of Accounts > 1 or Number of Purchases >3 ).
This option is available only if the input audience level is not normalized (that is, therecord ID is not unique in the selected Choose Level table), and the input and outputlevels are the same. It is the only option available if no alternate keys have beendefined for your output audience table.
1. Select an input source for Input and the same audience level for the outputaudience in the Audience process.
The relevant Select options become available.
2. Select the For Each option.
This option is available only if the input audience level is not normalized (that is,the record ID is not unique in the selected Choose Level table).
A drop-down list appears next to the selected option.
3. Choose a Based On selection.
If the table you select under Choose Audience (that is, the output audience) is notnormalized, there might be duplication in your results. You can use a Based Onmethod for Campaign to use when selecting records, to avoid duplication. (Forexample, if your results might include more than one individual in the samehousehold, you can use Based On to select only one individual from thathousehold, based on the criterion you configure in this feature.)
You must select one of the Based On methods, either Count or Condition :
• Specify a Count to use in Based On :
This option lets you select the <Input Audience Level> ID, where the number ofoccurrences of the <Input Audience Level> ID satisfies the specified condition.
To toggle between different relationships (<,<=,>,>=,=), click the operator buttonrepeatedly until the desired relation is displayed.
-- OR --
• Specify a Condition to use in Based On :
Click in the text box to the right of Condition .
The Specify Selection Criteria window appears.
Enter or build a valid query expression, then click OK to save your entry and closethe Specify Selection Criteria window.
4. (Optional) If you have selected a count to be based on, Filter becomes available.
Version 8.5.0 197
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Use the Filter function to reduce the number the IDs that will be available to theBased On calculation. For example, you might want to select customer IDs basedon their average account balance in the last 6 months, but prior to doing that, youwould want to filter out all customers whose accounts are inactive.
To filter records before performing the Based On computation, click Filter . TheSpecify Selection Criteria window appears. You can enter a query expression tospecify which records will be used in the Based On calculation. The filtering criteriais applied before performing the Based On calculation, thereby allowing you toremove records from consideration.
5. When you have finished building your filter query, click OK to save your query andclose the Specify Selection Criteria window.
6. Continue configuring the process by completing the fields on the remaining tabs.
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
• Configuring the audience process
N14A0001
Using different input and output audience levelsOnce you have selected different input and output audiences, you can specify how youwant the records to be selected in the Select options.
The available Select options vary depending on the relationship between the input andoutput audience levels. When you select a different audience level in the ChooseAudience drop-down list from the level of the Input , you have the following Selectoptions available:
• “All <Output Audience Level> Entries”
• “Some <Different Output Audience Level> Entries”
• “One <Output Audience Level> per <Different Input Audience Level>”
Campaign automatically uses the name of the selected audience level in theprocess configuration dialog. For example, if the input audience level is Customer,the One Entry per option is automatically displayed as One Customer Entry per . Inthe following sections, this dynamically changing portion of the option text isindicated with <Input/Output Audience> wherever it is appropriate.
The Select options include:
Method Description Example
All Select all members of the input audience level, All customers per householdscoped by another audience level
Some Select some members of the output audience All customers aged 18 orlevel, keeping only those IDs that satisfy a spec- over within a householdified condition
198 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
Method Description Example
One Per Select exactly one output audience record for each One customer per householdinput audience record
N14B0001
To select All <Output Audience Level> EntriesSelect this option to switch to the output audience level without performing any filtering(for example, to select all customers within a household or all accounts belonging to acustomer). This creates an output cell with all output audience level entries associatedwith the input IDs. It switches audience levels without applying any selection or filteringcriteria.
If you change from a primary audience level to another audience level, you will nolonger be able to use derived fields in the following processes.
1. Select an input source for Input and a different output audience for ChooseAudience .
The Select options become available.
2. Select All <Output Audience Level> Entries .
3. Click OK to close the Audience process configuration dialog and save theconfiguration.
N14C0001
To select Some <Different Output Audience Level> EntriesSelect this option to switch from the input audience level to a different output audiencelevel, keeping only those IDs that satisfy a specified condition (for example, to select allcustomers aged 18 or over within a household, or select all accounts of a customer withpositive balances).
The Based On criteria allows you to enter a query expression to limit the outputaudience level entries selected.
1. Select an input source for Input and a different output audience for ChooseAudience .
The Select options become available.
2. Click to select Some <Output Audience Level> Entries .
The Based On field becomes available.
3. Click in the Based On field to enter a query.
The Specify Selection Criteria window appears.
4. Enter or build a valid query expression, then click OK to save the query and closethe Specify Selection Criteria window.
5. Click OK to close the Audience process configuration dialog, saving your entries.
Version 8.5.0 199
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
N14D0001
To select One <Output Audience> per <Different InputAudience>Select this option to choose exactly one output audience record for each input audiencerecord (for example, to choose one email address per customer). You must specify abusiness rule to indicate how the single entity should be selected (min/max/median ofsome field) or choose Any One (in this case, no field choices are available).
This option is available only if the input audience level is not normalized (that is, therecord ID is not unique in the selected Choose Level table).
In addition to creating a query, the Based On criterion also supports keywords allowingthe functional equivalent of a GROUPBY macro function to be performed.
1. Select an input source for Input and an output audience for the Audience process.
The Select options become available.
2. Select One <Output Audience Level> per <Input Audience Level> .
3. Select a value from the Based On drop-down list.
(Note that field selection, using the drop-down list to the right, becomes grayed outwhen you select Any One . If this is your selection, skip to step 5 .)
4. Select a field in the next drop-down list to which the Based On function relates:
a. Click in the Based On text box.
The Select Field window appears. All fields from the table selected in the ChooseAudience drop-down list appear, including any mapped dimension tables.
You can expand a table by clicking on the “+” sign. Created derived fields are listedat the bottom.
b. Select a field and click OK .
c. (Optional) Create derived field(s) by clicking Derived Fields .
5. (Optional) To filter records before performing the Based On computation, useFilter .
6. Click OK to close the Audience process configuration dialog, saving your entries.
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
N1320002
200 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
ExtractThe Extract process allows you to select fields from one table and write them out toanother table for subsequent processing. It is designed to pare down a large amount ofdata to a manageable size for subsequent operations, resulting in vast improvements inperformance.
The Extract process can take input from a cell (if it is connected to a Select process, forexample), single table, strategic segment, optimized list (Optimize only), or eMessagelanding page (eMessage only). If you select a strategic segment as input, you must joinit to a table before you can extract fields.
If you use several Extract processes in a series, only the fields in the final Extractprocess are written out.
If you use several Extract processes in parallel (that is, in different branches in thesame flowchart), they behave in the same way as persistent derived fields:
• The extracted fields attach to the inbound cell
• The extracted fields are calculated before query execution in that process
• Multiple extracted fields are available in subsequent processes
• When extracted fields are sent to a contact process:
• If an extracted field is not defined for a cell, its value = NULL
• If a single ID is in more than one cell, one row is output for each cell
• When extracted fields are sent to a Segment or Decision process, an extracted fieldmust exist in all selected input cells for it to be used in segmenting by query.
Extracted tablesData is extracted as either a binary file on the Campaign server or as a table in adatamart with a UAC_EX prefix.
Unlike a temp table, an extracted table is not deleted at the end of a flowchart run. Itneeds to persist so that users can continue to access it in order to perform operationson it, like profiling its fields, for example.
An extracted table is only deleted when you delete its associated Extract process,flowchart, campaign, or session.
In order to conserve space in the datamart, your system administrator canperiodically delete tables with a UAC_EX prefix. Note, however, that if these tablesare removed, before rerunning their flowcharts or attempting to profile fields in thenow-missing tables, users must first rerun their affected Extract processes.Otherwise, Campaign will generate "Table Not Found" errors.
N14E0002
Version 8.5.0 201
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Example: Extracting transaction dataAssume that you have designed a campaign to perform selections or calculations basedon the last three months of purchase transactions for all non-delinquent customers(approximately 90% of your customer base), resulting in 4 Gb of data.
Even if Campaign created a temporary table for these customers, joining it back to thepurchase transaction table would entail pulling over approximately 90% of the 4 Gbrows (and discarding all transactions except for the last three months) to execute aGROUPBY macro, for example.
Instead, you can configure an Extract process (placed at the purchase transaction level)to pull out all transactions within the last three months, put them into a table in thedatabase, and then subsequently run multiple GROUPBY macros and other calculationsagainst it (for example, min/max and average).
N14F0002
Prerequisites for extracting data from eMessage landing pagesThe following prerequisites must be met before you can configure an Extract process toaccept input from eMessage landing pages:
• eMessage must be installed, running, and enabled.
• eMessage landing pages must be appropriately configured.
• The mailing must be executed and responses from mailing recipients must bereceived.
For more information about eMessage landing pages, see the eMessage User's Guide.N1500002
Configuring an Extract processThe procedure for configuring the Extract process differs depending upon which of thefollowing input sources you choose:
• Cell, single table or strategic segment
• eMessage landing page
• Optimized list (see the Optimize User's Guide)N1510002
To extract data from a cell, single table, or strategic segment1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, double-click the Extract process in the flowchart
workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
2. On the Source tab, choose the data source that you want to select from.
• Select an input cell, a single table or a strategic segment from the Input drop-down list.
• If you select a strategic segment as your input data source, associate it with atable by selecting a table from the Select Based On drop-down list.
202 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
3. Specify the records to use as input. Select one of these options:
• Select All Records to include all records in your input data source.
• Select Records With to select only certain records from your input, based oncriteria you define using queries.
4. If you use the Select Records With option to select only certain records based onspecified criteria, create a query using one of the following methods:
• Point & Click
This is the default view. Click in the Field Name, Oper., Value, and And/Orcolumn cells to select values to build your query. This tool provides the simplestand easiest way to create a query, and helps you to avoid syntax errors.
• Text Builder
Use this tool to write raw SQL or use Unica macros.
• Macros
Use the Query Helper within Text Builder to access Unica macros.
• Raw SQL
5. If you are constructing a query, select the fields you want to include in your queryfrom the Available Fields list, including IBM Unica Campaign Generated Fields andDerived Fields. For more information, see Creating queries in processes.
If your query includes a table field that has the same name as a IBM UnicaCampaign Generated Field, you must qualify the field name using the followingsyntax: <table_name>.<field_name>. This syntax indicates that the tablefield will be used instead of the IBM Unica Campaign Generated Field.
6. On the Extract tab, select an output location.
• To store the data in binary format, select Campaign Server.
• To store the data in a uniquely-named table with a UAC_EX prefix, select anavailable database.
7. Select fields to extract from the list of Candidate Fields.
• Click Add to add selected fields to the list of Fields to Extract.
• To remove fields from the list of Fields to Extract, select them and clickRemove.
• Use the Up 1 and Down 1 buttons to change the order of fields in the Fields toExtract list.
• To change the default output name of a field to extract, select the field in theFields to Extract list, click on the name in the Output Name column, then enterthe new name.
For information on the fields on the Extract tab, see Extract tab reference.
8. Perform any of the following optional tasks:
Version 8.5.0 203
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• Profile an available field from a cell, table, or strategic segment, click Profile.For information on profiling fields, see Profiling fields.
• Add a derived field to the list of candidate fields. See About derived fields.
• Specify that duplicate IDs are excluded from the output. See Skipping duplicateIDs in process output.
• Limit the size of the output cell (that is, limit the number of IDs generated by theprocess). See Limiting the size of output cells.
• Click the General tab to modify the Process Name, Output Cell names, or CellCodes, link to a target cell, or enter a Note about the process.
For information on linking to target cells, see To link flowchart cells to cells in thetarget cell spreadsheet.
9. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1520002
To extract data from an eMessage landing pageEnsure that your IBM Unica environment meets the necessary requirements beforeattempting to extract eMessage landing page data. For more information, seePrerequisites for extracting from eMessage landing pages.
1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, double-click the Extract process in the flowchartworkspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
2. On the Source tab, select eMessage Landing Pages.
3. In the popup window, select an eMessage landing page as input.
You can select only one eMessage landing page as input to an Extract process.To extract data from more than one landing page, configure multiple Extractprocesses.
4. If there is more than one audience level available for the landing page, select theappropriate audience level from the drop-down list. If there is only one audiencelevel available, it is automatically selected.
5. Click OK.
6. On the Extract tab, select an output location.
• To store the data in binary format, select IBM Unica Campaign Server.
• To store the data in a uniquely-named table with a UAC_EX prefix, select anavailable database.
7. Select fields to extract from the list of Candidate Fields.
• Click Add to add selected fields to the list of Fields to Extract.
204 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
• To remove fields from the list of Fields to Extract, select them and clickRemove.
• Use the Up 1 and Down 1 buttons to change the order of fields in the Fields toExtract list.
• To change the default output name of a field to extract, select the field in theFields to Extract list, click on the name in the Output Name column, then enterthe new name.
For information on the fields on the Extract tab, see Extract tab reference.
8. Perform any of the following optional tasks:
• Add a derived field to the list of candidate fields. See About derived fields.
• Specify that duplicate IDs are excluded from the output. See Skipping duplicateIDs in process output.
• Limit the size of the output cell (that is, limit the number of IDs generated by theprocess). See Limiting the size of output cells.
• Click the General tab to modify the Process Name, Output Cell names, or CellCodes, link to a target cell, or enter a Note about the process.
For information on linking to target cells, see To link flowchart cells to cells in thetarget cell spreadsheet.
Profiling is not available for eMessage landing page attributes.
9. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
During the extraction process, Campaign creates an intermediate view in the systemtables database with a UCC_LPV prefix. This internal view remains in the databaseuntil the process box is deleted. If you remove the view, you must reconfigure itscorresponding Extract process before rerunning the process or flowchart; otherwise,Campaign generates a missing table error.
N1530002
Extract tab referenceThe following table describes the fields on the Extract tab:
Field Description
Target Data Source Location to which the output from this process will be written.The Campaign Server and any other data sources to whichyou are connected are available from the Target Data Sourcedrop-down list.
Version 8.5.0 205
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Field Description
Candidate Fields List of fields available to extract, including field name and datatype, based on your input data source.
If your input source is a landing page in eMessage, each fieldname is an attribute of the landing page. If the attributecontains special characters or spaces, it is converted to a validfield name. Data types of all landing page attributes are listedas text.
Schema object names are limited to 30 characters. Re-strict your attribute names to 30 characters or less toproduce valid column names for extracted output.
Fields to Extract Fields you have chosen to extract from the Candidate Fieldslist. The Output Name defaults to the field name in the Fieldsto Extract column.
Profile button Opens the Profile Selected Field window, which calculates thevalues and distributions of records in the selected field. Activeonly when a field name is selected in the Candidate Fieldslist.
Derived Fields button Opens the Create Derived Field window.
Opens the Advanced Settings window, which includes theMore buttonoption to skip duplicate records and to specify the way inwhich Campaign identifies duplicates.
N1330001
MergeUse the Merge process to include or exclude cells from subsequent processes in yourflowchart. For example, use the Merge process to suppress customers that haverequested that they not receive any marketing materials.
N1560001
To configure a Merge process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Merge process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the Mergeprocess.
All input cells should have the same audience level.
2. Double-click the Merge process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears. Cells from processes connected to theMerge process are automatically displayed in the Input list.
206 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
3. On the Method tab, specify the input cells that you want to include or exclude. Clickeach cell in the Input list, and use the appropriate Add>> button to add it to theRecords to Include list or the Records to Exclude list.
The IDs in the cells in the Records to Include list will be combined into one list ofunique IDs. IDs in the Records to Exclude list will not appear in the output of theMerge process.
4. Specify how you want to handle duplicate IDs in the input cells in the Records toInclude list by selecting Merge/Purge On Include to remove duplicate IDs, orMatch (AND) On Include to include only those IDs that appear across all inputcells.
For example, if customer ID C123 appears in both the Gold.out cell and in thePlatinum.out cell, and you want a list of unique customer IDs, select Merge/PurgeOn Include so that the resulting merged list contains only one instance of customerID C123.
However, if you want a list only of customers that are in both Gold and Platinumoutput cells, click Match (AND) On Include. Then, if customer ID C123 does notappear in both the Gold.out cell and the Platinum.out cell, the ID is not included inthe resulting merged list.
5. Click the Cell Size Limit tab if you want to limit the size of the output cell (that is,limit the number of IDs generated by the process).
6. Click the General tab, where you can optionally modify the Process Name, OutputCell names, or Cell Codes, and enter a Note about the process.
7. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1340001
SampleUse the Sample process to create one or more cells for different treatments, controlgroups, or a subset of data for modeling. A wide variety of configurations is available forsampling.
N1570002
To configure a Sample process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Sample process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the Sampleprocess.
2. Double-click the Sample process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. Select the cell(s) that you want to sample, using the Input drop-down list. All outputcells from any process connected to the Sample process are listed in the drop-downlist. To use more than one source cell, select the Multiple Cells option. If more thanone source cell is selected, the same sampling is performed on each source cell.
Version 8.5.0 207
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
All selected cells must be defined at the same audience level.
4. Determine the number of samples that you want to create for each of your inputcells, and enter that number in the # of Samples/Output Cells field. By default, 3samples are created for each input cell, with default names "Sample1", "Sample2"and "Sample3."
5. To change the default sample names, select the sample under the Output Namecolumn. The Edit Output Cell section is enabled. Place your cursor in the CellName text box and type to modify the sample name. You can use any combinationof letters, numbers, and spaces. Do not use any periods (.) or slashes (/ or \).
If you change the name of a sample, you must update all subsequent processesthat used this sample as an input cell. Changing a sample name mightunconfigure subsequent connected processes. In general, you should edit thenames of samples before connecting subsequent processes.
6. Indicate how you want to specify the size of your samples by selecting the SpecifySize By % or Specify Size by # Records option.
• If you selected Specify Size by %, when you click each output cell under theOutput Name column, the Size and Max Size are automatically calculated,although you can edit these values.
• If you selected Specify Size By # Records, when you click each output cellunder the Output Name column, the Size column is enabled but empty.
7. In the Edit Output Cell section, enter the maximum number of records for theselected cell in the Max. # Records field.
You can also modify the output cell information if you have selected SpecifySize By # Records.
8. Select the All Remaining checkbox to specify that the selected output cell’s size isdetermined by the size of the other cells; it is allocated the number/percentage ofrecords remaining after the other cells are calculated. You can only select AllRemaining for one of your output cells.
9. (Optional) Click Sample Size Calculator to use the Sample Size Calculator, whichcan help you understand the statistical significance of sample sizes in evaluatingcampaign results. You can specify the level of accuracy you want by entering anerror bound and computing the sample size needed, or you can enter a sample sizeand compute the error bound that will result. Results are reported at the 95%confidence level.
10. In the Sampling Method section, select the method by which you want Campaignto perform the sampling. You can create a completely random sample, sample usingevery x-th record, or create a stratified sample.
208 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
• Random Sample — This option randomly places records into the samplegroups using a random number generator based on the specified seed. Tocreate statistically valid control groups or test sets, you should use the RandomSample option.
• Every Other X — This option puts the first record into the first sample, thesecond record into the second sample, up to the number of samples specified(x). The (x+1)-th record goes into the first sample, the (x+2)-th record goes intothe second sample, and so on. To use the Every Other X option, you mustspecify a field on which the record sort order is based.
• Sequential Portions— This option creates sample groups by putting the first Nrecords into the first sample, the next set of records in the second sample andso on. This option is useful for creating groups based on the top decile (or someother size) based on some sorted field (for example, cumulative purchases,model scores, and so on). To use the Sequential Portions option, you mustspecify a field on which the record sort order is based.
11. If you selected Random Sample, you can optionally specify a random seed otherthan the default one used by Campaign. Enter a numeric value directly into theSeed field or click Pick to randomly select a new seed value.
You might want to use a new random sample seed value if:
• You have exactly the same number of records in the same sequence and if youuse the same seed value, records are created into the same samples each time.
• You find that the random sample is very unlucky and produces highly skewedresults (for example, all males fall into one group and all females in another).
12. If you selected Every Other X or Sequential Portions, you must also specify thesorting field and a sort order:
a. Select an Ordered By field from the drop-down list, or use a derived field byclicking Derived Fields.
b. Select the Ascending or Descending option to specify the direction in whichthe records will be sorted. If you choose Ascending, numeric fields are sorted inincreasing order and alphabetic fields are sorted in alphabetical order. If youchoose Descending, the sort order is reversed.
13. Click the General tab where you can optionally modify the Process Name, OutputCell names, or Cell Codes, and enter a Note about the process.
14. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• To add a new process to a flowchart
• To connect two processes
• To use the sample size calculator
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
Version 8.5.0 209
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
N15B0001
About the sample size calculatorCampaign provides a sample size calculator to help you understand the statisticalsignificance of sample sizes in evaluating campaign results. You can specify the level ofaccuracy you want by entering an error bound and computing the sample size needed,or you can enter a sample size and compute the error bound that will result. Results arereported at the 95% confidence level.
N1590001
To use the sample size calculator1. On the Sample tab of the Sample process configuration dialog, click Sample Size
Calculator.
The Sample Size Calculator window appears.
2. Under Response Rate Estimate, enter your estimates of the minimum andmaximum response rates expected from your marketing campaign.
These two values must be percentages between 0–100. The lower the expectedresponse rate, the larger the sample size must be to achieve the same level ofaccuracy.
3. Under Modeling Estimate, provide modeling estimate information.
• If you are not using a model, select No Model.
• If you are using a model, select Model Performance, then enter the appropriatemodel performance percentage. This represents the area under the lift curve andis reported in the Model Performance report.
4. To compute the required sample size for a specific error bound:
a. In the Error Bound (+ or -) field, enter a value between 0 and 100 for theacceptable error bound.
b. Click Compute Sample Size. The minimum sample size required to achieve thespecified error bound is displayed in the Min. Sample Size text box.
5. To compute the error bound expected with a particular sample size:
a. Enter the sample size in the Min. Sample Size text box.
b. Click Compute Error Bound.
The error bound is displayed in the Error Bound (+ or -) text box.
6. When you are finished, click Done.
The Sample Size Calculator window closes.
You can copy and paste the calculated sample size to use in the Sampleprocess configuration dialog.
N1350001
210 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
SegmentUse the Segment process to divide data into distinct groups (segments) to receivedifferent treatments or offers. After the segments have been created, you connect theSegment process to a contact process (CallList or MailList) to assign treatments oroffers to the segments. There is no limit to the number of segments you can create.
You can segment data in two ways: by using the distinct values in a field, or by filteringthe data in a field using a query. In addition to database table fields, you can usederived fields to segment data. This allows you to perform custom binning.
The segments created by the Segment process are not the same as the globallypersistent strategic segments created by the Create Seg process, which can beused in any session or campaign.
Related Topics• Create Seg
N15D0001
Segmenting by fieldWhen you segment data by a field in a database table, each distinct value in the fieldcreates a separate segment. This option is most useful when the values in the fieldcorrespond to the segments you want to create.
For example, assume that you want to assign a different offer to customers in each of10 regions. Your customer database contains a field called regionID, which indicatesthe region to which each customer belongs. Segment by the regionID field to createthe 10 regional segments.
N15E0001
Segmenting by queryThe segment by query option segments your data based on the results of a query thatyou create. This option is most useful when it is necessary to filter the data in a field tocreate the required segments.
For example, assume that you want to divide your customers into high-value (more than$500), medium-value ($250-$500), and low-value (under $250) segments based ontheir purchase history over the last year. The PurchaseHistory field in your customerdatabase stores the total dollar amount of each customer's purchases. Use a separatequery to create each segment, selecting records with values in the PurchaseHistory
field that meet the criteria of the segment.
You can also segment data using raw SQL.
Related Topics• Creating queries in processes
N15F0001
Version 8.5.0 211
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Using segments as input to another Segment processSegments can also be used as input cells to another Segment process. For example,assume that you want to segment your customers into six age ranges. Your databasecontains a field called AgeRange that assigns one of six age ranges to each customer.Segment by the AgeRange field to create the six segments.
You could then use these six segments as input to another Segment process thatfurther divides customers by another field or query. For example, assume that yourdatabase contains a field called PreferredChannel, which specifies each customer'spreferred contact channel — direct mail, telemarketing, fax, or email. Using the six agerange segments as input, you could then create a second Segment process to segmentby the PreferredChannel field. Each of the six age range segments is furthersegmented into four preferred channel segments, to produce a total of 24 outputsegments.
N1600001
Segmenting considerationsConsider the following options and guidelines when segmenting data:
• Choosing a segmenting method
• Making segments mutually exclusive
• Restricting segment size
• Selecting source cellsN1610001
Choosing a segmenting methodIn some cases, the same results can be achieved when segmenting either by field or byquery. For example, assume that the AcctType field in your database divides yourcustomer accounts into Standard, Preferred and Premier levels. Segmenting by theAcctType field will create three segments for these account types. You could achievethe same results using queries, but creating the segments would require writing threeseparate queries. Determine the most efficient method based upon the data you aresegmenting.
N1620001
Making segments mutually exclusiveYou can specify segments to be mutually exclusive, meaning that each qualifying recordis guaranteed to be placed into no more than one segment. When the segments areassigned to offers, this will ensure that each customer receives only one offer.
Records are placed in the first segment whose criteria they satisfy, based on a priorityorder that you define. For example, if a customer qualifies for segments 1 and 3, andsegment 1 is before segment 3 in the priority order, that customer will appear only insegment 1.
N1630001
212 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
Restricting segment sizeThe default size for the number of records per segment is Unlimited. You may want torestrict the size of the created segment if, for example, you are performing test runs ofthe flowchart or process.
You can limit the segment size to any positive integer. If the segment size you specify isless than the total number of records generated, the segment will consist of randomlyselected qualilfying records.
N1640001
Selecting source cellsAll selected cells must be defined at the same audience level. If more than one sourcecell is selected, the same segmentation is performed on each source cell.
N1650002
To configure a Segment process by field1. On the Segment tab of the Segment Process Configuration window, specify the
input to the process, using the Input drop-down list. To use more than one sourcecell, click the Multiple Cells button and select the cells from the dialog box.
2. Select Segment by Field and use the drop-down list to select the field you want touse to create the segments.
The Profile Selected Field window opens, and profiling of the selected fieldautomatically starts.
3. Wait for profiling to finish before clicking OK, to ensure that all segments areproperly created.
The list of segments and the # of Segments field are updated based on the profilingresults of the selected field. To re-profile the field at any time after initially selectingit, click Profile.
4. Set the remaining configuration options, if desired.
5. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• Segment Process Configuration: Segment tab
• Segment Process Configuration: Extract tab
• Segment Process Configuration: General tab
• Profiling fields
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N1690002
Version 8.5.0 213
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To configure a Segment process by query1. On the Segment tab of the Segment Process Configuration window, specify the
input to the process, using the Input drop-down list. To use more than one sourcecell, click the Multiple Cells button and select the cells from the dialog box.
2. Select Segment by Query.
3. Determine the number of segments that you want to create, and enter that numberin the # of Segments field.
4. To construct a query for each segment, select the segment and click Edit to accessthe Edit Segment window. For details, see New Segment and Edit Segmentwindows.
5. Set the remaining configuration options, if desired.
6. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• Segment Process Configuration: Segment tab
• Segment Process Configuration: Extract tab
• Segment Process Configuration: General tab
• Profiling fields
• Creating queries in processes
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N1660002
Segment Process Configuration: Segment tabThe following table describes the fields, buttons, and controls on the Segment tab of theSegment Process Configuration window.
Field/control Description
Input Specifies the input to the Segment process. The drop-down listcontains all output cells from any process connected to theSegment process.
Multiple Cells button Allows you to choose more than one source cell as input to theSegment process.
Segment by field Specifies a field to use for segmenting data. The data issegmented using the distinct values that exist for the selectedfield. Each distinct value in the field will create a separatesegment.
214 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
Field/control Description
Profile button Opens the Profile Selected Field window, which calculatesthe values and distributions of records in the selected field.Active only when segmenting by field.
Derived Fields button Opens the Create Derived Field window. Active only whensegmenting by field.
Segment by query Segments data based on a query that you create.
# of Segments Specifies the number of segments to create. Active only whensegmenting by query.
By default, three segments are created, with default names"Segment1," "Segment2," and "Segment3."
When segmenting by field: The # of Segments field isupdated based on the profiling results of the selected field.
Mututally Exclusive Segments Specifies whether the segment is to be mutually exclusive (thatis, each qualifying record is guaranteed to fall into no morethan one segment).
Create Extract tables Indicates whether the segment should create Extract tables foreach output cell. Selecting this option ensures that Campaigncan provide a later process with the information necessary tokeep track of duplicate target audiences across segments.
Selecting this checkbox enables the options on the Extract tab.
This checkbox is disabled if Mutually Exclusive Segments isselected.
Segment Name Lists all segments by name.
By default, three segments are created, with default names"Segment1," "Segment2," and "Segment3."
When segmenting by field: Segment names are updatedbased on the profiling results of the selected field. Forexample, if you are segmenting on a field called "Acct_Status"which has two distinct values "A" and "B", two segments arecreated, named "Acct_Status_A" and "Acct_Status_B."
Max. Size Maximum number of records allowed in each segment.
Size Number of records that meet the criteria for the segment.Before the process is run, this number defaults to the totalnumber of records in the output cell.
Version 8.5.0 215
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Field/control Description
Query Query that defines the criteria for this segment. Appears onlywhen segmenting by query.
Up 1 Allows you to move a selected segment one position higher inthe processing order. Segments are processed in the orderlisted in the table.
Down 1 Allows you to move a selected segment one position lower inthe processing order. Segments are processed in the orderlisted in the table.
New Segment button Opens the New Segment window. Active only when segment-ing by query.
Edit button Opens the Edit Segment window for editing the selectedsegment.
Remove Removes the selected segment. When a segment is removed,the # of Segments field updates automatically.
Do Not Run Subsequent Pro- Prevents processes downstream from this process from run-cesses For Empty Segments ning for empty segments.
Related Topics• Profiling fields
N1670002
Segment Process Configuration: Extract tabUse the Extract tab of the Segment Process Configuration window to allow the outputyou specify from the Segment process to be accessible as input to Mail List or Call Listprocesses in the flowchart. The following table describes the fields, buttons, andcontrols on the Extract tab:
Field Description
Target Data Source Location to which the output from this process will be written.The Campaign Server and any other data sources to whichyou are connected are available from the Target Data Sourcedrop-down list.
216 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
Field Description
Candidate Fields List of fields available to extract, including field name and datatype, based on your input data source.
If your input source is a landing page in eMessage, each fieldname is an attribute of the landing page. If the attributecontains special characters or spaces, it is converted to a validfield name. Data types of all landing page attributes are listedas text.
Schema object names are limited to 30 characters. Re-strict your attribute names to 30 characters or less toproduce valid column names for extracted output.
Fields to Extract Fields you have chosen to extract from the Candidate Fieldslist. The Output Name defaults to the field name in the Fieldsto Extract column.
Profile button Opens the Profile Selected Field window, which calculates thevalues and distributions of records in the selected field. Activeonly when a field name is selected in the Candidate Fieldslist.
Derived Fields button Opens the Create Derived Field window.
Opens the Advanced Settings window, which includes theMore buttonoption to skip duplicate records and to specify the way inwhich Campaign identifies duplicates.
Related Topics• Profiling fields
N1680001
Segment Process Configuration: General tabThe Segment Process Configuration General tab allows you to modify the ProcessName, Output Cell names, or Cell Codes, or enter a Note about the process. Fordetails about these options, see these topics:
• Changing the cell name
• Resetting the cell name
• To copy and paste all cells in the grid
• Changing the cell codeN16A0001
Version 8.5.0 217
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
New Segment and Edit Segment dialogsThe following table describes the fields, buttons, and controls on the New Segment andEdit Segment dialogs.
The New Segment dialog can be accessed only when you are segmenting by query.When you segment by field, only the Name and Max. Size fields can be accessedon the Edit Segment dialog.
Field/control Description
Name Name of the segment.
Max. Size Maximum number of records allowed in the segment.
Select Based On Specifies a data source on which to base your query.
Select All Includes all the IDs from the data source in the Input drop-<audience_level> IDs down list. The <audience_level> is the name of the
audience level of the source cell.
Select <audience_level> Provides access to the functions for creating a query to selectIDs With only certain IDs based on criteria you define. The
<audience_level> is the name of the audience level of thesource cell.
Advanced button Opens the Advanced tab, which provides the following options:
• Use Raw SQL — Use a raw SQL query to segment data.• Use Query Scope from Input Cell — Available only if a
source cell to this Segment process uses a query. Selectthe checkbox to have the source cell’s query combined(using “AND”) with the current selection criteria.
Derived Fields button Opens the Create Derived Field window.
Query text box and buttons For information using the query text box and related fields andbuttons, see Creating queries in processes.
Related Topics• Creating queries using SQL
N1360001
218 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Data manipulation processes
SelectUse the Select process to specify the customer data that you want to use in yourcampaign flowchart. Select is the most frequently used process in Campaign. Mostflowcharts begin with one or more Select processes, to select the appropriate data fromyour datamart for further processing.
N16F0002
To configure a Select process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, double-click the Select process in the flowchart
workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
2. Specify the data source for the process using the Input drop-down list.
3. Determine whether you want to select all rows from the data source or whether youwant to filter the rows based on specified criteria.
Select one of these options:
• Select All IDs to include all the rows of data from the data source in the Inputdrop-down list.
• Select IDs With to create a query to select only certain IDs based on criteriayou define.
The option names are based on the audience level of your input data source.For example, if your audience level is "Customer," then the options appear asSelect All Customer IDs and Select Customer IDs With. If your audience levelis "Household," then the options appear as Select All Household IDs andSelect Household IDs With.
4. If you use the Select IDs With option to select only certain IDs based on specifiedcriteria, create a query using one of the following methods:
• Point & Click
This is the default view. Click in the Field Name, Oper., Value, and And/Orcolumn cells to select values to build your query. This tool provides the simplestand easiest way to create a query, and helps you to avoid syntax errors.
• Text Builder
Use this tool to write raw SQL or use IBM Unica macros.
• Macros
Use the Query Helper within Text Builder to access IBM Unica macros.
• Raw SQL
5. If you are constructing a query, select the fields you want to include in your queryfrom the Available Fields list, including IBM Unica Campaign Generated Fields andDerived Fields. For more information, see Creating queries in processes.
Version 8.5.0 219
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
If your query includes a table field that has the same name as a CampaignGenerated Field, you must qualify the field name using the following syntax:
<table_name>.<field_name>
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
This syntax indicates that the table field will be used instead of the CampaignGenerated Field.
6. Click the Cell Size Limit tab if you want to limit the size of the output cell (that is,limit the number of IDs generated by the process).
7. Click the General tab, where you can optionally modify the Process Name, OutputCell names, or Cell Codes, and enter a Note about the process.
8. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• To add a new process to a flowchart
• To connect two processes
• Choosing data sources for processes
• To create a query with Point & Click
• To create a query with Text Builder
• Creating queries using SQL
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N12D0001
Run processesCampaign provides the following run processes:
• Call List
• Create Seg
• Cube
• Mail List
• Schedule
• SnapshotN1730001
Call ListThe Call List process is a contact process. Use it to generate a contact list (for example,for a telemarketing campaign), assign specific offers to that contact list, and log thecontact history.
220
Run processes
You configure a Call List process in the same way as you configure a Mail List process.N1780002
To configure a contact process (Mail List or Call List)1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your contact process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the contactprocess.
All the cells that you select as input cells must have the same audience level.
2. Double-click the contact process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. On the Fulfillment tab, specify the fulfillment details of your list output.
a. From the Input drop-down list, specify the input cells to use as the data sourcefor the contact list.
If the contact process is not connected to a process that provides output cells,there will be no cells to select from in the Input drop-down list. The MultipleCells option in the drop-down list is only available if the input process generatesmultiple cells.
b. (Optional)To specify where to write the contact list output, be sure that theEnable Export Tocheckbox is selected and use the drop-down list to specifyone of the following options:
• If you want to write the process output to a database table, select its namefrom the Enable Export To drop-down list.
• If the database table that you want to use does not appear in the list, or ifyou want the process output to be written to an unmapped table, selectDatabase Table from the drop-down list to open the Specify Database tablewindow. Use this window to specify the table and database names. Uservariables are supported in the table name you specify here.
• If you want to write the process output to a file, select File from the EnableExport To drop-down list to open the Specify Output File window. Use thiswindow to specify the type of file you want to write the output to, its filename, and corresponding data dictionary.
You can test the contact process by running the process with output exported toa temporary file that you can review.
The Enable Export To checkbox is selected by default. If you clear it, you can runthe process without any output to a file or database table.
c. (Optional) Create a Summary File (.sum) for this process by entering a path andfilename in the Summary File field, or navigate to a location by clicking theellipsis button. A summary file contains information about the export that mightbe required by a mailing house to facilitate mailings.
Version 8.5.0 221
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
d. (Optional) Send a trigger when the process finishes running by selecting theSend Trigger(s) checkbox, and choosing the trigger you want to send from thedrop-down list. To send multiple triggers, use Ctrl+Click to select each triggeryou want to add. The selected triggers will appear in the Send Trigger(s) field,separated by commas.
4. Click the Treatment tab to assign one or more offers or offer lists to each target celldefined in this process. Click the Parameters tab to specify offer parameters foreach cell.
5. Click the Personalization tab to specify the fields that are written out to yourcontact list.
a. Select the fields that you want to include in your output from the CandidateFields list.
You can use IBM Unica Campaign Generated Fields by expanding the IBM UnicaCampaign Generated Fields list, or use derived fields by clicking the DerivedFields button. Select multiple fields at one time using Ctrl+Click or a contiguousrange of fields using Shift+Click.
b. Move selected fields to the Export Fields list by clicking Add>>.
c. Remove fields from the Export Fields list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
d. If you selected a table as the export destination, the fields in that table appear inthe Export Fields list under the Table Field column. You can automatically findmatching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exact matches for the table fieldnames are automatically added to the Export Fields list. If there are multiplematching fields, the first match is taken. You can manually modify the pairingsby clicking <<Remove or Add>>.
e. If desired, re-order the fields in the Export Fields list by selecting a field andclicking Up1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
To view the values in a field, select the field and click Profile.
6. To specify that records with duplicate IDs are skipped, or specify the order in whichrecords are output, click More.
You see the Advanced Settings window.
a. To specify that any records with duplicate IDs are skipped, select the SkipRecords with Duplicate IDs checkbox, and choose the criteria that Campaignwill use to decide which record to retain if duplicate IDs are returned. Forexample, you can select MaxOf and Household_Income to specify that whenduplicate IDs are returned, Campaign exports only the ID with the highesthousehold income.
222 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
This option only removes duplicates within the same input cell. Your contact listcan still contain duplicate IDs if the same ID appears in multiple input cells. Ifyou want to remove all duplicate IDs from the contact list, you must use a Mergeor Segment process upstream of the contact process to purge duplicate IDs orcreate mutually-exclusive segments.
b. To specify that the output contact list is ordered in some way, select the OrderBy checkbox, the field to sort by, and the sort order. For example, you canselect Last_Name and Ascending to specify that the list of IDs is sorted by lastname in ascending order.
7. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings window.
The duplicate ID skipping and sort order that you have specified is displayed belowthe Export Fields list on the Personalization tab.
8. Click the Log tab to specify how you want to log contact transactions from thisprocess.
You must have the appropriate permissions to enable or disable the contacthistory logging options.
a. To log contact history to the system tables, check the Log to Contact Historycheckbox.
To make the contact information available for tracking and reporting throughoutCampaign, log to the system tables. If you are configuring a mailing list, do notlog to system tables if you plan to send your mailing list to a mailing house thatperforms processing (such as validating addresses or householding). Instead,use a Track process to log the information returned from the mailing houseinstead to capture only the list of customers who were actually mailed an offer.
b. To additionally, or instead, log to another destination than the system tables,check the Log into Other Destination checkbox.
You might want to store the contact information in another table or file if yourorganization requires further processing of the information in another format.You might also want to log the information outside the system tables if you wantto test the information output by the contact process before saving it to thesystem tables.
c. If you selected Log into Other Destination, use the Log to drop-down list tospecify a table or file.
If you select File, you see the Specify Output File window, where you specify thetype of file you want to write the output to, its file name, and corresponding datadictionary.
9. Specify the fields that you want to output to contact history by selecting fields fromthe Candidate Fields list, and moving them to the Fields to Output list using theAdd>> button. You can also used derived fields for Candidate Fields.
Version 8.5.0 223
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Remove fields from the Fields to Output list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
If desired, re-order the fields in the Fields to Log list by selecting a field and clickingUp1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
You can automatically find matching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exactmatches for the Table Field names are automatically added to the Field to Log list.If there are multiple matching fields, the first match is taken.
10. Select an option to specify how updates to the output file or table are handled:
• Append to Existing Data — append the new contact information to the end ofthe table or file. If you select this option for a delimited file, labels will not beexported as the first row. This is the best practice for database tables.
• Replace All Records — remove any existing data from the table or file, andreplace it with the new contact information.
11. To customize the information that will be written to contact history, click MoreOptions.
The Contact History Logging Options window appears.
a. To avoid updating the contact history when this process runs, select CreateTreatments Only.
This option generates new treatments in the Treatments table without updating thecontact history, esssentially allowing for a delayed update to the history. Forexample, you might avoid writing contact history because you plan to remove invalidand duplicate addresses through post-processing. If you wait for the list of IDs towhich offers are actually sent, the resulting contact history will be smaller and moreaccurate.
Be aware that if you select this checkbox, other options in this window that no longerapply (because no contact history will be logged) are disabled.
By default, this checkbox is not selected, and contact history is updated when theprocess is run. For more information about logging contact history, see ContactHistory and Response Tracking.
b. To generate new treatments with the same package ID as in the most recentprocess run, select Use Last Package ID.
All offers given in the same contact process to an individual are considered to be asingle "package"; by default, Use Last Package ID is not selected, which specifiesthat each package is assigned a unique ID for each production run of the contactprocess.
If you selected Create Treatments Only to prevent the customer history from beingupdated, you might also select this checkbox to ensure that the package ID from theprior run is assigned to each set of offers, which links the offers to the existingcontact history.
c. Select the audience level at which you are tracking contact history from theTracking Audience Level drop-down list.
224 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
d. Enter the date on which the people in the contact list will be contacted in theContact Date field. You can also click to select the date from a calendar. If youdo not enter a date in this field, Campaign uses the flowchart run date.
e. Enter a status code for tracking, using the Contact Status Code drop-down list.
f. Select and move fields to and from the Candidate Fields and the Fields to Loglist using the Add>>, <<Remove, Match>>, Up1, and Down1 buttons in thesame way as you did to select fields on the Log tab.
g. Click Close when you have finished specifying additional fields to log.
You are returned to the Log tab of the process configuration dialog.
12. (Optional) To clear some or all existing contact history and associated responsehistory entries prior to the next run of the contact process, click Clear History.
Clear History permanently deletes contact and response history records fromthe system tables. This data is not recoverable.
13. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
14. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N15C0001
Create SegUse the Create Seg process to create lists of audience IDs from customer databasetables. These segments can then be used as the basis for selects and for creatingdimensions and cubes, or as the global suppression segment for an audience level.
The Create Seg process is designed to be used by Campaign administrators, andshould be created and defined in the Sessions area of the application, because theyare used across multiple campaigns.
You can use this process within a campaign rather than in a session flowchart, but abest practice is to create all global constructs in the Sessions area of Campaignbecause they are used across multiple campaigns.
To work with strategic segments you do the following:
• Create a segment in the Sessions area of the application.
• Manage segments from the Segments area of the application.
• Use these segments in campaigns from the Campaign section of the application.N17A0001
Version 8.5.0 225
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To configure a Create Seg processThe Create Seg process is designed to be used by Campaign administrators, andshould be created and defined in the Sessions area of the application, so that thesegments are strategic and are available globally for use in all campaigns.
1. In a session flowchart in Edit mode, add a Create Seg process to the flowchartworkspace.
2. Provide input to the Create Seg process by connecting it to one or more datamanipulation processes (for example, a Select process).
3. Double-click the Create Seg process.
The process configuration dialog appears.
4. On the Define Segments tab, do the following:
a. Select one or more source cells from the Input drop-down list. These sourcecells will be turned into segments.
b. Select Create Mutually Exclusive Segments if you want the created segmentsto be mutually exclusive.
In almost all cases, you want mutually exclusive segments, because dimensionsand cubes require that segments be mutually exclusive.
c. In the Result Segments area, highlight an input cell and click Edit to configurethe segment.
The Edit Segment window appears.
5. From the Edit Segment window, do the following:
a. Give the segment a name that describes its purpose, and a brief description ofwhat the segment is designed to do.
b. From the Under Folders drop-down list, select a folder where the segment willbe stored.
c. From the Temp Table Data Source drop-down list, select a data source in whichto cache the strategic segment.
Selecting a data source is required only if the doNotCreateServerBinFile
property on the
Campaign | Server | Optimization
IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Configuration page is set to TRUE. If this property is set to TRUE, at least one datasource must be selected.
d. From the Security Policy drop-down list, select a security policy, if applicable, towhich the created segment will belong.
e. When you have finished, click OK to return to the Define Segments tab.
226
Run processes
6. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
7. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.
Strategic segments are created and made available for selection only when theCreate Seg process has run successfully in production mode. Running the CreateSeg process in test mode does not create or update strategic segments.
You can test the Create Seg process, but test runs do not create strategic segments orupdate existing ones.
N1740001
CubeThe Cube process supports the creation of data cubes from dimensions based onstrategic segments that have been created from customer database tables.
The Cube process is intended to be used by very technical users or IBM Unicaconsultants. A best practice is to create all global constructs (cubes and strategicsegments, for example) in the Sessions area of the application.
Users can select one or more defined segments, create a cube, and then drill into thedata to select a target audience which can then be converted into the appropriateprocesses (the Select process, for example) for inclusion in a flowchart.
N17B0001
To configure a Cube processAny cubes created in the Sessions area will be available globally.
1. Before you can create a cube using a Cube process, you must create a strategicsegment or dimension hierarchy.
2. In a session flowchart, select a Cube process and drag and drop it onto theworkspace.
3. Double-click the Cube process in the flowchart workspace.
You see the process configuration dialog.
4. On the Source tab, use the Input Segments drop-down list to select one or moresegments as input for the cube.
If you are selecting more than one source segment, ensure that they all have thesame audience level.
5. Click the Cube Definitions tab to define your cube. The Cube Definitions windowappears.
From the Cube Definitions window you can:
Version 8.5.0 227
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• Click Add to add a new cube
• Select an existing cube and click Edit to modify it
• Select an existing cube and click Remove to delete it
6. To add a cube:
a. Click Add. The Edit Cube window appears.
b. Enter a name and a description of the cube in the appropriate areas.
c. Select up to three dimensions from the corresponding drop-down lists. Thedimensions must be related to the strategic segments that the cube source isbased on.
d. Click OK when you have finished entering information for the cube. The EditCube window closes and the new cube definition is displayed in the list of cubeson the Cube Definitions tab.
7. Click the Select Additional Fields to Track tab to specify additional fields fortracking.
The Select Additional Fields window appears.
From the Select Additional Fields window you can:
• Select and move the fields you want to track from the Available Fields list to theSelected Fields list, using the Add>> button
• Click Derived Fields to select or create derived fields to track.
• Click Profile to profile a selected field.
8. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
9. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1750001
Mail ListThe Mail List process is one of the contact processes. It uses output cells from otherprocesses in your flowchart to generate a contact list for a direct mail campaign, assignspecific offers to that contact list, and log the contact history.
N1780002
To configure a contact process (Mail List or Call List)1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your contact process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the contactprocess.
All the cells that you select as input cells must have the same audience level.
228 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
2. Double-click the contact process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. On the Fulfillment tab, specify the fulfillment details of your list output.
a. From the Input drop-down list, specify the input cells to use as the data sourcefor the contact list.
If the contact process is not connected to a process that provides output cells,there will be no cells to select from in the Input drop-down list. The MultipleCells option in the drop-down list is only available if the input process generatesmultiple cells.
b. (Optional)To specify where to write the contact list output, be sure that theEnable Export Tocheckbox is selected and use the drop-down list to specifyone of the following options:
• If you want to write the process output to a database table, select its namefrom the Enable Export To drop-down list.
• If the database table that you want to use does not appear in the list, or ifyou want the process output to be written to an unmapped table, selectDatabase Table from the drop-down list to open the Specify Database tablewindow. Use this window to specify the table and database names. Uservariables are supported in the table name you specify here.
• If you want to write the process output to a file, select File from the EnableExport To drop-down list to open the Specify Output File window. Use thiswindow to specify the type of file you want to write the output to, its filename, and corresponding data dictionary.
You can test the contact process by running the process with output exported toa temporary file that you can review.
The Enable Export To checkbox is selected by default. If you clear it, you can runthe process without any output to a file or database table.
c. (Optional) Create a Summary File (.sum) for this process by entering a path andfilename in the Summary File field, or navigate to a location by clicking theellipsis button. A summary file contains information about the export that mightbe required by a mailing house to facilitate mailings.
d. (Optional) Send a trigger when the process finishes running by selecting theSend Trigger(s) checkbox, and choosing the trigger you want to send from thedrop-down list. To send multiple triggers, use Ctrl+Click to select each triggeryou want to add. The selected triggers will appear in the Send Trigger(s) field,separated by commas.
4. Click the Treatment tab to assign one or more offers or offer lists to each target celldefined in this process. Click the Parameters tab to specify offer parameters foreach cell.
Version 8.5.0 229
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
5. Click the Personalization tab to specify the fields that are written out to yourcontact list.
a. Select the fields that you want to include in your output from the CandidateFields list.
You can use IBM Unica Campaign Generated Fields by expanding the IBM UnicaCampaign Generated Fields list, or use derived fields by clicking the DerivedFields button. Select multiple fields at one time using Ctrl+Click or a contiguousrange of fields using Shift+Click.
b. Move selected fields to the Export Fields list by clicking Add>>.
c. Remove fields from the Export Fields list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
d. If you selected a table as the export destination, the fields in that table appear inthe Export Fields list under the Table Field column. You can automatically findmatching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exact matches for the table fieldnames are automatically added to the Export Fields list. If there are multiplematching fields, the first match is taken. You can manually modify the pairingsby clicking <<Remove or Add>>.
e. If desired, re-order the fields in the Export Fields list by selecting a field andclicking Up1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
To view the values in a field, select the field and click Profile.
6. To specify that records with duplicate IDs are skipped, or specify the order in whichrecords are output, click More.
You see the Advanced Settings window.
a. To specify that any records with duplicate IDs are skipped, select the SkipRecords with Duplicate IDs checkbox, and choose the criteria that Campaignwill use to decide which record to retain if duplicate IDs are returned. Forexample, you can select MaxOf and Household_Income to specify that whenduplicate IDs are returned, Campaign exports only the ID with the highesthousehold income.
This option only removes duplicates within the same input cell. Your contact listcan still contain duplicate IDs if the same ID appears in multiple input cells. Ifyou want to remove all duplicate IDs from the contact list, you must use a Mergeor Segment process upstream of the contact process to purge duplicate IDs orcreate mutually-exclusive segments.
b. To specify that the output contact list is ordered in some way, select the OrderBy checkbox, the field to sort by, and the sort order. For example, you canselect Last_Name and Ascending to specify that the list of IDs is sorted by lastname in ascending order.
7. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings window.
230 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
The duplicate ID skipping and sort order that you have specified is displayed belowthe Export Fields list on the Personalization tab.
8. Click the Log tab to specify how you want to log contact transactions from thisprocess.
You must have the appropriate permissions to enable or disable the contacthistory logging options.
a. To log contact history to the system tables, check the Log to Contact Historycheckbox.
To make the contact information available for tracking and reporting throughoutCampaign, log to the system tables. If you are configuring a mailing list, do notlog to system tables if you plan to send your mailing list to a mailing house thatperforms processing (such as validating addresses or householding). Instead,use a Track process to log the information returned from the mailing houseinstead to capture only the list of customers who were actually mailed an offer.
b. To additionally, or instead, log to another destination than the system tables,check the Log into Other Destination checkbox.
You might want to store the contact information in another table or file if yourorganization requires further processing of the information in another format.You might also want to log the information outside the system tables if you wantto test the information output by the contact process before saving it to thesystem tables.
c. If you selected Log into Other Destination, use the Log to drop-down list tospecify a table or file.
If you select File, you see the Specify Output File window, where you specify thetype of file you want to write the output to, its file name, and corresponding datadictionary.
9. Specify the fields that you want to output to contact history by selecting fields fromthe Candidate Fields list, and moving them to the Fields to Output list using theAdd>> button. You can also used derived fields for Candidate Fields.
Remove fields from the Fields to Output list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
If desired, re-order the fields in the Fields to Log list by selecting a field and clickingUp1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
You can automatically find matching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exactmatches for the Table Field names are automatically added to the Field to Log list.If there are multiple matching fields, the first match is taken.
10. Select an option to specify how updates to the output file or table are handled:
Version 8.5.0 231
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• Append to Existing Data — append the new contact information to the end ofthe table or file. If you select this option for a delimited file, labels will not beexported as the first row. This is the best practice for database tables.
• Replace All Records — remove any existing data from the table or file, andreplace it with the new contact information.
11. To customize the information that will be written to contact history, click MoreOptions.
The Contact History Logging Options window appears.
a. To avoid updating the contact history when this process runs, select CreateTreatments Only.
This option generates new treatments in the Treatments table without updating thecontact history, esssentially allowing for a delayed update to the history. Forexample, you might avoid writing contact history because you plan to remove invalidand duplicate addresses through post-processing. If you wait for the list of IDs towhich offers are actually sent, the resulting contact history will be smaller and moreaccurate.
Be aware that if you select this checkbox, other options in this window that no longerapply (because no contact history will be logged) are disabled.
By default, this checkbox is not selected, and contact history is updated when theprocess is run. For more information about logging contact history, see ContactHistory and Response Tracking.
b. To generate new treatments with the same package ID as in the most recentprocess run, select Use Last Package ID.
All offers given in the same contact process to an individual are considered to be asingle "package"; by default, Use Last Package ID is not selected, which specifiesthat each package is assigned a unique ID for each production run of the contactprocess.
If you selected Create Treatments Only to prevent the customer history from beingupdated, you might also select this checkbox to ensure that the package ID from theprior run is assigned to each set of offers, which links the offers to the existingcontact history.
c. Select the audience level at which you are tracking contact history from theTracking Audience Level drop-down list.
d. Enter the date on which the people in the contact list will be contacted in theContact Date field. You can also click to select the date from a calendar. If youdo not enter a date in this field, Campaign uses the flowchart run date.
e. Enter a status code for tracking, using the Contact Status Code drop-down list.
f. Select and move fields to and from the Candidate Fields and the Fields to Loglist using the Add>>, <<Remove, Match>>, Up1, and Down1 buttons in thesame way as you did to select fields on the Log tab.
g. Click Close when you have finished specifying additional fields to log.
You are returned to the Log tab of the process configuration dialog.
232 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
12. (Optional) To clear some or all existing contact history and associated responsehistory entries prior to the next run of the contact process, click Clear History.
Clear History permanently deletes contact and response history records fromthe system tables. This data is not recoverable.
13. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
14. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1760001
ScheduleThe Schedule process is not related to the Unica Scheduler. The Scheduler starts aflowchart even if it is not running, while the Schedule process in a flowchart worksonly if the flowchart is running. You should not use the Scheduler to schedule aflowchart that uses the Schedule process.
Use the Schedule process to initiate a process, series of processes, or an entireflowchart. A Schedule process is active for a defined period of time. During that time,specified events might occur that cause subsequent connected processes to beginexecution. The most common use of the Schedule process is to control timing of theentire flowchart.
You can configure a Schedule process to define the total scheduling period by settingup a time limit in days, hours, and minutes starting from when the process beginsexecuting.
Scheduling options are both fine-grained and flexible:
• You can schedule a process to run in a wide variety of ways, including repetitively,by trigger, by calendar, and so on.
• You can combine multiple scheduling options, such as scheduling the process to runevery Monday at 9:00 a.m., but also to run whenever it is triggered by a specificevent (such as a hit on the Web site).
• You can schedule a batch process, for example, to run late at night when it will notcause interfere with daytime jobs.
There are no predetermined limits on the number of options you can use simultaneouslyin scheduling a flowchart, providing that the selections do not actively conflict. (Forexample, you cannot schedule a flowchart to run both "Once Only" and "EveryMonday.")
Version 8.5.0 233
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
In general, a process runs only when all of its inputs have run successfully (that is,when all processes connected to the current process have run, even if the dependencyis only temporal). However, when multiple schedule inputs exist within a branch, theprocess will run whenever any one of its inputs completes (an "or" rather than an "and"of its inputs).
A contact process with tracking enabled contains an inherent schedule. Using aSchedule process in the middle of a flowchart is an advanced feature. Make sure youare getting the desired behavior and correct results.
If the Schedule process in your flowchart tells the flowchart to run before a previousrun is complete, Campaign holds the request until the previous run is finished. Onlyone run can be held in this manner. In certain cases, this might mean that theflowchart does not run as many times as you expect.
For example, if your flowchart takes two hours to run, and you have a Schedule processthat tries to trigger three runs that are only 10 minutes apart, Campaign will start the firstrun. When the Schedule process attempts to start the second run, Campaign will queueit. When the Schedule process attempts to start the third run, Campaign will ignore it.When the first run is finished, Campaign will start the second run. The third run willnever start.
N17C0001
To configure a Schedule process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, double-click the Schedule process in the flowchart
workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
2. On the Schedule tab, specify the scheduling conditions:
a. Specify a value for Total Schedule Period by entering the appropriate values inthe Days, Hours, and Minutes fields. The total schedule period is the total timeover which the Schedule process is to be active. By default, the total scheduleperiod is set to 30 days.
b. Select a run frequency from the Schedule to Run drop-down list, to specifyexactly when the Schedule process will activate subsequent connectedprocesses.
• If you select the Once Only option, the flowchart will run exactly once,regardless of what other schedule options have been added. If any othervalue is selected, then the scheduling options are connected as ORstatements and the Schedule process kicks off any process to which it isconnected when any option is satisfied.
• The first option that is satisfied will begin the Schedule run. If Schedule ToRun is the only option enabled and the setting is Once Only, the processruns immediately (unless a delay or user authorization has been enabled).
234 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
• The Hours and Minutes fields enable you to specify the time at which youwant the schedule to run. The time entry form is based on a 24 hour clock(also referred to as "military time"). In other words, 9 hours 30 minutes is9:30 a.m., and 22 hours 45 minutes is 10:45 p.m. Because the time base is24 hours, there is no need to designate a.m. or p.m.
3. If you select Custom Run from the Schedule to Run drop-down list, the CustomRun options become enabled. Specify whether the schedule runs at a particulartime or times, or based on inbound triggers, by selecting the Run On Timecheckbox and/or the Run On Trigger(s) checkbox. For more details about triggers,see the Campaign Administrator's Guide.
These choices are not mutually exclusive: you can choose to use triggers inconjunction with scheduled times.
• If you choose Run On Time, you must specify one or more dates and times.Multiple entries must be separated by commas. Click Calendar to access theCalendar feature for choosing dates and times.
• If you choose Run On Trigger(s) you must specify one or more triggers.
The named trigger(s) must be defined using Tools > Stored Triggers for theSchedule process to be fully configured. Enter the name of each trigger that canactivate this Schedule process. Separate multiple triggers with commas. Thetrigger name can contain any characters except commas. A trigger name doesnot have to be unique. You can use the same trigger in multiple campaigns orflowcharts and activate them all at the same time.
4. Specify any Delay and Authorization settings by selecting the Wait for UserAuthorization Before Each Run checkbox and/or the Delay Period Before EachRun checkbox.
These choices are not mutually exclusive: you can choose either or both.
• If you choose Wait for User Authorization Before Each Run, a prompt for userauthorization will appear each time any other schedule conditions are satisfied,and the Schedule process will not activate unless specific authorization isprovided. If you specify this option, it takes precedence over any other scheduleindicators; the process will not start unless authorization is given.
When a flowchart is running with a client attached, user authorization canonly occur through that client. If no client is attached, any user withread/write privileges for the campaign can authorize it to continue.
• If you choose Delay Period Before Each Run , you must specify the amount oftime to wait after a schedule condition has been satisfied before the processruns, using the Days, Hours, and Minutes fields. This delay applies to all otherspecified schedule options. For example, if a Schedule process is configured torun at 9:00 a.m. on Monday morning with a delay of one hour, subsequentprocesses will begin to run at 10:00 a.m.
Version 8.5.0 235
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
5. (Optional) Specify triggers to send after the Schedule run is completed by selectingthe Send Trigger(s) After Each Run checkbox and specifying one or more triggers.
If you select the Send Trigger(s) After Each Run checkbox, Campaign runs one ormore triggers each time the Schedule process is activated. An outbound triggerexecutes a command line, which can be a batch file or a script file. The namedtrigger(s) must be defined using Tools > Stored Triggers. If you specify multipletrigger names, they must be separated by commas.
6. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
7. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• To add a new process to a flowchart
• To connect two processes
• To use the Calendar tool in the Schedule process
• Scheduling based on triggers
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N17D0001
To use the Calendar tool in the Schedule processThe Calendar tool is available from the Schedule process configuration dialog if youselect Custom Run from the Schedule to Run drop-down list.
It is the same as the Calendar tool elsewhere in Campaign except that it allows you toselect the time as well as the date.
1. On the Schedule tab of the Schedule process configuration dialog, click Calendar.This button is only enabled if you have selected Custom Run from the Schedule toRun drop-down list.
The Calendar tool appears. The current date and time are already selected bydefault.
2. Specify the date you want the flowchart to run or start:
• Click the date on the displayed month, or
• Change the month, year, and time using the Month drop-down list
• Change the year using the up and down arrows.
3. Specify the time by entering the desired time in the Run Time field, using the formathh:mm, followed by an a.m. or p.m. designation.
4. Click Apply to enter the specified date and time, leaving the Calendar window open,or click OK to enter the specified date and time and close the Calendar window.
236 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
Leaving the Calendar window open allows you to easily enter multiple date and timeselections.
N17E0001
Scheduling based on triggersThe Schedule process can work with triggers in the following ways:
• Running on triggers
• Sending triggers after each run
• Using triggers with other scheduling optionsN1820001
To configure a Schedule process to run on a trigger1. On the Schedule tab of the Schedule process configuration dialog, select Custom
Run from the Schedule to Run drop-down list.
The Custom Run features become enabled.
2. In the Run On Trigger(s) field, enter the name of each trigger that can activate thisSchedule process. Separate multiple triggers with commas.
• The trigger name can contain any characters except commas.
• A trigger name does not have to be unique. You can use the same trigger inmultiple campaigns or flowcharts and activate them all at the same time.
N17F0001
Running on triggersWhen you select Custom Run from the Schedule to Run drop-down list, the Run OnTrigger(s) option is available. Enable this option to specify one or more inboundtriggers that activate the Schedule process.
If you enable Run on Trigger(s), you must specify one or more triggers. The namedtrigger(s) must be defined using Tools > Stored Triggers for the Schedule process tobe fully configured.
An inbound trigger is an external event that will automatically set a flowchart or acampaign in motion. A trigger can be anything that you define; for example, clicking ona Web site link, receiving an email message, a telemarketer’s response indicator,completion of a database upload, or any other defined event.
The Run On Trigger(s) option uses the IBM Unica application unica_actrg(includedwith your Campaign installation) to run. To understand how Run On Trigger worksbehind the scenes, it is helpful to look at an example.
N1830001
Example: Run on TriggerAn online retailer has a cross-sell campaign that runs on a trigger, so that when acustomer makes a purchase, it triggers cross-sell offers.
Specifically, when the customer makes a purchase:
Version 8.5.0 237
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• The Web site runs the unica_actrg executable, passing the campaign code and thetrigger name (web_purchase).
• The Campaign listener checks that the campaign is active and the trigger nameexists, then runs the Schedule process, and the campaign flowchart is triggered.
For more details about triggers, see the Campaign Administrator's Guide.N1800001
Sending triggers after each runAn outbound trigger executes a command line, which can be a batch file or a script file.You can have Campaign run one or more triggers each time the Schedule processactivates the trigger names in the Send Trigger(s) After Each Run field. If you specifymultiple trigger names, they must be separated by commas.
This function allows you to send an outbound trigger to an executable file. The full pathand the name of the file must be defined in the Stored Trigger Definitions window. Eachtime the Schedule process is activated, Campaign runs the specified executable file.
N1810001
Using triggers with other scheduling optionsTriggers can be used in conjunction with any other scheduling options or alone. Used incombination, you can, for example, set up a flowchart to run every Monday at 9:00 a.m.as well as every time someone clicks on an internet banner advertisement.
If, for example, you have scheduled the flowchart to Run On Trigger(s) based on hitson a Web site, and you also specify a Delay Period Before Each Run, the flowchartwill not begin until both the event (the Web "hit") occurs and the delay period hasexpired.
N1770001
SnapshotUse the Snapshot process to capture a list of IDs and associated data, and export themto a table or a file.
To associate or track offers with the list, use a Mail List or Call List process. To makesure that duplicate rows are not exported, use an Extract process, then snapshot theresults.
N1840001
To configure a Snapshot process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Snapshot process is connected to one
or more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by theSnapshot process.
All the cells that you select as input cells must have the same audience level.
2. Double-click the Snapshot process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. Click the Snapshot tab.
238 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Run processes
a. From the Input drop-down list, specify the input cells to use as the data sourcefor the snapshot.
If the Snapshot process is not connected to a process that provides output cells,there will be no cells to select from in the Input drop-down list. The MultipleCells option in the drop-down list is only available if the input process generatesmultiple cells.
b. From the Export To drop-down list, specify a table or file to which the Snapshotoutput will be written.
You can test the Snapshot process by running the process with output exportedto a temporary file that you can review.
• If the table that you want to use does not appear in the list, or if you want tooutput to an unmapped table, select Database Table. You see the SpecifyDatabase table window, where you specify the table and database names.User variables are supported in the table name you specify here.
• If you select File from the Export To drop-down list, you see the SpecifyOutput File window, where you specify the type of file you want to write theoutput to, its file name, and corresponding data dictionary.
c. Select an option to specify how updates to the output file or table are handled:
• Append to Existing Data — append the new information to the end of thetable or file. If you select this option for a delimited file, labels will not beexported as the first row. This is a best practice for database tables.
• Replace All Records — remove any existing data from the table or file, andreplace it with the new information.
• Update Records — (available only if you are exporting to a table) all fieldsspecified for snapshot are updated with the values from the current run of theprocess.
• Create New File — (available only if you are exporting to a file). This optionis selected by default if you are exporting to a file. Each time you run theprocess, a new file is created with "_1," "_2" and so on, appended to thefilename.
4. Specify the fields that are written out by the Snapshot process.
a. Select the fields that you want to include in your output from the CandidateFields list.
You can use Campaign Generated Fields by expanding the list of CampaignGenerated Fields, or use derived fields by clicking the Derived Fields button. Selectmultiple fields at one time using Ctrl+Click or a contiguous range of fields usingShift+Click .
b. Move selected fields to the Fields to Snapshot list by clicking Add>>.
c. Remove fields from the Fields to Snapshot list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
Version 8.5.0 239
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
d. If you selected a table as the snapshot destination, the fields in that table appearin the Export Fields list under the Table Field column. You can automaticallyfind matching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exact matches for the tablefield names are automatically added to the Export Fields list. If there aremultiple matching fields, the first match is taken. You can manually modify thepairings by clicking <<Remove or Add>>.
e. If desired, re-order the fields in the Fields to Snapshot list by selecting a fieldand clicking Up1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
To view the values in a field, select the field and click Profile.
5. To specify that records with duplicate IDs are skipped, or specify the order in whichrecords are output, click More.
You see the Advanced Settings window.
a. To specify that any records with duplicate IDs are skipped, select the SkipRecords with Duplicate IDs checkbox, and choose the criteria that Campaignwill use to decide which record to retain if duplicate IDs are returned. Forexample, you can select MaxOf and Household_Income to specify that whenduplicate IDs are returned, Campaign exports only the ID with the highesthousehold income.
This option only removes duplicates within the same input cell. Your snapshotdata can still contain duplicate IDs if the same ID appears in multiple input cells.If you want to remove all duplicate IDs, you must use a Merge or Segmentprocess upstream of the Snapshot process to purge duplicate IDs or createmutually-exclusive segments.
b. To specify that the snapshot output is ordered in some way, select the Order Bycheckbox, the field to sort by, and the sort order. For example, you can selectLast_Name and Ascending to specify that the list of IDs is sorted by last namein ascending order.
6. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings window.
The duplicate ID skipping and sort order that you have specified is displayed belowthe Fields to Snapshot list on the Snapshot tab.
7. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
8. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart. You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
240 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Optimization processes
Related Topics• To add a new process to a flowchart
• To connect two processes
• Audience levels
• Specifying an output file or table for contact logging
• Profiling fields
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N12E0001
Optimization processesCampaign provides the following optimization processes:
• Model
• Response
• Score
• TrackN1860001
ModelUse the Model process to create a run-time model file, which you can use for real-timeor batch scoring. It automates the creation of a response model that can be used toscore customers or prospects to determine the candidates most likely to respond.
Typically, you set up the Model process in your flowchart to take input from two cells,one representing the responders (contacts who reacted positively or took some actionupon receiving an offer or communication), and one representing the non-responders(contacts who took no action).
For example, you could use two Select processes, one selecting the people who werecontacted with an offer, and the other selecting the responders. Then, use a Mergeprocess to exclude the responders so that you have a list of non-responders. Connectthe Merge output and the "responders" Select output to your Model process to providethe non-responder and responder cells for the model.
In another scenario, you could use a Select process to select all contacts for an offer,then use a Segment process to segment that cell into responders and non-responders.
N18A0001
To configure a Model process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Model process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the Modelprocess.
2. Double-click the Model process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
Version 8.5.0 241
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
3. On the Source tab, select your responder and non-responder cells from theResponder and Non-Responder drop-down lists. The drop-down lists arepopulated with input cells to the Model process; they are empty if you have noinputs to the process.
Both input cells must have the same audience level.
4. From the Variables to be Used for Modeling list, select the variables to be used bythe Model process during model generation. You can select all variables (by clickingUse All) and let the Model process decide which set of inputs are most effective formodeling. However, by eliminating variables that do not add value to the model (forexample, variables containing the same value for all records or different values forall records), you can speed up the automatic variable selection process.
If you are in doubt as to the predictive value of a variable, include it and let theModel process decide whether it should be used.
You can also use derived fields in the configuration of a model.
5. On the Method tab, used the Best Model options to choose how the data miningalgorithms should arrive at the best model: based on a specified length of time, orfrom among a specified number of candidate models.
• Best Model In – (Default) Allows you to specify a time limit for modeling. TheModel process retains the best models built in the time period that you specify.The default is three hours.
• Best Models Among – Allows you to specify the number of models to build.The Model process will retain the best of these models. The default is 20.
6. Select the type of modelling that will be done by choosing an algorithm from theAlgorithm to Use drop-down list. You can select one, several, or all.
Selecting All Algorithms (the default) will result in a more accurate model, but itmight take longer.
7. Set the maximum number of models to keep by entering any positive integer in theMax. # of Models to Keep field. The default is five. Each of the top models aresaved by appending a pound sign (#) to the end of the specified filename. If morethan one model is kept, an index is appended to the base filename, indicating therank of the model.
The more models you elect to keep, the more disk space is required to save thecorresponding information.
8. In the Model File Name field, specify a the absolute pathname for the model filethat is to be created, or click Browse to navigate to a file. Once you run the processit will generate a NAME.rtm model file, which you can use for scoring with the Scoreprocess.
9. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
242 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Optimization processes
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
10. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1870001
ResponseThe Response process tracks the responses of customers who were contacted in acontact process, such as Mail List or Call List. Based on rules that you define duringprocess configuration, the Response process evaluates which responses areconsidered valid, and how they are credited back to campaigns or offers. The output ofthe Response process is written to several response history system tables, where thedata can be accessed for analysis using Campaign performance and profitabilityreports.
In its simplest form, the Response process can appear in its own flowchart connected toa Select process (and optionally a Segment process). In such a flowchart, the Selectprocess selects IDs from a mapped table containing data about responders and theirresponse actions. These IDs are segmented by the Segment process into meaningfulgroups, and finally passed to a Response process, where response tracking rules areapplied and output is written to response history tables.
A Response process is tightly aligned with its corresponding contact process, in whichthe responders now being tracked were possibly members of cells targeted withparticular offers. Therefore, before you can configure a Response process, you must:
• Know the audience level of your contact list and ensure that contact history andresponse history system tables for each audience level that you are contacting andtracking, have been mapped. This is usually done by your system administrators.
• Set up a separate Response process for each audience level in which you aretracking responders.
• Know the codes representing the response types that you want to track.
• Know what Campaign-generated codes (campaign, cell, offer, or treatment codes)were sent out to your contact list, so you can map them for tracking.
• Enable Campaign to create temp tables in the Campaign system tables database(i.e., the AllowTempTables property must be set to true).
N18B0001
To configure a Response process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Response process is connected to one
or more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by theResponse process.
2. Double-click the Response process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. Click the Source tab.
Version 8.5.0 243
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
a. Select your source cell(s) from the Input drop-down list. The source cellsoriginate from the mapped table in your data mart that holds your customerresponse information.
If you are using a delimited flat file as input to the Response process, you mustensure that all data types in the input files are mapped appropriately, as this isnot enforced by the Response process. Using a mismatched data type (forexample, having a treatment code mapped as “numeric” when theUA_Treatment.TreatmentCode field is a “string” type) causes a databaseerror on some databases (for example, system tables on DB2).
b. Select the date that you want to have associated with the records output by theResponse process, using the Response Date drop-down list. By default, a valueof "Today" is selected. You can also use derived fields to populate ResponseDate.
c. Select the Response Type Code that you want to track. The response typecodes are globally defined and available for all campaigns.
4. Click the Mapping to Treatments tab.
You see the Candidate Action Fields list, from which you choose the relevantfields to be tracked. In the Matched Offer/Treatment Fields list, theOffer/Treatment Attribute column lists all offer or treatment attributes in thesystem.
a. Select the fields that you want to track from the Candidate Action Fields list,and move them to the Matched Offer/Treatment Fields list using the Add>>button, so that the appropriate fields to match are paired.
You can select multiple fields at one time using Ctrl+Click or a contiguous range offields using Shift+Click. You can also used derived fields for Candidate ActionFields.
b. Remove fields from the Matched Offer/Treatment Fields list by selecting themand clicking <<Remove.
c. If desired, re-order the fields in the Matched Offer/Treatment Fields list byselecting a field and clicking Up1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
Unmapped fields, and fields for which values not available (or NULL) are notused for response attribution. For a treatment instance to receive responsecredit, all populated fields must match, except for controls, for which all codesare ignored.
5. Click the Log tab to specify the fields you want to log to response history.
Select fields from the Candidate Fields list and move them to the Fields to Log listusing the Add>> button. You can also used derived fields for Candidate Fields.
Remove fields from the Fields to Log list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
244 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Optimization processes
Re-order the fields in the Fields to Log list by selecting a field and clicking Up1 orDown1 to move it up or down in the list.
You can automatically find matching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exactmatches for the Table Field names are automatically added to the Fields to Loglist. If there are multiple matching fields, the first match is taken.
6. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
7. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
N1880001
ScoreUse the Score process to rate the likelihood of each customer making a purchase orresponding to an offer and to identify the best customers or prospects for the campaignthat you plan to run. Scoring is based on modeling results imported from a runtimemodel file (.rtm file) created by PredictiveInsight or the Model process in Campaign.
The Score process might be used in a flowchart in the following way: The flowchartbegins with a Schedule process which runs the flowchart every month. It is connected toa Select process which generates a list of customer IDs from data in the datamart. TheIDs are then sent to a Score process for scoring against a data model. Finally, theresults of the Score process are sent to a Snapshot process to be written out to aspreadsheet.
Version 8.5.0 245
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
N18C0001
To configure a Score process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Score process is connected to a
configured process whose output cell(s) will be used as input by the Score process.
2. Double-click the Score process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
3. Use the Input drop-down list to select a source cell containing the customer IDs thatyou want to score.
You cannot select multiple source cells to score.
4. In the Number of Models field, specify the number of models you want to create byentering an integer, or by using the up and down arrow buttons to increase ordecrease the count.
The Parameters For drop-down list will contain as many models as youspecified in the Number of Models field, named Model 1, Model 2, Model 3, andso on. If you change the number of models, the models listed in the ParametersFor drop-down list automatically change.
5. For each model that you are scoring, specify a Score Field Name and a ModelFile. Use the Parameters For drop-down list to select each model that you need toconfigure.
6. In the Score Field Name field, type the name of the field where you want thescoring results stored for that model. The default name is scoreN_1 .
If you type MYSCORE in the field and there is a single output field defined in thespecified model, the score field name will be MYSCORE. If there are multipleoutputs, the score field names will be MYSCORE_1, MYSCORE_2, MYSCORE_3,and so on.
When Campaign displays the list of available fields, the score fields will appear as ifthey belong to a table.
7. In the Model File field, enter the full path and filename of the model file that you willbe using to score the customer IDs.
Enter the full path and filename of the model you want to use, or click Browse toevoke a standard Windows file selection window.
8. Click Match Variables Names to match variable names with fields from the table inthe input source. The Match Variable Names window appears.
For customers to be scored properly, you must ensure that you can match thevariables used by the model with corresponding fields in the dataset to be scored.For example, if the model uses an average_balance variable, you must match thatvariable with a field containing average balance in the dataset to be scored.
a. Select fields in the Available Fields list that match with fields in the dataset, andmove them to the Matched Variables list using the Add>> button.
246 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Optimization processes
You can match identical field names automatically by clicking Match. This willoverride any manual matching.
You can also create derived fields by clicking Derived Fields.
You must match all the variables in the Matched Variables List to configure theScore process. Variable names need not match the field names, but the datatypes (numeric or string) must match.
b. When you have finished matching variable names, click OK.
The Match Variable Names window closes and you are returned to the Score tabin the process configuration dialog.
9. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
10. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
N1890001
TrackUse the Track process to update the contact statuses or additionally tracked fields forexisting records in contact history.
The Track process can only update existing rows in contact history; it cannot createnew rows.
For example, if records were initially written to contact history with a contact status of"Proposed," you can use the Track process to later update records in contact historythat were actually contacted, with a contact status of "Contacted." Or, for example, if allcontacts who were sent a direct mail were written to contact history with a contactstatus of "Contacted" and you subsequently received a list of undeliverable mailings,you could update individuals on that list with contact statuses of "Undeliverable."
N18D0001
To configure a Track process1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, ensure that your Track process is connected to one or
more configured processes whose output cells will be used as input by the Trackprocess.
2. Double-click the Track process in the flowchart workspace.
The process configuration dialog appears.
Version 8.5.0 247
B - IBM Unica Campaign Processes
3. Click the Source tab.
a. Select your source cell(s) from the Input drop-down list.
b. Select the contact date that you want to have associated with the recordsupdated by the Track process, using the Contact Date drop-down list. Bydefault, a value of "Today" is selected. You can also use derived fields topopulate Contact Date.
c. Select the Contact Status Code that you want to associate with the records thatyou are updating in contact history.
4. Click the Mapping to Treatments tab.
You see the Candidate Action Fields list, from which you choose the relevant fieldto match to the Treatment Code. The treatment code will uniquely identify the row incontact history to update. Select the field you want to use for matching from theCandidate Action Fields list, and move it to the Matched Offer/Treatment Fieldslist using the Add>> button, so that it is paired with Treatment Code.
5. Click the Log tab to specify how you want to update contact history from thisprocess.
You must have the appropriate permissions to enable or disable updates tocontact history tables.
a. To update contact history in the system tables, check the Log to ContactHistory Table checkbox.
a. Only if you have chosen Log to Contact History Tables, to write additionalfields to contact history, click Additional Fields .
You see the Contact History Logging Options window.
Select and move fields to and from the Candidate Fields and the Fields to Log listusing the Add>>, <<Remove , Match>>, Up1, and Down1 buttons in the same wayas you did to select fields on the Log tab. Unmatched fields are not updated.
Click Close when you have finished specifying additional fields to log.
b. To additionally, or instead, log to another destination than the system tables,check the Log into Other Destination checkbox to enable writing to analternate table or file.
If you select File, you see the Specify Output File window, where you specify thetype of file you want to write the output to, its file name, and corresponding datadictionary.
a. Only if you have chosen Log into Other Destination, specify the fields that youwant to output by selecting fields from the Candidate Fields list, and movingthem to the Fields to Output list using the Add>> button.
You can also used derived fields for Candidate Fields.
Remove fields from the Fields to Output list by selecting them and clicking<<Remove.
248 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Optimization processes
If desired, re-order the fields in the Fields to Log list by selecting a field and clickingUp1 or Down1 to move it up or down in the list.
You can automatically find matching fields by clicking Match>>. Fields with exactmatches for the Table Field names are automatically added to the Field to Log list.If there are multiple matching fields, the first match is taken.
b. Only if you have chosen Log into Other Destination, select an option to specifyhow updates to the output file or table are handled:
• Append to Existing Data — append the new contact information to the endof the table or file. If you select this option for a delimited file, labels will notbe exported as the first row. This is the best practice for database tables.
• Replace All Records — remove any existing data from the table or file, andreplace it with the new contact information.
6. (Optional) Click the General tab to assign a name and/or notes to the process.
The name appears on the process in the flowchart. The notes appear when youmouse over the process in the flowchart.
7. Click OK.
The process is configured and appears enabled in the flowchart.You can test theprocess to verify that it returns the results you expect.
Related Topics• To add a new process to a flowchart
• To connect two processes
• Choosing data sources for processes
• Specifying an output file or table for contact logging
• To run a process
• Testing flowcharts
Version 8.5.0 249
N109DA
C Working with IBM UnicaCampaignProcesses
■ About processes■ Types of processes■ Working with processes■ Choosing data sources for processes■ Choosing in-database processing for processes■ Creating queries in processes■ Profiling fields■ Specifying an output file or table for contact logging■ Changing the seed for random selection■ Skipping duplicate IDs in process output■ To use the Calendar tool
N18E0001
About processesProcesses are the building blocks of flowcharts, which you configure to performparticular tasks to achieve the outputs you want. For example, you use the Mergeprocess to merge two distinct audience groups, or use the contact processes (Call Listor Mail List) to write out the results of an entire campaign.
Tasks are usually accomplished using processes that work with cells. Cells are lists ofidentifiers of marketing message recipients (such as customer or prospect IDs).Generally, each process in a flowchart takes one or more cells as input, transforms thedata, and produces one or more cells as output.
The processes available to you in Campaign are visible on the flowchart processpalette—the space that you use for creating a flowchart and working with processes.
The different types of processes are distinguished by color: data manipulationprocesses are shown in blue, run processes in red, and optimization processes ingreen.
To create a flowchart, you move processes of the required type from the process paletteto the flowchart workspace, and connect and configure them.
N18F0001
250 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Types of processes
Types of processesCampaign processes are divided into three types by function, which are distinguishedby color in the flowchart process palette:
• Data manipulation processes - blue.
• Run processes - red.
• Optimization processes - green.
A specialized set of run processes called "contact processes" generates contact lists.
In addition to the Campaign processes described in this section, Interact, Optimize,and eMessage provide additional processes for use in campaign flowcharts. See thedocumentation for these products for information about the processes that theyprovide.
N1930001
Contact processesThe Mail List and Call List processes are called contact processes (in previousreleases, these were called "contact-style processes" (CSPs)). These processesgenerate contact lists.
The Mail List and Call List processes are also run processes.
Related Topics• Mail List
• Call List
N1940001
Data manipulation processesYou use data manipulation processes to select customer IDs from your data source andwork with those IDs in various ways to create meaningful groups or target audiences.
Data manipulation processes allow you to perform tasks such as selecting customersbased on a set of criteria, merging lists of customers together for inclusion or exclusion,segmenting customers into meaningful groups, sampling for test or control groups, orspecifying target audiences for your campaign.
The data manipulation processes are:
• Audience
• Extract
• Merge
• Sample
• Segment
Version 8.5.0 251
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• SelectN1960001
Run processesOnce you have built your campaign to select the audience you want, you need to outputthe results in a usable way using the run processes. Run processes control the runningof the flowchart and trigger actual customer contact.
Run processes control the actual execution of completed campaigns, which includes themanagement and output of contact lists, the treatment of target audiences, the trackingof responses and contacts, the logging of data, and the scheduling of campaign orsession runs.
The run processes are:
• Call List
• Create Seg
• Cube
• Mail List
• Schedule
• Snapshot
The Mail List and Call List processes are also referred to as contact processes.
N1970001
Optimization processesOptimization processes let you fine tune your campaign to maximize effectiveness. Youuse optimization processes to generate scores to refine audience selection. They allowyou to track contacts and responses, and use the results of predictive modeling fromCampaign or from data mining products like PredictiveInsight to refine audienceselection and maximize ROI. Optimization processes can also provide the ability todetermine the most effective campaign, offer, and channel across your entireorganization to use for contacting each individual prospect.
The optimization processes are:
• Model
• Response
• Score
• TrackN1300001
252 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Working with processes
Working with processesCampaign allows you to easily create campaign flowcharts by visually manipulatingprocesses. You can create, connect, configure, and run your processes, experimentingwith different flowchart designs. The following section describes the tasks that you canperform with processes.
• Adding new processes to flowcharts
• Copying, cutting and pasting processes
• Pasting processes from the template library
• Moving processes
• Deleting processes
• Connecting processes
• Configuring and editing processes
• Running processesN12F0001
To add a new process to a flowchartYou add a process to a flowchart by selecting the type of process you want from thepalette, moving it to the flowchart workspace, configuring it, and making connections toand from it to other processes in the flowchart.
In addition to creating a new process and configuring it, you can also copy an existingconfigured process, or paste a template from the template library. Templates containone or more configured processes and connections.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. In the process palette, click the process that you want to add to your flowchart.
The process is highlighted.
3. Click the location within the workspace where you want to place the process.
The process that you selected is added to the workspace. Newly added processesare gray until they are correctly configured, at which time they are displayed in colorbased on their type (data manipulation processes are blue, run processes are red,and optimization processes are green).
If you place one or more process boxes on top of another process box in theflowchart workspace, they will appear stacked. Click on the top process box andmove if you want to see the next process box in the stack.
4. Right-click the process to view the menu listing actions you can perform on theprocess.
N1980001
Version 8.5.0 253
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To copy and paste a processCopying an already-configured process can save time when you build flowcharts. Youcan also cut a configured process, save the configuration to the clipboard, then pastethe process elsewhere on the workspace, or in another flowchart.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. From the processes that are already in the workspace, click the process that youwant to copy.
You can Shift+Click to select multiple processes, drag the mouse to select agroup of processes, or use Ctrl+A to select all the processes in the flowchart.
3. Click the Copy icon.
You can also select Copy from the context menu, or press Ctrl+C.
4. Click the Paste icon.
You can also click Paste from the context menu, or press Ctrl+V.
A copy of the process appears in the workspace.
5. Click on and drag the copied process to the desired area of your flowchart.N19D0001
To cut a process1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. From the processes that are already in the workspace, click the process that youwant to cut.
You can Shift+Click to select multiple processes, drag the mouse to select agroup of processes, or use Ctrl+A to select all the processes in the flowchart.
3. Click the Cut icon on the Flowchart toolbar.
You can also click Cut from the context menu, or press Ctrl+X.
The process is removed from the flowchart and saved on the clipboard. You can thenpaste this process back into the current flowchart or into another flowchart.
N1990001
To paste processes from the template libraryUsing templates from the template library can save time when you build flowcharts.Templates contain one or more configured processes and connections.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
254 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Working with processes
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. Click the Options icon and select Stored Templates.
You see the Stored Templates window, listing the available templates.
3. Select the template you want to paste into your flowchart from the Items List.
4. Click Paste Template.
The process or processes in the template you selected are pasted into theflowchart.
If one or more process boxes are pasted on top of another process box in theflowchart workspace, they will appear stacked. Click the top process box and moveit if you want to see the next process box in the stack.
N19A0001
To move a processYou can move any process in a flowchart you are editing by dragging it to a differentlocation on the workspace.
Campaign allows you to position processes on top of each another; however, if youhave a large flowchart with many processes, it may be easier to use the zoomfunctionality so that you can see all processes, instead of overlapping them.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. In the workspace, click and drag the process that you want to move to its newlocation.
When you release the mouse, the process is moved to the new position. Existingconnections to and from the process you are moving remain, and are redrawn forthe new location.
N19B0001
To delete a processAs you design and build flowcharts you might need to remove processes that you haveadded.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. In the workspace, right-click the process that you want to delete, and select Deletefrom the context menu.
You can select more than one process at the same time by holding down theShift key as you select using the mouse.
You see a confirmation message asking if you want to remove the selected items.
3. Click OK.
Version 8.5.0 255
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
4. The selected process(es) are removed from the workspace. Any connections to andfrom the processes are also deleted from the flowchart.
N1580001
To connect two processesYou connect the processes in your flowchart to specify the direction of data flow and theorder in which processes are run. If you move processes within the workspace, existingconnections will remain, and will adjust to the moved process’s new location.Connections can be easily added or deleted.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. Move your cursor over the connection box in the process from which you want tocreate a connection.
The cursor changes to three downward arrows.
3. Click and drag a line to the process to which you want to make a connection.
The source process is highlighted. As you drag your cursor, the connecting line isdrawn from the source process.
4. Release the mouse anywhere over the destination process.
The source and destination process are connected with an arrow showing the directionof data flow. The source process will run before the destination process, and dataoutput from the source process can be available as input to the destination process.
If the destination process receives data from the source process, the connection isshown as a solid line. If the destination process does not receive data from thesource process but cannot run successfully until the source process has completed,the connection is shown as a dotted line.
N19E0001
To delete a connection between two processes1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. Click the connection that you want to delete.
3. Do one of the following:
• Right-click the connection, and select Delete from the context menu.
• Press the Delete key.
• Click the Cut icon on the Flowchart toolbar.
• Press Ctrl+X.
The connection is deleted.N19F0001
256 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Working with processes
Example: Process ConnectionsThe following flowchart is scheduled to run automatically each night. The dotted lineconnections between the Schedule process and three Select processes indicate that theSelect processes will not run until the Schedule process finishes running, but that nodata is passed from the Schedule process to the Select processes.
N1A00001
Configuring and editing processesA process cannot run until it has been configured. When you configure a process, youprovide Campaign important information about the process, such as the source of thedata the process will use, which IDs to work with, and what to do with the output of theprocess.
A best practice is to place the processes in your flowchart in the order in which they willbe executed when the campaign is run. Some processes must be connected beforethey are configured because they require input from a source process.
N19C0001
Version 8.5.0 257
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To access a process configuration window1. Within a campaign or session, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace.
2. Double-click the process that you want to configure. You can also right-click theprocess and select Process Configuration from the context menu.
You see the process configuration window for the process.
3. Enter information into the fields on each tab of the process configuration window.For assistance, click Help.
4. When you have finished entering the configuration details, click OK.
Correctly configured processes are displayed in color (the specific color reflects thetype of process). A gray process with its name in italics has a configuration error. Tofind out more information about the error, hold your mouse over the process todisplay a descriptive error message.
N15A0001
To run a processTo make sure that your configuration is successful and that the results are what youexpect, be sure to run each process as soon as you configure and connect.
When you run a process, any results from a previous run are lost.
1. Within a campaign, open a flowchart for editing.
You see the process palette and workspace with your configured process(es).
2. Click the process that you want to run.
If the process requires data from a source process, be sure that the source processhas already run successfully so that its data is available.
3. Click the Run icon and select Save and Run Selected Process. You can alsoright-click the process and select Save and Run Selected Process from thecontext menu.
Running only a process or a branch of a flowchart does not increment the RunID of a flowchart. When you run only a process or a branch, if contact historyrecords exist, you are prompted to choose run history options before you canproceed. For details, see About run history options.
4. When the process finishes running, click OK on the confirmation window.
The process displays a blue checkmark when it has run successfully. If there are errors,the process displays a red "X."
N11F0001
258 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Working with processes
About run history optionsYou see the Run History Options window only when you run a branch or processthat has already generated contact history for the current Run ID. If a new runinstance does not exist for a particular re-run branch or process, the Run HistoryOptions window does not appear.
Use the Run History Options window to choose how the new contact history yougenerate is written to the contact history table.
N1A10001
Run history options scenarioYou have a flowchart with two branches and two contact processes, A and B, bothconfigured to log to contact history.
You run the entire flowchart (from the top, using the Run Flowchart command) once.This creates a new Run ID (for example, Run ID = 1) and generates contact history forthis Run ID.
After this first successful run of the entire flowchart, you edit contact process A to give afollow-up offer to the same individuals who received the first offer. Therefore, you wantto re-run contact process A. The current Run ID is "1" and contact history already existsfor process A and Run ID=1.
When you select contact process A and click "Run Process," you see the Run HistoryOptions window. You can choose to leave the Run ID unchanged (Run ID=1) andreplace the existing contact history associated with this Run ID, or you can create a newrun instance (that is, increment the Run ID to 2), leave the contact history associatedwith Run ID=1 untouched and append new contact history associated with Run ID=2.
You are sending a follow-up offer and do not want to lose the contact history associatedwith the first offer, so you choose Create a new run instance. This changes the Run IDto "2" and appends contact history records for the same IDs who received the first offerto the contact history table.
If you now edit and run contact process B, you will not see a Run History Optionswindow, because the current Run ID = 2 and contact history associated with Run ID =2does not exist for contact process B. Running only contact process B will simplygenerate additional contact history records for Run ID = 2.
N1A20001
Run History Options window referenceThe Run History Options window contains the following options:
Option Description
Create a new run instance Re-run a specific branch or process of the flowchart using a new RunID. Append the new results, associated with the new Run ID, to thecontact history table. Existing contact history remains untouched.
Version 8.5.0 259
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Option Description
Replace the contact history of Re-use the previous Run ID and replace the contact history previouslythe previous run generated for that Run ID (only for the process or branch that is being
run). Contact history records that were previously generated for otherbranches or processes of the flowchart remain untouched.
Cancel Cancel the branch or process run and do nothing to existing contacthistory. The flowchart remains open in Edit mode.
You cannot replace contact history if associated response history exists. Therefore, ifyou selected Replace the contact history of the previous run and associatedresponse history records exist, you can choose one of two options:
• Click OK to clear the associated response history records as well as the contacthistory records. This is your only option if response history exists and you want toreplace the contact history from the previous run.
• Click Cancel to cancel clearing the contact history records. You can choose Createa new run instance instead, to create a new run instance to run the current contactprocess.
N13C0001
Choosing data sources for processesIn many processes, including Audience, Create Seg, Cube, Extract, Model, Response,Segment, and Select, you must specify a source of the data that the process will act on.The data source for a process might be an incoming cell, segment, table, or perhapsmultiple tables.
In most cases, you specify the data source for a process in the Input field on the firsttab of the configuration window, using the Input drop-down list.
N1A30001
To select an incoming cell, segment, or table asthe input to a processOn the first tab of the process configuration dialog, select the incoming cell, segment, ortable from the Input drop-down list. The Input drop-down list displays all the base tablescurrently mapped in the table catalog, along with their audience levels. If there is anincoming cell, then only those tables with the same audience level as the cell aredisplayed.
N1A40001
To select multiple tables as the input to a processYou can select more than one table as input to a process.
1. In the process configuration dialog, select Tables > Multiple Tables from the Inputdrop-down list.
260 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Choosing in-database processing for processes
If you select multiple tables, the tables must have the same audience level.
You can also click the ellipsis button. The Select Tables to Use window displays allthe base tables in the campaign’s table catalog.
2. Check the box next to each table that you want to select.
3. Click OK to return to the process configuration dialog. The Input field displays"Multiple Tables", which you can view by clicking the ellipsis button.
N1A50001
To map a new table for selecting as a sourceIn the process configuration dialog, select Tables > New Table from the Input drop-down list.
The New Table Definition window pre-selects the Base Record Table type. You map anew base table in a process configuration dialog in the same way that you map a tablefrom the Table Mappings dialog.
You must have the appropriate permissions to be able to map tables. For detailsabout mapping tables, see the Campaign Administrator’s Guide.
N1900001
Choosing in-database processing forprocesses
In-database processing is an option that you can turn on or off for your flowchartprocesses both globally, and for each flowchart.
In-database processing is not supported for all databases. Your Campaignadministrator can confirm whether this option is available for your data sources.
The in-database processing option determines:
• what operations are done at the database level or at the local Campaign serverlevel; and
• what happens to the results of operations.
In general, the in-database processing option improves flowchart performance bypreventing IDs from your database from being unnecessarily copied down to theCampaign server for processing. With in-database processing turned on, processingtasks such as sorting, joining, and merging of data are, whenever possible, done on thedatabase server rather than on the Campaign server, and output cells of processes arestored in temporary tables on the database server.
Version 8.5.0 261
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Depending on the logic required, some functions will still be performed on the Campaignserver, even with in-database processing turned on. For example, when Campaigncalculates a derived field, it first evaluates the derived field formula to see if any part ofthe calculation can be performed using SQL. If simple SQL statements can be used toperform the calculation, then the calculation can be done "in-database". If not, thentemporary tables are created on the Campaign server to handle the calculations andpersist the results from process to process within a flowchart.
In-database processing cannot be done if you have specified any limitations on theoutput cell size or if temporary tables are disabled for the process.
Processing of custom macros consisting of raw SQL statements is performed in-database, with the following limitations:
• All raw SQL custom macros must begin with select and must contain exactly onefrom in the rest of the text.
• For databases that support only insert into <TempTable> syntax, you must have atleast one base table mapped to the same data source at the same audience levelas the raw SQL custom macro. If the fields selected by the raw SQL custom macroare too large for the fields of the temp table, a runtime error will occur.
If you are using raw SQL with in-database processing, you must code the raw SQLto join with the temp table from the upstream process, otherwise, the results will notbe scoped by the results from the upstream process.
N1A60001
Turning in-database processing on or offThe in-database processing setting can be set:
• for each flowchart
• globally, for the entire system
A best practice for this option is to turn off the global setting, and set the option at theflowchart level.
N1A70001
To turn in-database processing on or off for aflowchartThe in-database processing option for an individual flowchart overrides the globalsetting.
1. From a flowchart page in Edit mode, click the Admin icon and select AdvancedSettings.
You see the Advanced Settings window.
2. Select the Use In-DB Optimization during Flowchart Run checkbox.
3. Click OK.
262 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Creating queries in processes
When you save and run the flowchart, in-database processing will be used whereverpossible.
N1A80001
To turn in-database processing on or off globallyTo turn in-database processing on or off globally, set the Campaign > partitions >
partition[n] > server > optimization > useInDbOptimization property onthe Configuration page to the appropriate value (TRUE or FALSE).
For information about using the Configuration page, see the Marketing PlatformAdministrator's Guide.
N1490001
Creating queries in processesWhen you configure particular processes, you can use queries to return specific datafrom your data sources. Campaign makes it easy for you to create queries using any ofthe following methods:
• Point & Click
• Text Builder
• Query Helper
• SQLN1AA0001
How queries are evaluated in CampaignprocessesQueries in Campaign processes are evaluated left to right using mathematical rules.
For example, the following statement:
[UserVar.1] < PDF < [UserVar.2]
is evaluated as:
([UserVar.1] < PDF) < [UserVar.2]
That is, the first part of the statement ([UserVar.1] < PDF) is evaluated as true or false(1 or 0), and the result is passed to the second statement:
[1 | 0 ] < [UserVar.2]
For the example to be evaluated as PDF greater than [UserVar.1] and less than[UserVar.2], you would need to construct the following query:
[UserVar.1] < PDF AND PDF < [UserVar.2]
This statement is equivalent to the following:
([UserVar.1] < PDF) AND (PDF < [UserVar.2])
N1700001
Version 8.5.0 263
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To create a query with Point & ClickThese instructions describe how to create a new query using the Point & Click featurein the process configuration dialog.
To edit an existing query, double-click any item in the query to select another value.Selecting a new item from the Select Based On drop-down list will remove the existingquery.
1. In a process that requires queries, such as Segment, Select, or Extract, access theprocess configuration dialog containing the query text box.
By default, the Point & Click query builder is displayed. Any existing queries areshown in the query text box.
2. As you click in each of the columns in the left text area (FieldName, Oper., Value,And/Or), the options that you can select for the selected column appear in the boxon the right.
• Click the Field Name column to see the list of Available Fields, including IBMUnica Campaign Generated Fields. You can also click Derived Fields... tocreate derived fields.
• Click the Oper. column to see the list of Operators;
• Click the Value column to see the possible values based on your selection fromField Name;
• Click the And/Or column to see AND and OR as Operators. Use this column tocreate multiple statements;
• Select the entire expression to see the actions you can perform For SelectedExpressions: Add, Remove, Clear all, Move Up, Move Down, Insert, and Delete.
3. Create your query by clicking in each column cell in the left text area, then double-clicking to make your selection from the list on the right. You can also click once,then click <-Use to move it to the left text box.
When you select a table field, you can click Profile to review the values of theselected field.
4. To check the syntax of the query, click Check Syntax. Checking the syntax of yourquery does not put any load on the database server.
Campaign displays a confirmation window that displays any found errors. Click OK.
5. To see the results of running the query, click Test Query.
Global suppressions and cell size limits are not applied in Test Query counts.Queries might also return non-normalized data. To obtain an accurate resultcount, perform a test run of the process.
A progress bar is displayed while the query is being tested. Click Cancel to stop thetesting.
264 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Creating queries in processes
When testing is complete, Campaign displays a confirmation window that displaysthe number of rows the query returned. (This number might be different when thecampaign is actually run.)
6. When you have fnished creating your query, click OK.N1710001
To create a query with Text BuilderThese instructions describe how to create a new query using the Text Builder feature inthe process configuration dialog.
To edit an existing query, edit the text of the query directly in the query text box.
1. In a process that requires queries, such as Segment, Select, or Extract, access theprocess configuration dialog containing the query text box.
By default, the Point & Click query builder is displayed. Any existing queries areshown in the query text box.
2. Click Text Builder.
The Point and Click query columns are replaced with a blank text box.
3. Choose an Input data source, and a data source to query from the Select BasedOn drop-down list.
The list of Available Fields is displayed based on your Select Based On choice.
4. Create your query by:
• Selecting the field or table name(s) from the Available Fields list and double-clicking to enter them in the query text box. You can also click once then click <-Use to move it to the query text box.
• Entering the required operators and values. To see the values of a selectedfield, you can click Profile.
Although you can enter field and table names directly in the query text box,selecting them from the list helps to avoid syntax errors.
5. To check the syntax of the query, click Check Syntax.
Campaign displays a confirmation window that displays any found errors. Click OK
Checking the syntax of your query does not put any load on the database server.
6. If you want to see the results of running the query, click Test Query.
Global suppressions and cell size limits are not applied in Test Query counts.Queries might also return non-normalized data. To obtain an accurate resultcount, perform a test run of the process.
A progress bar is displayed while the query is being tested. Click Cancel to stop thetesting.
Version 8.5.0 265
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
When testing is complete, Campaign displays a confirmation window that displaysthe number of rows the query returned. (This number might be different when thecampaign is run.)
7. When you have fnished creating your query, click OK.
The process configuration box closes and you are returned to the flowchart page inEdit mode.
N1A90001
To create a query using Query HelperThe Query Helper provides selectable operators and functions that you can combinewith available fields to build a query. The Query Helper can help you construct queriesin Campaign’s macro language or with custom macros.
1. In a process that requires queries, such as Segment, Select, or Extract, access theprocess configuration dialog containing the query text box.
By default, the Point & Click query builder is displayed. Any existing queries areshown in the query text box.
2. Click Text Builder.
The Point and Click query columns are replaced with a blank text box. The QueryHelper button is enabled.
3. Click Query Helper.
The Query Helper appears below the query text box. The Query Helper contains aset of buttons for inserting commonly-used operators, and a complete list of macros.
4. Create your query by:
a. Selecting the macro you want to use from the list of macros in the Query Helperand double-clicking to enter it in the query text box. When you select a macro,the Query Helper displays a brief description and the syntax of the selectedmacro.
If you select a custom macro, the description and syntax were created by theperson who wrote the macro.
b. Entering the required operators by typing or using the Query Helper buttons.
Although you can enter field and table names directly in the query text box,selecting them from the list helps to avoid syntax errors.
5. Continue creating your query using the Text Builder.
6. When you have finished creating your query, click Close.
The Query Helper closes.
7. Click OK to close the process configuration dialog.N16E0001
266 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Creating queries in processes
Creating queries using SQLIf you are an experienced SQL user, you can write your own SQL query or use SQLqueries created in other applications by copying and pasting them. Writing raw SQL isan advanced function of Campaign; users are responsible for correct syntax and queryresults.
Getting correct results when using raw SQL in a Select process (that is, the correctlist of audience IDs) requires the use of the <TempTable> token when in-DBoptimization is enabled and there is an input cell to the Select process. In addition,to significantly improve performance when Campaign processes very large tables,use the <TempTable> token even when not using in-DB optimization.
A SQL query must return a list of only the unique IDs as defined by the key on a basetable.
Your query should use the following syntax:
SELECT DISTINCT(<key1> [<key2>,...]) FROM <table> WHERE <condition>
ORDERBY <unique_id>
The query requests the database to perform the sorting and data deduplication. If youomit either the DISTINCT or ORDERBY clause, Campaign will still sort and deduplicatethe data on the application server, so you will still receive the correct results, but theperformance will likely be slower.
• If you have chosen to Select All Customer IDs, you can write raw SQL commandsto be run against records in a specified database before or after the Select processis executed.
• If you have chosen to apply select criteria to the customer IDs, in addition to theabove, you can also enable the use of raw SQL in the Query Builder when creatingyour select criteria. Otherwise, you can only use Unica Expressions and CustomMacros.
N1AB0001
Building raw SQL statements in CampaignIn processes which require queries, click Advanced on the query editing window toaccess the Advanced Settings features. The actual features will vary amongprocesses.
For example, in the Select process, you can use the Advanced Settings to create aquery using raw SQL or to execute pre- and/or post-processing SQL commands.
The Advanced Settings window includes two panes:
• Pre-processing — enter raw SQL to be processed before the query executes
• Post-processing — enter raw SQL to be processed after the query executes
This feature allows you to incorporate SQL procedures as part of the process run, andis useful in employing Campaign in efforts including ETL, routine mart updates, in-lineperformance tuning, and security functions.
You can use pre- and post-processing SQL statements in Advanced Settings to:
Version 8.5.0 267
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
• Run stored procedures in the database
• Create, drop, and recreate tables and indexes
• Grant or change privileges to other users or groups
• Organize multi-step database commands
• Run complex database routines, without having to use external scripts to connect tothe database
The SQL statements are run in the order in which they appear.
• Pre-Processing SQL statements are run before the query executes.
• Post-Processing SQL statements are run after the query executes.
They can be used with either raw SQL or standard processing in the Select processquery.
Raw SQL queries and in-database processingFor details about in-database processing with raw SQL queries, see About choosing in-database processing for processes.
N1AC0001
Using the TempTable and OutputTempTable tokens in raw SQLqueriesWhen you use a raw SQL query in a Select process with an input cell, behavior inCampaign is different depending on whether in-DB optimization is enabled or disabled.
When in-DB optimization is disabled, the list of IDs from the raw SQL query isautomatically matched against the ID list from the incoming cell so that the resulting listof IDs is a subset of the cell as expected. However, when in-DB optimization is enabled,Campaign expects the ID list generated from the Select process to be the final list, anddoes not automatically match this list against the ID list of any incoming cell. Therefore,when in-DB optimization is enabled, it is critical that the raw SQL query written for anintermediate Select process (in other words, a Select process with an input cell) usesthe <TempTable> token to properly join against the incoming cell. Not only does thisensure correct results, joining against the input cell also improves performance bypreventing extraneous processing for audience IDs that are not in the input cell.
For best performance, use the <TempTable> token even when not using in-DBoptimization. Using the <TempTable> token can significantly improve performance,especially when Campaign processes very large tables.
In addition, using the <OutputTempTable> token maintains in-DB optimization andprevents the audience IDs from being retrieved from the database back to theCampaign server.
N1AD0001
268 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Creating queries in processes
Example: Using the TempTable and OutputTempTable tokensAssume that you have a Select1 process that selects 10,000 customers who are “Gold”customers (for example, Indiv.AcctType = ‘Gold’). You then connect Select1 to a secondSelect process (“Select2”) using a raw SQL query:
Select p.CustID from Indiv p, <TempTable> where p.CustID =
<TempTable>.CustID group by p.CustID having sum(p.PurchAmt) > 500
This example selects customers the sum of whose purchases exceeds $500 and whoare in the input cell (in other words, customers who have a “Gold” account type).
In contrast, a raw SQL query omitting the <TempTable> token and join:
Select p.CustID from Purchases p group by p.CustID having
sum(p.PurchAmt) > 500
first calculates the sum of purchases for all customers in the Purchases table (whichcould be millions of customers) and then selects all customers the sum of whosepurchases exceed $500, regardless of whether they are “Gold” customers or not.
Therefore, for best performance, even if in-DB optimization is disabled, write your rawSQL queries using the <TempTable> token when there is an input cell.
For simplicity, this example does not use the <OutputTempTable> token, but tomaintain in-DB optimization and prevent the audience IDs from being retrieved from thedatabase back to the Campaign server, you must include the <OutputTempTable>token in your raw SQL query. For example:
Create table <OutputTempTable> as Select p.CustID from Purchases p,
<TempTable> where p.CustID = <TempTable>.CustID group by p.CustID
having sum(p.PurchAmt) > 500
N1AE0002
Referencing Extract tables in raw SQL queriesYou can reference an Extract table in downstream processes via raw SQL using the<Extract> token. Use this token to specify subsets of data for subsequent processing,which can improve performance when working with large tables.
The following example queries an Extract table to select the customer IDs of allcustomers whose account balance exceeds $1,000.
Select p.CUSTOMERID from USER_TABLE p, <Extract> where p.CUSTOMERID =
<Extract>.CUSTOMERID group by p.CUSTOMERID having sum(p.BALANCE) >
1000
For flowcharts containing multiple Extract processes, the <Extract> token alwaysrefers to the latest available Extract table.
After a Merge, the <Extract> token may or may not be valid. Test run theflowchart to determine if the token works as expected.
N1AF0001
To create a raw SQL query in the SQL Text Entry Area1. Enable the Select records with option in the Source tab of the Select process.
Version 8.5.0 269
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
2. Click Advanced.
The Advanced Settings window appears.
3. Enable Use Raw SQL for Record Selection.
4. Select the data source to query from the Database drop-down list.
5. Select the audience to target from the Audience Level drop-down list.
6. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings window.
7. Click inside the SQL text entry area.
8. Build a query by:
• Entering raw SQL in the SQL text entry pane
• Using the Query Helper
• Using Point & Click
If you click Point & Click, you will return to building a non-SQL queryexpression.
9. (Optional) Click Test Query.
Global suppressions and cell size limits are not applied in Test Query counts.Queries might also return non-normalized data. To obtain an accurate resultcount, perform a test run of the process.
10. When you have finished building and testing your query, click OK to close thewindow and save your configuration.
N1B00001
To pass multiple commands in a raw SQL statementYou can pass multiple commands in a raw SQL statement.
If your database allows multiple commands to be passed, you can enter as many validSQL commands as you need, with the following rules:
• Commands are separated with the appropriate delimiter;
• The last command must be a select command;
• This select command must select all the relevant fields required in defining youraudience level in the same order the audience level is defined;
• No other select statements are used.
1. Enable the Select records with option in the Source tab of the Select process.
2. Click Advanced.
The Advanced Settings window appears.
3. Click to enable Use Raw SQL.
270 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Profiling fields
This activates raw SQL, a feature that passes your exact query syntax to thedatabase.
4. Select the database to use and the desired audience level.
Click OK.
5. Enter your SQL commands in the Select records with text box.
Click OK.N1B10001
To specify pre- or post-processing SQL statements1. From the Source tab of a Select process, click Advanced.
The Advanced Settings window appears.
2. To enter a pre-processing raw SQL statement, double-click inside the Pre-Processing field and enter the SQL statement you want to run before the processruns.
3. Next, click in the Database field on that line, and select the name of the databaseon which you want to run this statement.
The Database drop-down list displays all of the available databases (those forwhich a data source category has been configured on the Configuration page inMarketing Platform). If your database does not appear in this drop-down list,contact your Campaign system administrator.
4. Click to select the SQL checkbox if you want to view only SQL functions in the listpane. Click again to deselect, to see the full list of available functions and operators.
If you already enabled the Use Raw SQL option on the Advanced Settingswindow, the SQL option in the Query Helper is enabled. This will hide Campaignmacro functions, so that only SQL operators and functions are displayed.
N1540001
Profiling fieldsThe Profile feature lets you preview a list of distinct values and their frequency ofoccurrence for a selected field. You can profile any field that is available in any processwhere the Profile button appears, such as the Segment by Field drop-down list in theSegment process, or Available Fields or Candidate Fields lists in other processconfiguration dialogs. Only records in the current cell are included in the count, unlessthe counts have been pre-computed.
You must have the appropriate permissions to profile fields. Ask your systemadministrator if you have questions about your access to this feature.
N1B20001
Version 8.5.0 271
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
To profile a fieldCampaign automatically profiles a field when you select it in a field that has acorresponding Profile button. You can profile any field in any mapped data source.
1. In the configuration window of a process where the Profile button appears, selectthe field that you want to profile. You can also profile derived fields.
The Profile Selected Field window appears.
Campaign profiles the data in the selected field. The categories and frequency countsdynamically update as profiling progresses.
You should wait until profiling is finished before using profiling results, to ensure thatall categories have been processed and counts are complete.
When profiling is complete, the Profile Selected Field window displays:
• The list of values in the selected field, displayed in the Category column, and thecorresponding Count of IDs with that value.
The default maximum number of categories (distinct bins of values) that can bedisplayed is 25. Campaign automatically displays values in the maximumnumber of categories, grouping them to create approximately equal-sizedsegments. You can change the maximum number of categories.
• The Statistics pane on the right displays the total count of IDs and other detailsabout the data for that field, including:
• The number of NULL values found
• The total number of categories, or values, for that field
• Statistical values for the data including the mean, standard deviation, minimum,and maximum values.
Mean, Stdev., Min., and Max. and are not available for ASCII text fields. Whenyou profile text fields, these values will appear as all zeros.
N1B30001
Restricting input for profilingWhen Campaign profiles a field, it creates only those segments that are available in theinput to the process in which you are performing profiling.
In other words, if you restrict input to the Segment process, then profile that data basedon that same field on which it was restricted, the Profile results can only displaysegments that were available in the restricted input.
For example, in a Segment process, if you use a query to select only those IDsassociated with Credit Score < 5 out of a list of 10 potential credit score levels, then ifyou profile the same field (in this example, Behavior.CreditScore), then Campaign canonly display the four segments corresponding to those four remaining credit scorelevels.
272 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Profiling fields
The following examples compare an unrestricted profile (where Input Cell on the ProfileSelected Field window is set to None), and a restricted profile (where the Input Cell isset to Select1.out).
On the Profile Selected Field window, the Input Cell is set to None. When profiling isperformed, all 10 distinct values in the field Behavior.CreditScore are displayed.
On the Profile Selected Field window, the Input Cell is set to Select1.out, the output cellfrom a select process providing input into the current process which is restricted tocredit scores from 1 to 4.
Version 8.5.0 273
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
When profiling is performed, only 4 categories are displayed, each corresponding to oneof the allowed values in the input cell.
N1B40001
Disallowing profilingReal-time profiling allows you to view and use characteristics of a selected field. It canaffect performance, however, when working with large databases. For this reason,Campaign allows this option to be disabled.
When real-time profiling is disabled, and you click Profile, the Profile Selected Fieldwindow appears, but a message is displayed at the bottom of the window to indicatethat real-time profiling is disallowed.
If profiling is disallowed and the field is not configured to be pre-computed, the ProfileSelected Field window indicates that no data is available, no counts or categories aredisplayed, and all Statistics counts are zero.
Where pre-computed values are available for a field, when profiling is performed, thesevalues are displayed in place of the disallowed "live" values. The Profile Selected Fieldwindow indicates that the data source is "Imported," and displays the last updated dateand time of the pre-computed values.
For more information about disallowing real-time profiling, see the CampaignAdministrator's Guide.
N1B50001
Setting profiling optionsYou can affect how the Profile feature performs by :
• Restricting input for profiling
• Disallowing profiling
In addition, you can set these options in the Profiling Options window:
• Specifying the maximum number of profile segments
• Profiling by meta typeN1B90001
To access the Profiling Options window1. From any process configuration dialog in which the Profile option is available, select
a field for profiling, or click Profile.
The Profile Selected Field window appears.
2. From the Profile Selected Field window, click Options.
The Profiling Options window appears.N1B70001
274 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Profiling fields
Specifying the maximum number of profile segmentsWhen you Profile a field, Campaign automatically creates up to the maximum numberof segments set in the Profiling Options window. By default, a maximum of 25 segmentsare allowed.
You can change the maximum number of segments to be used for profiling. Once thissetting is changed, the new setting is used for all subsequent profiles until it is reset.
If the number of distinct values in the field you are profiling exceeds the maximumallowed number of segments, Profile will group values together into approximatelyequal sized segments to prevent exceeding the maximum number of segments.
N1BA0001
To set the maximum number of segments for profiling1. On the Profile Selected Field window, click Options.
The Profile Options window appears.
2. In the Number of Segments field, enter an integer to indicate the maximum numberof segments into which you want the field values grouped. By default, this value is25.
3. Click OK to save your settings and return to the Profile Selected Field window.
The profile is recomputed using the new maximum number of segments setting.N1B80001
Profiling by meta typeYou can specify whether metadata type information should be used when profiling byenabling or disabling the Profile By Meta Type checkbox on the Profiling Optionswindow.
Profile By Meta Type enabled is usually the desired behavior. Data types associatedwith fields containing dates, money, telephone numbers, and other numeric informationare correctly sorted and binned using the meta data information, rather than sortingpurely based on ASCII text.
For example, the following table shows a date field sorted using meta type informationand without. Profiling done without using meta type produces results sorted purelynumerically, while profiling done using meta type recognizes that the data are formattedas dates, and sorts them accordingly.
Profiled by Meta Type Profiled Without using Meta Type
25-DEC-2006 20-FEB-2007
20-FEB-2007 20-MAR-2007
20-MAR-2007 25-DEC-2006
N1BB0001
Version 8.5.0 275
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
Refreshing a profile countYou might want to refresh the profile count when something occurs that might changethe results (for example, when new values are added to a field), or whenever thedatabase table might have been updated.
To refresh the profile results for a field from the Profile Selected Field window, clickRecompute.
When you first profile a field from a dimension table, Campaign returns counts thatmatch the field in the dimension table. When you click Recompute to refresh theprofile results, Campaign returns counts from the resulting join with the base tablethat is linked to the dimension table. If you want to profile a dimension table fieldwithout joining to a base table, map the dimension table as a base table.
N1BC0001
To insert a profile category into a queryWhile building a query expression in a process configuration dialog, you can insert afield value into your query expression.
1. Perform profiling on the selected field.
2. When profiling is finished, from the Profile Selected Field window, double-click acategory to insert that value at the current cursor location in the query text box.
If you do not see the value you want, this might be due to multiple values beinggrouped together into a profile segment. If you set the maximum number ofprofile segments to a number greater than the number of categories (reported inthe Profile Selected Field window), each field value will be listed as a separatecategory. This makes it possible to access all of the existing categories.
N1BD0001
To print the results of a profile1. Click Print from the Profile Selected Field window.
The Page Setup page appears, from which you can specify the printer and printingoptions.
2. Click OK to confirm sending the print job to the printer.N1BE0001
To export profile dataAfter performing profiling on a field, you can export the profile data to a delimited textfile.
1. In the Profile Selected Field window, click Export.
The Export button is available only when profiling is finished.
276 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Specifying an output file or table for contact logging
The Export Report Data window appears.
2. (Optional) Select the Include Column Labels checkbox to include column heads inyour exported data.
3. Click Export.
The File Download window appears.
4. Click Open to open the profile data, or click Save to specify a location for saving thefile.
If you clicked Open, the profile data is displayed in a spreadsheet window.
If you clicked Save, the Save As window appears.
5. If you clicked Save, in the Save As window, navigate to the location where you wantthe export file to be saved, and enter the file name that you want to use for theexported file. By default, the name of the export file is Campaign.xls.
6. Click OK.
The data is exported to the file you specified. The Download Complete windowappears.
N1850001
Specifying an output file or table for contactlogging
Contact processes such as Mail List or Call List can write results to:
• system tables
• a new or existing external file that you specify
• an unmapped database tableN1BF0001
To specify an output file for contact logging1. In a flowchart in Edit mode, from the process configuration dialog, select File from
the Export To or Log To drop-down list. The File option usually appears at thebottom of the list, following the list of mapped tables.
The Specify Output File window appears.
2. Select the type of file to which you want to write:
• Flat file with data dictionary to create a new fixed-width file and new datadictionary file.
• Flat file based on existing data dictionary to create a new fixed-width file andselect an existing data dictionary file.
• Delimited file to create a new file in which field values are delimited by a tab,comma, or other character.
Version 8.5.0 277
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
3. If you selected Delimited file:
• Select the Tab, Comma, or Other option. If you selected Other, enter thecharacter to use as the delimiter in the Other field.
• Check Include Labels in Top Row if you want the first row of the file to containlabels for each column of data.
4. Enter the complete path and name of the file in the File Name field. You can alsoclick Browse to navigate to a directory and select an existing file.
You can use user variables in the output file name. For example, if you specifyMyFile<UserVar.a>.txt as the table name, and the value of the user variable "a"is "ABC" at the time that the process is run, the output is written to a file namedMyFileABC.txt. Be aware that you must set the Initial Value and the CurrentValue of the user variable prior to executing the flowchart.
5. Campaign automatically fills in the Data Dictionary field with a .dct file with thesame name and in the same location as the file you entered.
6. If you want to use a different data dictionary, or to rename the data dictionary, enterthe complete path and name of the data dictionary file in the Data Dictionary field.
7. Click OK.
The Specify Output File window closes. You are returned to the processconfiguration dialog, and the Export/Log to field displays the path and file nameyou entered.
N1C00001
To specify a database table for contact logging1. In the process configuration dialog, select New Table or Database Table from the
Export To or Log To drop-down list. This option usually appears at the bottom ofthe list, following the list of mapped tables.
The Specify Database Table window appears.
2. Specify the table name.
You can use user variables in the table name. For example, if you specifyMyTable<UserVar.a> as the table name, and the value of the user variable "a" is"ABC" at the time that the process is run, the output is written to a table namedMyTableABC. Be aware that you must set the Initial Value and the CurrentValue of the user variable prior to executing the flowchart.
3. Select the database name from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
The Specify Database Table window closes. You are returned to the processconfiguration dialog, and the Export/Log to field displays the name of the databasetable you entered.
278 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
Changing the seed for random selection
5. If a table of the name you specified already exists, choose an option for writing theoutput data:
• Append to Existing Data — if you choose this option, the existing table musthave a schema compatible with the output data. In other words, field names andfield types must match, and field sizes must allow for the output data to bewritten.
• Replace All Records — if you choose this option, existing rows in the table arereplaced with the new output rows.
N1910001
Changing the seed for random selectionThe random seed represents the starting point that Campaign uses to select recordsrandomly. If you are selecting records randomly, you might want to change the randomseed in situations such as the following:
• You have exactly the same number of records in the same sequence, and using thesame seed value each time you run this process results in records being createdinto the same samples.
• Your current random sample produces highly skewed results (for example, if allmales in your data fall into one group and all females into another).
N1C10001
To change the random seed for selecting recordsOn the Cell Size Limit tab of the process configuration dialog, change the starting pointfor the random selection in one of these ways:
• enter a numeric value in the Random Seed text box; or
• click Pick to have Campaign randomly select a new seed value for you.N1550002
Skipping duplicate IDs in process outputThe Extract, Call List, Mail List, and Snapshot processes allow you to specify how youwant to treat duplicate IDs in the process output. The default is to allow duplicate IDs inthe output. Follow these steps specify that duplicate IDs are excluded from the output.
1. From the configuration window of the process, click More.
You see the Advanced Settings window.
a. To specify that any records with duplicate IDs are skipped, select the SkipRecords with Duplicate IDs checkbox, and choose the criteria that Campaignwill use to decide which record to retain if duplicate IDs are returned. Forexample, you can select MaxOf and Household_Income to specify that whenduplicate IDs are returned, Campaign exports only the ID with the highesthousehold income.
Version 8.5.0 279
C - Working with IBM Unica Campaign Processes
This option only removes duplicates within the same input field. Your data canstill contain duplicate IDs if the same ID appears in multiple fields. If you want toremove all duplicate IDs, you must use a Merge or Segment process upstreamof the Extract process to purge duplicate IDs or create mutually-exclusivesegments.
2. Click OK to close the Advanced Settings window.
Your duplicate ID settings are displayed on the configuration window.N1920001
To use the Calendar toolThe Calendar tool is available for fields throughout Campaign where you can enter adate value into a field.
1. Click the ellipsis button next to the field requiring a date value.
The Calendar tool appears. The current date is selected by default.
2. Click the date on the displayed month to select it, or:
• Change the month using the Month drop-down list
• Change the year using the up and down arrows
3. Click OK to enter the specified date into the field and close the Calendar window.
280 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
N10B9F
D Uservariables
■ About user variables■ To create a user variable
N1C20001
About user variablesCampaign supports user variables, which can be used during process configurationwhen creating queries and expressions.
Guidelines for using user variablesThe following guidelines apply to user variables:
• User variables are local to the flowchart in which they are defined and used, buthave global scope within that flowchart.
• User variables use the following syntax: UserVar.UserVarName
• User variables have Initial Values, which is the value assigned when a uservariable is initially defined in the User Variables dialog. The Initial Value is onlyused to set the Current Value just prior to executing a flowchart run. It is theCurrent Value that Campaign uses during a flowchart run.
If the Current Value for a user variable is not set and you execute a process runor a branch run, Campaign will not be able to resolve the user variable.Campaign only sets the Current Value of a user variable to the Initial Valueprior to a flowchart run.
• You can change the Current Value of a user variable in the Derived Field window ofa Select process.
• User variables can be set to constants or to expressions, such as UserVar.myVar =Avg(UserTable.Age).
If you use an expression that returns multiple values (such as UserTable.Age +3, which will return one value for each record in the table) the user variable is setto the first value returned.
• When using user variables within SQL statements, do not enclose user variables inquotation marks, either single or double.
Version 8.5.0 281
D - User variables
• If you pass object names to your database (for example, if you use a user variablethat contains a flowchart name), you must ensure that the object name contains onlycharacters supported by your particular database. Otherwise, you will receive adatabase error.
• The values of user variables can be passed in on process execution.
• User variables are supported in outbound triggers.
• User variables are supported for use in custom macros.N1C30001
To create a user variable1. From a flowchart in Edit mode, click the Options icon and select User Variables.
The User Variables dialog appears.
2. In the Variable Name column, enter a name for the new user variable by clicking onthe <Click here to add new item> hotspot.
3. In the Data Type column, select a data type from the drop-down list. If you do notselect a data type, the application selects None when you click OK.
The None datatype may produce unpredictable results; to avoid this, specify thecorrect datatype.
4. In the Initial Value column, enter an initial (starting) value for the user variable. Youcan also profile fields for available values by clicking the ellipsis button that becomesavailable when you click inside the column.
5. In the Current Value column, enter a current value for the user variable. You canalso profile fields for available values by clicking the ellipsis button that becomesavailable when you click inside the column.
6. Repeat these steps for each user variable that you want to create.
7. When you have completed defining user variables, click OK.
The application stores the new user variables. You can access them later whenconfiguring processes.
After a flowchart run executes, the Current Value of each user variable is displayed inthe Current Value section for each user variable. If the current value is different fromthe initial value, you can restore the initial value by clicking Restore Defaults.
If the Current Value of a user variable is redefined in a Select process, resetting theCurrent Value to the Initial Value manually will have no effect on the value of theuser variable during a flowchart, branch, or process run.
282 IBM Unica Distributed Marketing - Corporate Marketer's Guide
